JP6164342B1 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Abstract

The present invention provides a gaming machine in which further improvements for preventing rut are made because effects related to decorative symbols have been frequently used. A decoration pattern includes a first decoration symbol and a second decoration symbol, the first decoration symbol is a decoration symbol corresponding to the variation of the first main game symbol, and the second decoration symbol is A pachinko gaming machine configured to display a first decorative symbol and a second decorative symbol at the same time as a decorative symbol corresponding to the variation of the second main gaming symbol. [Selection] Figure 97

Description

  It relates to pachinko machines.

  The most popular pachinko machines are now called “special symbols” (or main game symbols) on the 7-segment display, etc., when a game ball enters the starter (start chucker). When the special symbol is variably displayed and the special symbol is in a specific mode (for example, “7”), the special gaming state in which the player is in a profit state higher than the normal gaming state {the special winning opening that is normally closed This is a type of machine (so-called “first-class pachinko game machine”) that shifts to (a game of contents that a so-called attacker opens under a predetermined condition). Here, in order to reduce the burden of display control of special symbols that are directly linked to the interests of the player, in addition to the aforementioned “special symbols”, it is referred to as “decorative symbols” for the purpose of enhancing the fun of the game. The symbol to be displayed is variably displayed on a display such as a liquid crystal having a size larger than that of the display unit in a form synchronized with the variation of the special symbol. And when the change of the special symbol is started, the decorative symbol also starts to change accordingly, and when the special symbol stops in a specific mode (for example, “7”), the decorative symbol also changes to the predetermined mode (for example, “777”). Then, the player recognizes that the transition to the special game has been confirmed because the decorative symbol has stopped in a predetermined manner.

  Here, since this mechanism is common to this type of pachinko machine, in order to differentiate it from other types, how to devise the overall production including the variation aspect of the above-mentioned design and to have high interest It is focused on whether to grant. For example, it is possible to display two “decorative symbols” that are displayed in a variable manner at the same time, or hide the “decorative symbols” that are displayed in a variable manner, and display a highly interesting moving image instead. One of the methods is to improve the fun of the game by the method.

JP 2005-31274 A JP2011-45518 JP2014-014494A JP2014-014576A

  However, since such a production method has been widely used, there is a problem that further improvement is required for the control method in order to improve interest.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect is
The first start port arranged at a position where the game ball flowing down the first region side is easier to enter than the game ball flowing down the second region side;
A second starting port arranged at a position where a game ball flowing down the second region side can enter,
A variable winning opening that can be open and closed;
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information;
A second identification information display unit capable of displaying the second identification information;
A main game section that controls the progress of the game;
An effect display section capable of displaying the effect;
A sub game section that controls the display of effects on the effect display section,
The main game department
A first random number obtaining means for obtaining a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting port;
First game content determination means for determining whether or not the game is successful based on the first random number, and determining a stop display mode of the first identification information and a variable display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the determination.
First identification information display control means for controlling to stop and display the first identification information after variably displaying the first identification information in the first identification information display section according to the determination by the first game content determination means;
A second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting port;
Second game content determination means for determining whether or not to perform the determination based on the second random number, and determining a stop display mode of the second identification information and a variation display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the determination.
Second identification information display control means for controlling the second identification information to be stopped and displayed after the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display unit in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means;
After the result of the success / failure determination based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination and determination based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , A special game control means capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening advantageous to the player;
As a gaming state during the non-execution of the special game, there are a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state that makes it easier to enter the second starting port than the normal gaming state, and the special gaming state is set after the execution of the special game is completed. A game state transition control means capable of controlling
Game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the sub-game unit side to the sub-game unit side. The first identification information is not variably displayed while the second identification information is variably displayed.
The subsidiary game department
Game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game department side;
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means, effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit,
A first effect symbol display control means for controlling to display the final display mode of the first effect symbol on the effect display unit after the first effect symbol is variably displayed on the effect display unit;
A second effect symbol display control means for controlling to display the final display mode of the second effect symbol on the effect display unit after the second effect symbol is variably displayed on the effect display unit;
In the period from the start of variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or in the period from the start of variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first effect design and the second effect design can be displayed in a variable manner. It is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variation display mode, the variation display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variation display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variation display mode It is configured to be able to display the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variation display mode, the variation display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variation display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variation display mode It is configured to be able to display the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect design corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second display corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second display corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
The period from the start of variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is within one effect period,
For the first effect design that is variably displayed within a certain effect period, the provisional display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain effect period, and the provisional display When the mode is displayed, the pseudo-variation that is variably displayed again within the certain performance period can be executed. When the temporary display mode of the first effect design is displayed, the first effect is displayed. It is configured to display a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol.
About the second effect design that is variably displayed within a certain effect period, the special display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain effect period,
A launch notification effect can be displayed on the effect display unit to inform the second area to urge the launch of a game ball, and the launch notification effect is not displayed under the normal gaming state, while the launch notification effect is displayed. Is configured to be displayed under certain gaming conditions,
It is possible to display all of the first effect design, the second effect design and the launch notification effect at the same time,
A specific notice effect can be displayed on the effect display section within a certain effect period,
In the effect display unit, the launch notification effect is displayed at a position overlapping with the first effect symbol, and the specific notice effect is displayed at a position overlapping with the first effect symbol. ,
In the effect display unit, the launch notification effect is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the second effect symbol, while the specific notice effect is configured to be displayed at a position that overlaps with the second effect symbol. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by being.
<Appendix>
In addition, although the different aspect different from this aspect is listed below, it can implement without being limited to these at all.
The pachinko gaming machine according to this different aspect is
A first start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10) into which a game ball can enter;
A second start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A variable winning opening (for example, a first grand prize opening C10, a second big prize opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
A first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
A second identification information display part (for example, a second main game symbol display part B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying the effect;
A sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
First game content determination means (e.g., game content) for determining whether or not to perform the determination based on the first random number and determining a stop display mode of the first identification information and a variable display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the determination. Determining means MN),
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display one identification information;
A second random number acquisition means (for example, a second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10); ,
Second game content determination means (for example, game content) that executes a determination of whether or not based on the second random number and determines a stop display mode of the second identification information and a variable display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the determination Determining means MN),
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display section (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g), and then the second Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the second identification information;
After the result of the success / failure determination based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination and determination based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. A special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable prize opening (for example, the first big prize opening C10, the second big prize opening C20) advantageous to the player; ,
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) to the side of the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) MT),
Even if the first identification information is variably displayed, the second identification information can be variably displayed. Even if the second identification information is variably displayed, the first identification information can be variably displayed. And
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S)
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game part (for example, main control board M) side;
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)) is controlled. Production display control means SM20),
Based on the fact that the first identification information has started variable display, the first effect symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the effect display unit (eg, the effect display device SG), and the first identification information is stopped and displayed. First effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling to stop and display one effect symbol on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG);
Based on the fact that the second identification information has started the variable display, the second effect design is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. A second effect symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling to stop and display the two effect symbols on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG);
As a region in the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), a main region which is a region where the first effect symbol can be displayed in a variable manner or stopped, and a region where the second effect symbol can be displayed in a variable manner or stopped. A certain sub-region, and
The main area is configured to be larger than the sub area,
In the situation where both the first identification information and the second identification information are stopped and displayed, when a game ball enters the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10), the second effect The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the design can be variably displayed in the main area.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the control method related to the effect related to the decorative design.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is an overall electrical configuration diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is a functional block diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 5 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 6 is a flowchart of auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 7 is a flowchart of the electric accessory driving determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 11 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 12 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 15 is a flowchart of special game operation condition determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 18 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the hold information management process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 21 is an example of a decorative symbol effect table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 22 is an example of a decorative symbol effect table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the first decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the second decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 25 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the background effect control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 27 is an example of a decorative symbol effect table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the present embodiment. FIG. 28 is an example of a decorative symbol effect table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the present embodiment. FIG. 29 is an example of a decorative symbol effect table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 2 from the present embodiment. FIG. 30 is an example of a decorative symbol effect table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 2 from the present embodiment. FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 from the present embodiment. FIG. 32 is a flowchart of determining the design stop symbol on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 from the present embodiment. FIG. 33 is a display mode image diagram of a decorative design on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 from the present embodiment. FIG. 34 is an example of a decorative symbol effect table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 from the present embodiment. FIG. 35 is an example of a decorative symbol effect table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 from the present embodiment. FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the first decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 from the present embodiment. FIG. 37 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 from the present embodiment. FIG. 38 is a diagram related to the configuration of the effect display device in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 from the present embodiment. FIG. 39 is a transmission effect execution image diagram in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 from the present embodiment. FIG. 40 is a flowchart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 41 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 42 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 43 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the hold information management process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the first main game winning prefetch determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 46 is a flowchart of prefetch determination processing at the time of second main game winning on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 47 is a flowchart of prefetch hold content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 48 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol reservation content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 49 is a flowchart of the notice effect / illustration stop symbol determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 50 is a flowchart of the background effect control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 51 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 52 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 2 from the second embodiment. FIG. 53 is a flowchart of the first main game notice effect / illustration stop symbol determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 2 from the second embodiment. FIG. 54 is a flowchart of the second main game notice effect / illustration stop symbol determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 2 from the second embodiment. FIG. 55 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 from the second embodiment. FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the hold information management process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 from the second embodiment. FIG. 57 is a flowchart of a first main game winning prefetch determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 from the second embodiment. FIG. 58 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 from the second embodiment. FIG. 59 is a flowchart of the hold dependent state change control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 from the second embodiment. FIG. 60 is a hold change image diagram in the specific notice effect on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 from the second embodiment. FIG. 61 is a flowchart of the pending digest transmission image display process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 from the second embodiment. FIG. 62 is an image diagram of a change in pending digestion transmission image on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 from the second embodiment. FIG. 63 is a flowchart of the background effect control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 from the second embodiment. FIG. 64 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 65 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 66 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 67 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 68 is a flowchart of the special game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 69 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 70 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the special game is completed on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 71 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 72 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 73 is a flowchart of the first and second time figure content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 74 is a flowchart of time-short / medium decoration symbol display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 75 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 76 is a flowchart of right-handed instruction display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 77 is an image diagram related to the display mode and display position of the decorative symbols in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 78 is an image diagram relating to a decorative symbol display area in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 79 is an image diagram relating to a decorative symbol variable display period in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 80 is an image diagram related to a decorative design to be used in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 81 is an image diagram relating to a stop display mode of decorative symbols in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 82 is an example of display priority in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 83 is a conceptual diagram related to priority in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 84 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 85 is a flowchart of the hold information management process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 86 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 87 is an image diagram relating to a change in the hold display in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 88 is an image diagram related to the hold display for each gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 89 is an image diagram relating to deletion of the hold display in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 90 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 91 is an operation diagram of the sorting member unit of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 92 is a flowchart of main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 93 is a flowchart of first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 94 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 95 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 96 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 97 is a flowchart of the symbol standby display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 98 is a decorative symbol display mode image diagram in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 99 is a flowchart of the hold information management process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 100 is a flowchart of the hold change display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 101 is a hold occurrence display image diagram in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 102 is an on-hold digest display image diagram in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 103 is a reserved passage route image diagram in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 104 is a flowchart of the first main game winning prefetch determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 105 is a flowchart of prefetch determination processing at the time of second main game winning on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 106 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 107 is a flowchart of effect content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 108 is a first decorative design effect content determination table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 109 is a second decorative design effect content determination table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 110 is a flowchart of main area interrupt processing A on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 111 is a flowchart of pre-reading display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 112 is a flowchart of the first decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 113 is a flowchart of the second decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 114 is a big hit stop symbol display image diagram in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 115 is a flowchart of main area interrupt processing B on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 116 is an interrupt rendering execution image diagram in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 117 is a flowchart of main area interrupt processing C on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 118 is a flowchart of the background effect control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 119 is a flowchart of the accessory drive control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 120 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 121 is a first decorative design effect content determination table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 122 is a flowchart of main area interrupt processing A on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 123 is a flowchart of first decorative symbol display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 124 is a flowchart of main area interrupt processing B on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 125 is a flowchart of main area interrupt processing C on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the fifth embodiment.

Form to carry out

  First, the meaning of each term in this specification will be described. “Pitching” includes not only winning a prize ball to be paid out, but also passing to a “through chucker” without winning a prize ball. “Open state, open state” and “closed state, closed state” are, for example, in the configuration of a general big prize opening (so-called attacker), open state = easy-to-win state and closed state = non-winning state Easy state. Also, for example, a state protruding from the game board (player side) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as advance state) and a state of being retracted into the game board (side opposite to the player side) (hereinafter referred to as retreat state) In a configuration (so-called velo-type attacker) that can take the following condition, the advance state = easy-to-win state and the evacuation state = non-easy-to-win state. “Random number” is a random number used in a lottery (lottery by an electronic computer) to determine some game content in a pachinko game machine, and includes a pseudo-random number in addition to a random number in a narrow sense (for example, a hard- Random numbers and soft random numbers as pseudo-random numbers). For example, the so-called “basic random numbers” that affect the outcome of the game, specifically, “winning random numbers (random numbers for success / failure lottery)” related to the transition of special games, and the variation mode (or variation time) of the identification symbol "Variation mode determination random number" for determining, "symbol determination random number" for determining a stop symbol, "hit symbol determination random number" for determining whether or not to shift to a specific game (for example, probability variation game) after a special game, etc. be able to. It is not necessary to use all these random numbers when determining the contents of the variation mode, the contents of the definite identification information, etc., and it is sufficient to use at least one random number that is the same or different from each other. Also, in this specification, the number of random numbers may be displayed in the form of the number of random numbers or a plurality of random numbers, but one entry (for example, starting entrance) that triggers the acquisition of random numbers. The random number obtained by entering the ball is referred to as one (ie, in the above example, the random number bundle of winning random number + variation mode determining random number + design determining random number... Is referred to as one random number) . Further, for example, a kind of random number (for example, a winning random number) may also serve as another kind of random number (for example, a symbol determination random number). “Game state” means, for example, a transition to a special game state rather than a non-stochastic game state in which a lottery probability for transition to a special game state or a special game state in which a special winning opening can be in an open state is a predetermined value. A probabilistic variable gaming state with a high lottery probability, an auxiliary gaming state with assistance for winning at the starting port that becomes a lottery opportunity for special games (so-called normal symbol short-time state, for example, a variable member is attached to the starting port In such a case, the variable member may be one or a combination of a plurality of combinations such as a long opening period of the variable member, a high probability of winning the opening of the variable member, and a short notification time of the result of the variable member opening lottery. The “design for presentation” is a display image of a kind called a so-called decorative design or a decorative design, and typically has numbers, symbols, etc. written on an image object such as a card type. Then, the fact that the big hit has occurred is notified by finally stopping and displaying the image object on the effective line with a combination of the same numbers and symbols. The “design for the first effect” and the “design for the second effect” are both “design for the effect”, but each is configured to be able to notify the occurrence of the big hit independently. (For example, the symbol for the first effect is “777” and it is possible to report the occurrence of the big hit, and the symbol for the second effect is “777” and the occurrence of the big hit can be notified. But also) “Provisionally stop (or temporarily stop) the design for rendering” is synonymous with “temporarily stop → re-variate” as one set and perform / do not perform this one set. is there. Also, it is synonymous to exclude the final stop display timing for notifying whether or not a big hit has occurred (typically, the stop display is finally displayed together with a so-called special symbol stop display). In addition, the “design for presentation” is based on the first element (for example, numbers), and the second element (for example, color), the third element (the presence / absence / content of supplementary information such as characters and “SUPER”), etc. It may be configured as ancillary. In addition, when the production mode is different, the “design for presentation” may be configured such that the first element is the same, or the second element and / or the third element are different. Also, the expectation that the variation in reach will be a big hit due to the difference between the second element and / or the third element, the big change in the symbol change related to the prefetching effect when the specific symbol combination is stopped when the prefetching effect is executed The profit rate for the player, such as the number of rounds at the time of jackpot and the gaming state after the jackpot ends, may be different. Further, in such a configuration, in the case of the probability variation gaming state, the time shortening gaming state, or the like, the second element and / or the third element are compared with the player in the normal gaming state. You may comprise so that it may become an element advantageous to. In addition, the “information display unit” displays information including a notice effect, such as an effect display device, a 7-segment LED, an LED lamp, and the like. And the combination (whole unit) of several display media, such as presentation display apparatus +7 segment LED + LED lamp, may be shown. The “effect display unit” displays effects including a notice effect, such as an effect display device, a 7-segment LED, an LED lamp, and the like, which may each represent a single unit. And the combination (whole unit) of several display media, such as presentation display apparatus +7 segment LED + LED lamp, may be shown.

  The following embodiment is a model in which two conventional type 1 pachinko gaming machines are mixed (type 1 type 1 complex machine). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is applicable to other game machines (for example, conventional 1st type, 2nd type, 3rd type, general pachinko game machines such as general electric roles). . Note that this embodiment is merely an example, the location and function of each means, the order of each step regarding various processes, the timing of flag on / off, the name of the means responsible for each step, etc. It is not limited to the following aspects. In addition, the above-described embodiments and modified examples should not be understood as being limited to being applied to specific items, and may be in any combination. For example, it should be understood that a modification example of an embodiment is a modification example of another embodiment, and even if one modification example and another modification example are described independently, there is the modification example. It should be understood that a combination of the modified example and another modified example is also described. In the present embodiment, there are a lottery table and a reference table for various tables, but these are not limited, and the lottery table may be a reference table or vice versa.

  Prior to the detailed description of the present invention, a simple configuration according to the present invention will be described.

  Among the pachinko gaming machines according to the present invention, there are provided two types of decorative designs, a first decorative design and a second decorative design, where the first decorative design is not displayed or difficult to view. A configuration for displaying symbols (variation display) will be described in detail in this embodiment.

  Among the pachinko gaming machines according to the present invention, from the configuration of the present embodiment, a special symbol and a specific outcome (an outcome consisting of only numbers) are provided at the temporary stop timing of the middle row when the pseudo continuous variation is executed. The configuration changed so as to be able to temporarily stop will be described in detail in (Modification 1 from this embodiment).

  Among the pachinko gaming machines according to the present invention, from the configuration of the present embodiment, at the temporary stop timing of the middle row in the pseudo continuous fluctuation, the temporary stop timing becomes the latter half {or the pseudo continuous number in the fluctuation A configuration in which the number of stop modes that can be temporarily stopped increases as (the number of temporary stops in the middle row) increases will be described in detail in (Modification 2 from this embodiment).

  Among the pachinko gaming machines according to the present invention, the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG is in a transmissive state so that a transmission effect can be executed so that the objects in the effect display device SG can be visually recognized. A configuration in which the effect display in the second decorative symbol display device is executed even when the first decorative symbol is hidden will be described in detail in (Modification 3 from this embodiment).

  The pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention has a first decorative symbol and a second decorative symbol as decorative symbols, and is configured such that a prefetch effect can be executed. The second embodiment will be described in detail with reference to a configuration that can be stopped as a fixed stop symbol of fluctuations) and can be stopped as a pseudo continuous symbol of pseudo continuous fluctuations.

  Among pachinko gaming machines according to the present invention, from the configuration of the (second embodiment), a change to a specific hold display mode is performed at the time of execution of a hold change effect (effect in which the hold display mode changes) based on the winning of the pre-read lottery. A configuration that is changed so as to provide a notice effect that is executed only in the case of this will be described in detail in (Modification 1 from the second embodiment).

  Among the pachinko gaming machines according to the present invention, from the configuration of the (second embodiment), the appearance rate of the special symbols (the look-ahead lottery winning rate and the angel zone) due to the variation on the first main game side and the variation on the second main game side The configuration changed so that the migration lottery winning ratio) is different will be described in detail in (Modification 2 from the second embodiment).

  Among the pachinko gaming machines according to the present invention, in the time-reduced gaming state, one variation time of the first decorative symbol can be a time value corresponding to a plurality of variation times of the second decorative symbol (or the main game symbol). This configuration will be described in detail in (Third Embodiment).

  Various configurations relating to the display mode, display position, display area, priority, etc. of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, which can be applied to the pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention, are described in detail in the (fourth embodiment). explain.

  In the pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention, a configuration in which the display corresponding to the two holdings, the first holding display and the second holding display, is displayed on the effect display device (modified example 1 from the fourth embodiment) ) To explain in detail.

  Among the pachinko gaming machines according to the present invention, the parallel lottery can be executed, and the decorative symbol corresponding to the variation of the first main gaming symbol is the first decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol corresponding to the variation of the second main gaming symbol is the first. A configuration that has two decorative symbols will be described in detail in (Fifth Embodiment).

  Among the pachinko gaming machines according to the present invention, a configuration in which the configuration relating to the area where the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are displayed is changed from the configuration of the fifth embodiment (change from the fifth embodiment). This will be described in detail in Example 1).

(This embodiment)

  Here, before describing each component, the characteristics (outline) of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

  First, the basic structure of the front side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Pachinko gaming machines mainly consist of a gaming machine frame and a gaming board. Hereinafter, these will be described in order.

  First, the gaming machine frame of the pachinko gaming machine includes an outer frame D12, a front frame D14, a transparent plate D16, a door D18, an upper ball dish D20, a lower ball dish D22, and a launch handle D44. First, the outer frame D12 is a frame for fixing the pachinko gaming machine to a position where it should be installed. The front frame D14 is a frame body aligned with the opening portion of the outer frame D12, and is attached to the outer frame D12 via a hinge mechanism (not shown) so as to be opened and closed. The front frame D14 includes a mechanism for launching a game ball, a mechanism for detachably storing a game board, a mechanism for guiding or collecting the game ball, and the like. The transparent plate D16 is made of glass or the like and supported by the door D18. The door D18 is attached to the front frame D14 through a hinge mechanism (not shown) so as to be opened and closed. The upper ball tray D20 has a mechanism for storing game balls, sending the game balls to the launch rail, and extracting the game balls to the lower ball tray D22. The lower ball tray D22 has a mechanism for storing and extracting game balls. Speakers D24 are provided on the upper left and right sides of the gaming machine, and sound effects corresponding to the gaming state and the like are output.

  Next, the game board has a game area D30 defined by an outer rail D32 and an inner rail D34. In addition, the game area D30 includes a plurality of game nails and windmills (not shown), various general winning ports, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10, an auxiliary game start port H10, 1st grand prize opening C10, 2nd big prize opening C20, 1st main game symbol display device A20, 2nd main game symbol display device B20, production display device SG, auxiliary game symbol display device H20, center decoration D38 and out mouth D36 is installed. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail.

  Next, the first main game start opening A10 is installed as a start winning opening corresponding to the first main game. As a specific configuration, the first main game start opening A10 includes a first main game start opening entrance detection device A11s. Here, the first main game start entrance entrance detection device A11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of a game ball into the first main game start entrance A10, and the first main game start that indicates the entrance at the time of entrance. The entrance ball information is generated.

  Next, the second main game start opening B10 is installed as a start winning opening corresponding to the second main game. Specifically, the second main game start port B10 includes a second main game start port entrance detection device B11s and a second main game start port electric accessory B11d. Here, the second main game start entrance entrance detection device B11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of a game ball to the second main game start entrance B10, and the second main game start that indicates the entrance at the time of entrance. The entrance ball information is generated. Next, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is changed between a closed state in which a game ball is difficult to win in the second main game start port B10 and an open state in which the game ball is more likely to win than the normal state.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10 are arranged so as to overlap each other, and the second main game start port A10 is present due to the presence of the first main game start port A10. The upper part of the game start opening B10 is blocked. Both the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (referenced to the center of the game area) and the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (referenced to the center of the game area) are the first main game start opening A10. And it is comprised so that it may be guide | induced to 2nd main game start opening B10.

  In the present embodiment, the electric combination is provided on the second main game start opening B10 side. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the electric combination is provided on the first main game start opening A10 side. May be. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10 are arranged so as to overlap each other, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first main game start port You may comprise so that A10 and 2nd main game start opening B10 may be spaced apart. In the case of such a configuration, a member for closing the upper part of the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d may be provided. In addition, the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (referenced to the center of the game area) is easily guided to the first main game start port A10, but is difficult to be guided to the second main game start port B10. The game ball flowing down on the right side (based on the center of the game area) may not be guided to the first main game start port A10, but may be configured to be easily guided to the second main game start port B10. It should be noted that “easy to be guided” and “not easily guided” are determined, for example, by the magnitude of the number of entered balls when 10,000 balls are launched to the right and left, respectively.

  Next, the auxiliary game start port H10 includes an auxiliary game start port entrance detection device H11s. Here, the auxiliary game start port entrance detection device H11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of a game ball to the auxiliary game start port H10, and generates auxiliary game start port entrance information indicating the entrance at the time of entrance. To do. Note that the entry of the game ball into the auxiliary game start port H10 triggers a lottery to expand the second main game start port electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the auxiliary game start opening H10 is such that the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (referenced to the center of the game area) is easily guided and the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 is It is configured so that it is difficult to be guided {but is not limited to this, and it is configured so that a game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is easily guided to the auxiliary game start opening H10. (For example, auxiliary game start ports H10 may be provided on the left and right of the game area D30, respectively)}.

  Next, on the upper right side of the out mouth D36, the first big prize opening C10 and the second big prize opening C20 are arranged so as to overlap, and flow down to the right side of the gaming area D30 (referenced to the middle of the gaming area). The game ball is configured to easily pass through the area where the first grand prize winning opening C10 and the second big winning prize opening C20 are arranged before reaching the out opening D36.

  Next, the first grand prize opening C10 has a horizontal rectangular shape that is opened when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) stops at the big hit symbol. It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, located on the upper right side of the out opening D36 and below the second large winning opening C20. Specifically, the first grand prize opening C10 includes a first grand prize opening prize detection device C11s for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a first grand prize opening electric accessory C11d (and a first grand prize prize). Mouth solenoid C13). Here, the first grand prize opening winning detection device C11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first big prize opening C10. Is generated. The first grand prize opening electric accessory C11d changes the first big prize opening C10 to the first big prize opening C10 in a normal state in which a game ball cannot be won or difficult to win and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win (first). 1) The first prize winning solenoid C13 is excited and varied). In the present embodiment, the mode of the big winning opening is a mode in which a horizontal rectangular shape is formed and the game ball is variable between a normal state where the game ball cannot be won or difficult to win and an open state where the game ball is easy to win. It is not limited to. In that case, for example, an aspect (so-called, a state where the bar-like member provided in the special winning opening is in a state of protruding to the player side and a retracted state of being retracted to the player side) (Bello-type attacker), which is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entered into the big prize opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

  Next, the second grand prize opening C20 is formed in a horizontal rectangular shape that is opened when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) stops at the big hit symbol. It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, which is located at the upper right of the opening D36 and above the first big winning opening C10. Specifically, the second grand prize opening C20 includes a second grand prize opening prize detection device C21s for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a second grand prize opening electric accessory C21d (and a second grand prize prize). Mouth solenoid C23). Here, the second grand prize opening prize detection device C21s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second big prize opening C20, and the second big prize opening entry information that indicates the entry at the time of entry. Is generated. The game ball that has entered the second grand prize opening C20 is configured to be detected by the second big prize opening prize detection device C21s. Next, the second grand prize opening electric accessory C21d places the second big prize opening C20 into the second grand prize opening C20 in a normal state where a game ball cannot be won or difficult to win and an open state where the game ball is easy to win. Make it variable. In the present embodiment, the mode of the big winning opening is a mode in which a horizontal rectangular shape is formed and the game ball is variable between a normal state where the game ball cannot be won or difficult to win and an open state where the game ball is easy to win. It is not limited to. In that case, for example, an aspect (so-called, a state where the bar-like member provided in the special winning opening is in a state of protruding to the player side and a retracted state of being retracted to the player side) (Bello-type attacker), which is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entered into the big prize opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

  Next, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) is related to the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) corresponding to the first main game (second main game symbol). It is a device that executes the display and the like. Specifically, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) includes a first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol display unit B21g) and a first main game game. And a symbol hold display portion A21h (second main game symbol hold display portion B21h). Here, the first main game symbol hold display portion A21h (second main game symbol hold display portion B21h) is composed of four lamps, and the number of lighting of the lamps is the first main game (second main game). This corresponds to the number of random numbers held (the number of main game symbols that have not been executed). The first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol display unit B21g) is configured with, for example, a 7-segment LED, and the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) is “0” to “9”. ”Is displayed with 10 types of numbers and“ − ”of losing {but not limited to this, a 7-segment LED is set so that it is difficult for the player to recognize which main game symbol is displayed. It is preferable to use and display by a symbol or the like. In addition, the hold number display is not limited to being composed of four lamps, but can be configured to display a maximum of four hold numbers (for example, composed of one lamp, (Equation 1: lighting, hold number 2: slow blink, hold number 3: medium blink, hold number 4: fast blink)).

  Since the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) does not necessarily have an effect role, in this embodiment, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). The size of is set to be inconspicuous. However, the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) itself has a role to play and the first main game side decorative symbol (second main game side decorative symbol) is not displayed. In this case, the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) may be displayed on a liquid crystal display such as an effect display device SG described later.

  Next, the effect display device SG executes display of effect images including decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) that change and stop in conjunction with the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol. It is a device to do. Here, as a specific configuration, the effect display device SG includes a display area SG10 where an effect is executed including a variable display of decorative symbols. Here, the display area SG10 includes a first hold display section SG12 (and second hold display section SG13) that displays main game hold information, and a plurality of rows of decorative patterns (first decorations) simulating a slot machine game, for example. Design and second decorative design) has a decorative design display area SG11 for displaying a moving image of fluctuation. The effect display device SG is configured with a liquid crystal display in the present embodiment, but may be configured with other display means such as a mechanical drum or LED. Next, the first hold display section SG12 (and the second hold display section SG13) is composed of four lamps, and the lamps are linked with the hold lamp of the main game symbol.

  Next, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 is a device that executes display related to the auxiliary game symbols. As a specific configuration, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 includes an auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g and an auxiliary game symbol hold display unit H21h. Here, the auxiliary game symbol hold display portion H21h is composed of four lamps, and the number of lighting of the lamps corresponds to the number of auxiliary game symbol changes held (the number of auxiliary game symbol changes not being executed).

  Next, the center decoration D38 is installed around the effect display device SG, and has functions such as a flow path of the game ball, protection of the effect display device SG, and decoration. In addition, the game effect lamp D26 is provided in a game area D30 or an area other than the game area D30, and plays a role of effect by blinking or the like.

  Next, the basic structure on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko gaming machine controls the overall operation of the pachinko gaming machine, and in particular controls overall game operations such as lottery when entering the first main game starting port A10 (second main game starting port B10) (ie, game Main control board M that performs control directly related to the profits of the player, and effect control means (sub-main control unit) that performs display control and the like related to various effects on the effect display device SG that adds interest to the game content SM, a sub-sub control unit SS that mainly performs effect display, and a game ball supplied from the prize ball tank KT in accordance with the prize winning to the prize ball tank KT, the prize ball rail KR, and each prize opening, A prize ball payout device (set base) KE provided with a payout unit KE10 and the like, a prize ball payout control board KH for controlling the payout operation by the payout unit KE10, and a game ball (reserved ball) in the upper ball tray D20 To region D30 Turning on / off the launching device D42 that launches each ball, the launch control board D40 that controls the launching operation of the launching device D42, the power supply unit E that supplies power to each part of the pachinko gaming machine, and the pachinko gaming machine A power switch Ea or the like, which is a switch, is provided on the back of the front frame D14 (on the opposite side to the game side).

  Next, an electrical schematic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. First, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, as described above, pays out a game ball based on the main control board M that controls the progress of the game and information (signals, commands, etc.) from the main control board M. On the effect display device SG such as fluctuation / stop of the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) based on the prize ball payout control substrate KH to be controlled and information (signals, commands, etc.) from the main control substrate M Sub-control board S that controls the execution of various effects, sound from speaker D24, lighting of game effect lamp D26, error notification, etc. (in this example, sub-main control unit SM and sub-sub control unit SS are one board. And a power supply unit E that supplies power to the entire gaming machine including these control boards. Here, the sub-control board S has various effects on the effect display device SG such as variation / stop of the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol), sound from the speaker D24, and lighting of the game effect lamp D26. Sub-main control unit SM that controls error notification, and display processing such as variable display / stop display, hold display, and notice display of decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) on effect display device SG And two control units of the sub-sub control unit SS to be executed. The main control board M, the winning ball payout control board KH, the sub-main control unit SM, and the sub-sub control unit SS are a CPU that performs various arithmetic processes, and a ROM that stores programs that prescribe the arithmetic processes of the CPU and CPU RAM that temporarily stores data (various data generated during the game, computer programs read from the ROM, etc.) is installed. Here, although not particularly illustrated, the ROM mounted on the main control board M may be configured not to provide an unused area in order to prevent a program or the like modified by an illegal act from being written. It is preferable (for example, all unused areas are filled with zeros, and used areas are filled in young addresses and written). Also, in order to prevent reference to data that is not normally referenced due to noise or fraudulent behavior, unused data (for example, data referenced in gaming machines with different specifications or used only for testing at the development stage) It is preferable that the data is not provided. Similarly, when the RAM area is used, it is preferable that the area is used at a young address and an unused program area is not provided. Hereinafter, a schematic configuration of each substrate and an electrical connection mode between each substrate / device will be outlined.

  First, the main control board M has a winning opening sensor Ns {the first main game start entrance entrance detection device A11s, the second main game start entrance entrance detection device B11s, the auxiliary game start entrance entrance detection device H11s, 1st prize winning opening prize detection device C11s, 2nd big prize winning prize winning detection apparatus C21s, general winning detection apparatus (not shown, the general winning entry is a winning entry with a winning ball but no symbol lottery. )}, Drive solenoids (not shown) such as the first big prize winning solenoid C13, the second big prize winning solenoid C23, etc., information display LEDs (not shown), etc. that are essential for the progress of the game. It is electrically connected to the device, and the progress of the game is controlled based on the input signal from each input device. Further, the main control board M is also electrically connected to the prize ball payout control board KH and the sub control board S (sub-main control unit SM / sub-sub control unit SS). For example, information (commands) related to performance / game progress can be transmitted to the sub-control board S. The main control board M can be connected to the hall computer HC or the like via an external connection terminal (not shown), and the main control board M can be connected to the hall computer HC via an external connection terminal. The game-related information can be output from an external device to an external device.

  In the present embodiment, as indicated by the arrows in FIG. 3, the main control board M and the winning ball payout control board KH are configured to be capable of bidirectional communication, while the main control board M and the sub main The control unit SM is configured to allow one-way communication from the main control board M to the sub-main control unit SM (the communication method may be either serial communication or parallel communication). The communication between control boards (between control devices) may be one-way communication or two-way communication.

  Next, the prize ball payout control board KH is a prize ball payout apparatus KE that executes payout of game balls, and an apparatus that can be operated by a player, accepts a game ball rental request, and receives the prize ball payout control board KH. It is connected to a game ball lending device R for transmission. Although not shown, in the present embodiment, the control circuit unit of the launching device is provided in the prize ball payout control board, and the prize ball payout control board and the launching device (launching handle, firing motor, ball feeding device). Etc.). In the present embodiment, the game ball lending device R is used as a separate body and is adjacent to the game machine. However, the game ball lending device R may be integrated with the game machine. Control and management control of a recording medium for lending such as electronic money may be integrated.

  Next, as described above, the sub-control board S has an effect display device SG for displaying decorative symbols (first decorative symbols and second decorative symbols), a speaker D24, a game effect lamp D26, and other effects. It is connected to a drive device (not shown). In the present embodiment, as described above, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub control unit SS are provided in the sub-control board S, and control of the sound output from the speaker D24 by the sub-main control unit SM and game effects ( Lighting) The lighting control of the lamp D26 and the determination control of the display contents to be displayed on the effect display device are performed, and the display control (substantial display control) on the effect display device is performed by the sub-sub control unit SS. It is configured. In the present embodiment, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub control unit SS are configured to be integrated on the sub-control board S. However, the present invention is not limited to this (configured as a separate board). However, it is possible to reduce the situation that space is merited and noise is mixed into the wiring or the like by being configured to be integrated). Also, the work sharing between the two control units can be changed as appropriate, for example, the voice control is executed by the sub-sub control unit SS (suitable when a voice control circuit integrated with the VDP is adopted). Further, an electronic value may be given without giving a physical prize ball as a prize ball.

  Next, various functions of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. First, the main control board M is a game peripheral device related to the game (first main game peripheral device A, second main game peripheral device B, first and second main game shared peripheral device C, auxiliary game peripheral device H), A sub-main control unit SM (sub-game control means SM) related to the performance is connected to a prize ball payout control board KH that performs payout control of a predetermined number of prize balls based on a payout instruction from the main control board M so that information can be transmitted. ing. Further, the sub main control unit SM (sub game control means SM) is electrically connected to the sub sub control unit SS (effect display means SS) for executing image effects, various game effect lamps D26 (for example, side lamps), speakers D24, and the like. It is connected. Further, the prize ball payout control board KH is electrically connected to a prize ball payout device KE including a stepping motor, a sprocket, and the like. The main control board M, sub main control part SM (sub game control means SM), sub sub control part SS (effect display means SS), prize ball payout control board KH, etc. store data and programs in hardware. ROM, RAM, and elements such as CPU used for arithmetic processing. In the following description, each means included in the main control board M may be configured to be mounted on a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device). For example, each means that is included in a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device) may be configured to be mounted on the main control board M. The details of each means (device) will be described below.

  First, the main control board M has a game information control means MJ for controlling the acquisition of game information, a game content determination means MN for determining the contents of the game, and the progress of games such as special games and specific games. And the game progress means MP that manages the current and past game states [e.g., state relating to the main game {normal game state, specific game state (probability varying game state, time-reduced game state), special game state}, state relating to the auxiliary game (Easy release state, non-easy release state), stop symbol and variation mode information related to main game symbol and auxiliary game symbol, on / off status of various flags, game status during special game (for example, number of rounds and winning number information) ] Game state temporary storage means MB for temporarily storing, and various game information {for example, stop symbol information, stop symbol attribute information {for example, 16R big hit, 8R big hit, 4 Jackpots, loses}, information on variation modes (for example, variation time), special game start signal / status information / end signal, hold information, etc.} for transmitting information transmission control means MT (and unsent commands) A command transmission buffer MT10), and a winning ball payout determining means MH for controlling the winning ball payout control board KH so as to pay out a predetermined winning ball based on winning of game balls to various winning holes. Yes.

  Here, the game information control means MJ determines whether or not each random number can be acquired, and the entrance determination means MJ10 for determining the inflow of game balls to each entrance (starting opening, etc.), and the determination result Random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20 for acquiring each random number based on the above, and holding control means MJ30 for temporarily storing the ball entering each starting port during the variable display as a holding ball within the upper limit number. doing. In addition, the game progression means MP directly determines the opening / closing of the display control means MP10 for performing control to change and stop each symbol, and the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d of the second main game start opening B10. Second main game start opening electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B for performing various related processes, special game control means MP30 for controlling a special game advantageous to the player over the normal game, and a first main game With respect to the game, the second main game, and the auxiliary game, there is a determination as to which game state the current game state is to be transferred, and specific game control means MP50 for performing a process of shifting the game state based on the determination. doing. Hereinafter, each means will be described in detail.

  First, the entrance determination means MJ10 includes a first main game start entrance entrance determination means MJ11-A that determines whether or not a game ball has entered the first main game start entrance A10, and a second main game start entrance. The second main game start port entrance determining means MJ11-B for determining whether or not a game ball has entered B10, and the auxiliary game start port for determining whether or not a game ball has flowed into the auxiliary game start port H10 In the first winning prize entrance determining means MJ11-C10 and the second winning prize opening C20, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the first winning prize opening C10. And a second grand prize opening entrance determining means MJ11-C20 for determining whether or not a game ball has entered.

  Next, the random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20 determines whether or not to acquire the first main game side random number based on the game ball entering the first main game start opening A10, and according to the determination result, To first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A for acquiring random numbers (for example, first winning random number, first variation mode determining random number, first main game symbol determining random number, etc.) and second main game starting port B10 And determining whether or not to acquire the second main game random number based on the incoming game ball, and depending on the determination result, the random number (for example, the second winning random number, the second variation mode determining random number, the second main random number, A second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B for acquiring a game symbol determination random number and the like, and whether or not the auxiliary game side selection random number can be acquired, and an auxiliary game for acquiring the random number based on the determination result Random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H There.

  Here, the “random number” in the claims and the present specification including the above is, for example, “0” to “65535” or “random number” assigned according to the type of random number (for example, a winning random number or a variation mode determining random number). It is a value randomly selected from a predetermined range such as “0” to “255”. The random number may not be a mathematically generated random number, but may be a pseudo random number generated by a hardware random number, a software random number, or the like. For example, the expression method of each value in the random number is a method in which the value is expressed in order along the random number sequence (plus one method), the next value when the final value of the random number sequence is expressed (initial value) ) With a contingent value (initial value update method), a combination of these, and the like. By acquiring a random number by such a method, it is possible to generate an aperiodic random number that is difficult to be predicted by the player. Conversely, for example, in the case of a method for generating a next random number using a random number used in a certain lottery, the next random number is likely to be predicted. Therefore, when generating a random number, it is preferable to generate a new random number without using the random number used in the previous lottery.

  Next, the hold control means MJ30 uses the hold digest control means MJ31 for controlling the processing related to the hold digest and the change start, and the first main game side random number obtained in a situation where the first main game symbol change permission has not been granted. It is determined whether or not to temporarily store, and based on the determination result, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32 for holding the random number in the first main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-A until the symbol variation permission is granted. -It is determined whether to temporarily store the second main game random number acquired in a situation where the second main game symbol variation permission has not been granted, and the random number is given the symbol variation permission based on the determination result The second main game symbol hold means MJ32-B for holding in the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B, and the auxiliary game acquired in a situation where the auxiliary game symbol change permission is not granted It is determined whether or not the random number is temporarily stored, and based on the determination result, the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H for holding the random number in the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H until the symbol variation permission is granted. And have.

  Here, the pending digest control means MJ31 has a change start condition satisfaction determination means MJ31j for determining whether or not a condition for starting change is satisfied.

  Next, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A, the second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B and the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H can store a maximum of four, and combine the random numbers with the holding order. The first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A, the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B and the auxiliary game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-H for temporarily storing in the form Have.

  Next, the game content determination means MN makes a special game if the result of the lottery is a winning lottery means MN10 for lottery of whether or not the special game is successful and whether or not the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is open. Special game transition determining means MN20 for determining the transition of each symbol, for example, symbol content determining means MN40 for determining the stop symbol of each symbol based on each random number, and each random number And variation mode determining means MN50 for determining the variation mode (variation time, etc.) of each symbol. Here, the success / failure lottery means MN10 is a first main game winner / rejection lottery means MN11-A that performs a success / failure lottery on the first main game symbol, and a second main game winner / rejection lottery unit that performs a success / failure lottery on the second main game symbol. It has MN11-B, and auxiliary game winning / failing lottery means MN11-H for making a winning / losing lottery regarding the auxiliary game symbols. Here, the first main game success / failure lottery means MN11-A, the second main game winner / rejection lottery means MN11-B, and the auxiliary game success / failure lottery means MN11-H are referred to when performing the success / failure lottery with respect to the first main game symbol. The first main game success / failure lottery table MN11ta-A, the second main game success / failure lottery table MN11ta-B referred to when performing the success / failure lottery on the second main game symbol, and the auxiliary game symbol on / off lottery Each of which has an auxiliary gaming success / failure lottery table MN11ta-H that is referred to when performing. An example of a detailed table configuration will be described later.

  Here, when executing the lottery determination based on the main game random number, the success / failure lottery means MN10 determines whether or not the main game random number value is the same as any one of all the winning random number values, If some or all of the random number values are continuous numbers, the main game random number value is equal to or less than the upper limit value of the hit random number value and is determined to determine whether it is greater than or equal to the lower limit value. . By executing such determination as to whether or not it is correct, accurate determination processing can be executed. On the contrary, when the determination is made by comparison with only the upper limit of the hit random number range, or only with the lower limit, the value at the end of the random number range (for example, when the range of the random number value is 0 to 1023, 0 or 1023) needs to be a random number value, making it vulnerable to fraud (for example, fraudulent action of passing current through the main control board M, where all bits in the storage area are likely to be 0 or 1). There is a risk of end. In this example, one lottery is executed using one random number {when a plurality of random numbers are used for one lottery (so-called two-stage lottery is executed), two random numbers are used. Because it needs to be prevented from synchronizing}.

  Next, the symbol content determination means MN40 and the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A for determining the stop symbol of the first main game symbol based on the acquired game content determination random number (first main game random number) and the acquisition Based on the determined game content determination random number (second main game random number), the second main game symbol determining means MN41-B for determining the stop symbol of the second main game symbol, and the auxiliary game symbol based on the acquired auxiliary game symbol winning random number Auxiliary game symbol determining means MN41-H for determining the stop symbol of the game.

  Here, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A has a first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A referred to when determining a stop symbol related to the first main game symbol, The first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A includes various lottery tables that differ depending on the result of the success / failure and the game state (for example, for the game state, for the normal game → the first main game normal game state). Lottery table, probability variation game → first main game probability variation game state lottery table, time reduction game → first main game time reduction game state lottery table). The second main game symbol determination means MN41-B has a second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B that is referred to when determining a stop symbol related to the second main game symbol. The second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B includes various lottery tables that differ depending on the result of the success / failure and the game state (for example, for the game state, the normal game → the second main game normal game state lottery Table, probability variation game → second main game probability variation game state lottery table, time reduction game → second main game time reduction game state lottery table). An example of a detailed table configuration will be described later. Further, the auxiliary game symbol determination means MN41-H has an auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-H which is referred to when determining a stop symbol related to the auxiliary game symbol. The table MN41ta-H has various winning tables that differ depending on the gaming state (normal game → auxiliary game normal lottery table, probability variation game and time shortening game → auxiliary game time lottery table).

  Next, the variation mode determination unit MN50 determines the variation mode (variation time, etc.) of the first main game symbol based on the acquired game content determination random number (first primary game random number). MN 51-A and second main game variation mode determination means MN51-B for determining a variation mode (variation time, etc.) of the second main game symbol based on the acquired game content determination random number (second main game random number), And auxiliary game variation mode determining means MN51-H for determining the variation mode (variation time, etc.) of the auxiliary game symbol based on the acquired auxiliary game symbol winning random number.

  Here, the first main game variation mode determination means MN51-A has a first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A that is referred to when determining the variation mode related to the first main game symbol. The first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A includes various lottery tables that differ depending on the result of the success / failure and the game state (for example, regarding the game state, normal game → first main game normal (Game state lottery table, probability variation game → first main game probability variation game state lottery table, time reduction game → first main game time reduction game state lottery table). The second main game variation mode determination means MN51-B has a second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B which is referred to when determining the variation mode related to the second main game symbol. The second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B includes various lottery tables that differ depending on the result of the success / failure and the gaming state (for example, regarding the gaming state, normal game → second main game normal game) State lottery table, probability variation game → second main game probability variation game state lottery table, time reduction game → second main game time reduction game state lottery table). An example of a detailed table configuration will be described later. Further, the auxiliary game variation mode determination means MN51-H has an auxiliary game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-H that is referred to when determining the variation mode related to the auxiliary game symbol. The determination lottery table MN51ta-H includes various winning tables that differ depending on the gaming state (normal game → auxiliary game normal lottery table, probability variation game and time reduction game → auxiliary game time reduction lottery table).

  Next, the display control means MP10 performs a predetermined time on the first main game symbol display unit A21g of the first main game symbol display device A20 and on the second main game symbol display unit B21g of the second main game symbol display device B20. The first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C for controlling to stop display after changing the first main game symbol and the auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g of the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are assisted for a predetermined time. Auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H for controlling to stop and display after changing the game symbol is provided.

  Here, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C has first and second main game symbol variation management timers MP11t-C (decrement counter) that can be cleared to zero. Further, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H further includes an auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H capable of measuring time.

  Next, the second main game start opening electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B determines whether or not the condition for performing the process of opening / closing the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is satisfied. The second main game start port electric player opening / closing condition determining means MP21-B and the second main game start port electric player opening timer MP22t for measuring the driving (opening) time of the second main game start port electric player B11d -B.

  Next, when the special game control means MP30 satisfies the condition determination means MP31 for determining whether or not the condition for shifting to the special game is satisfied, and the special game transfer condition, the contents of the special game (Specifically, the big winning opening to be opened, the number of rounds, the time between rounds, etc.) are determined and set in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Special game execution means MP33 for executing a special game (big hit) for opening the mouth C10 or the second grand prize port C20 in a predetermined condition, and time management of various processes related to the special game (for example, the first grand prize port) Special game time management means MP34 for performing C10 and opening / closing time of the second big prize opening C20). Here, the special game executing means MP33 includes first and second prize winning opening electric accessory opening / closing control means MP33-C for opening and closing the first prize winning opening electric accessory C11d and the second prize winning opening electric accessory C21d. , A winning ball counter MP33c for measuring winning balls to the first big winning opening C10 and the second big winning opening C20 is provided. The special game time management means MP34 further includes a special game timer MP34t for managing the round time. The special game content determination means MP32 further includes a special game content reference table MP32ta that is referred to when specifying the content of the special game to be set in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b (table) Details are not shown).

  Next, the specific game control means MP50 satisfies the probability variation game end condition determination means MP51 for determining whether or not the end condition for the probability variation game state is satisfied, and whether or not the end condition for the time-reduced game state is satisfied. Has a short-time game end condition determining means MP52. Here, the short-time game end condition determining means MP52 has a short-time number counter MP52c capable of counting the short-time number. Here, the “specific game” means, for example, a probability variation game in which a lottery probability for a special game is higher than that in a normal game or a time shortening game in which the variation time of the main game symbol is relatively shorter than that in a normal game. Point to.

  Here, in the present embodiment, during the time reduction game, the variation time of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol is relatively shortened (time reduction) compared to during the non-time reduction game. function). Further, the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol is also relatively shortened, and the open extension time of the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is relatively extended (open time extension function). Also, the time-reduced game in the present embodiment ends when the total value of the number of changes of the first main game symbol and the number of times of change of the second main game symbol exceeds a predetermined number (probability variation game with no time limit restriction). except for). That is, the number of time reductions is configured to be subtracted every time the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol fluctuate (stop). The probability variation game end condition determination means MP51 and the short time game end condition determination means MP52 described above are, for example, a lottery to shift from a specific game (for example, a probability variation game or a time-reduced game) to a normal game with a predetermined probability every time the symbol changes. (A so-called pachinko gaming machine having a falling lottery function). Note that the time-reduced gaming state according to this example may be that the main game short time flag is on, or the auxiliary game short time flag may be on, that is, the time shortened gaming state. May indicate that the opening time extension function is activated, or the non-time-reduced gaming state may indicate that the opening time extension function is not activated. The time-reduced gaming state may be referred to as a specific gaming state, and the non-time-reducing gaming state may be referred to as a normal gaming state. Further, the probability variation gaming state may be referred to as a high probability lottery state, and the non-probability variation gaming state may be referred to as a low probability lottery state.

  Next, the game state temporary storage means MB includes the first main game (game from the change of the first main game symbol to the stop) and the second main game (from the change of the second main game symbol to the stop). First and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C for temporarily storing the current game state in the game) and auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10- for temporarily storing the current game state in the auxiliary game Special game-related information temporary storage means for temporarily storing H and the current game state in the special game (for example, the number of rounds, the number of winning game balls in an arbitrary round, on / off of various flags related to special games, etc.) Specific game-related information for temporarily storing the MB20b and the current game state in the specific game (for example, the remaining number of time reductions, ON / OFF of various flags related to the specific game, etc.) Has a storage means MB30b, the.

  Here, the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C are stopped according to the first or second main game symbol that is currently changing (the first or second main game symbol that satisfies the change start condition). There are first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C for temporarily storing symbols and variation mode information.

  Further, the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H temporarily stores auxiliary game symbol information for temporarily storing information such as stop symbols related to the currently changing auxiliary game symbols (auxiliary game symbols for which the change start condition is satisfied). Means MB11b-H.

  Next, game peripheral devices will be described. Since some of the peripheral devices have already been described in detail, the remaining configuration will be briefly described. First, the game peripheral devices are a first main game peripheral device A that is a peripheral device on the first main game side, a second main game peripheral device B that is a peripheral device on the second main game side, and a first main game side. First and second main game shared peripheral device C, which is a shared peripheral device on the second main game side, auxiliary game peripheral device H related to auxiliary games, sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM, sub sub control unit SS (and effect display device SG) and the like. Here, the effect controlled by the sub-main control unit SM is a decorative symbol (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) that is temporally synchronized with changes in the first main gaming symbol and the second main gaming symbol. This includes the display of only information that does not affect game results, including changes in symbols. Hereinafter, these peripheral devices will be described in order.

  First, the first main game peripheral device A includes a first main game start opening A10 that triggers the transition to a special game, and a first main game symbol display device A20 that can display stop and change display of the first main game symbol. ,have.

  Next, the second main game peripheral device B has a second main game start port B10 that triggers the transition to the special game, and a second main game symbol display device B20 that can display stop and change display of the second main game symbol. And have.

  Next, the first and second main game shared peripheral device C is in a closed state during a normal game, and is opened under a predetermined condition during a special game (big hit). And a second grand prize opening C20.

  Next, the auxiliary game peripheral device H includes the auxiliary game start port H10 that triggers the opening of the second main game start port electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10, and the stop display and change display of the auxiliary game symbols. And an auxiliary game symbol display device H20 capable of supporting the above.

  Next, the effect display control means (sub-main control unit) SM includes display information receiving means SM10 for receiving various information from the main control board M side, effect content determination processing and display control processing for effect display. Effect display control means SM20 that controls the information transmission / reception control means SM40 that controls information transmission / reception with the sub-sub control unit SS side. Hereafter, each said means is explained in full detail.

  First, the display information receiving means SM10 has main-side information temporary storage means SM11b for temporarily storing symbol information and display instruction information related to the first main game and the second main game from the main control board M side. .

  Next, the effect display control means SM20 includes a decoration symbol display control means SM21 that controls a variation pattern of the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol), a stop symbol determination process, and a display control process. (1 decoration symbol and 2nd decoration symbol) hold number management and hold display display control means SM22 responsible for display processing, background effect display control means SM23 responsible for background image determination processing and display control processing, and notice effect It has a notice effect display control means SM24 that controls content determination processing and display control processing, and reach effect display control means SM25 that controls reach effect content determination processing and display control processing.

  Here, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 is based on the information from the main control board M side, the decorative symbols {in this embodiment, referred to as two types of decorative symbols (hereinafter referred to as a first decorative symbol and a second decorative symbol). The first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are independent from each other, and the game is obtained by combining three numeric symbols of the first decorative symbol or the second decorative symbol. The display display content determination means SM21n for determining the stop symbol and variation mode of which the result can be notified, and various information (variation mode) relating to the symbol variation of the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) Information temporary display means SM21b for temporarily storing information, stop symbol information, various flags, etc.) and first time for measuring the variation time of the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) Drawing variation time management Thailand It has a SM21t-1, the. Here, the drawing display content determination means SM21n is a drawing variation content determination lottery (reference) table that is referred to when determining the stop symbol and variation mode of the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol). SM21ta (details of the table are not shown) and decoration contents referred to when determining (or setting) presentation contents, display update timing, and display update contents of decoration symbols (first decoration symbol and second decoration symbol) It further has a symbol effect table SM21ta-2. The first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are both independently controlled for display on the presentation display control means (sub-main control unit) SM side based on information from the main control board M side. The two types of decorative designs are used to improve the stage's appeal and make it easier to grasp the progress of the game. To do.

  Next, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 has a drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b for temporarily storing information related to the hold related to the decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol). .

  Next, the background effect display control means SM23 temporarily stores the information related to the background effect display content determining means SM23n for determining the display content of the background effect based on the information from the main control board M side. And background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b.

  Next, the notice effect display control means SM24 is based on the information from the main control board M side, the notice effect display content determining means SM24n for determining the display content and display timing of the notice effect, and the information related to the notice effect display. Is temporarily stored in advance notice related information SM24b.

  Next, the reach effect display control means SM25 is based on information from the main control board M side, reach effect display content determining means SM25n for determining the display content and display timing of the reach effect, and information related to the reach effect display. Reach production related information temporary storage means SM25b.

  Further, the effect display means (sub-sub control part) SS displays an image on the display area SG10 on the effect display device SG and the sub-information transmission / reception control means SS10 that controls information transmission / reception with the sub-main control part SM side. Control means SS20. Here, the image display control means SS20 further includes image display related information temporary storage means SS21b for temporarily storing commands received from the sub-main control unit SM side and information relating to various image displays.

  The effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS is electrically connected to an effect display device SG that displays an image related to the effect based on information from the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS. Here, the effect display device SG has a display area SG10 for displaying an image.

  Here, the display area SG10 includes a decorative symbol display area SG11 for variably displaying decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol), and a first hold display portion SG12 (and first display) for displaying main game hold information. 2 hold display part SG13).

  The first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20, and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are connected to the main control board M so as to be able to transmit information, and the remaining effect display means (sub-sub control unit) ) SS is connected to the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM so that information can be transmitted. That is, the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20, and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are controlled by the main control board M, and the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS is sub-game control. Meaning that it is controlled by means (sub-main control unit) SM. Note that another peripheral device may be controlled via the main control board M and another peripheral device controlled by one-way communication (one-way communication).

  From here, an example of a general processing flow in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described using a flowchart. The flowchart is mainly composed of processing steps (illustrated by rectangles), judgments (illustrated by diamonds), flow lines (arrows), terminals indicating start / end / return, etc. (illustrated by rounded rectangles). . Moreover, when the details are illustrated in another flowchart among the processing steps, those referring to the other flowchart are illustrated as a subroutine (illustrated by a rectangle in which the left and right lines are double lines). . Here, in the development stage of gaming machines, gaming machines with different specifications are also developed at the same time, but in this example, a subroutine ( (Subroutines that are not normally used) are not left behind, and processing related to unused subroutines that are not normally executed due to noise or fraudulent actions is prevented from being executed.

  First, FIG. 5 is a main flowchart showing the flow of general processing performed by the main control board M. After powering on the gaming machine, the process of FIG. That is, after the game machine is turned on and initialized (not shown), in step 1002, the main control board M confirms the input port of the RAM clear button and resets the power supply unit E (RAM clear). Button) has been operated, that is, whether or not an operation of clearing the contents of the RAM has been performed intentionally by a game hall manager or the like. In the case of Yes in step 1002, in step 1004, the main control board M clears all the RAM contents (for example, information in the game state temporary storage means MB) on the main control board M side. Next, in step 1006, the information transmission control means MT transmits ram clear information (command) indicating that the RAM of the main control board M has been cleared to the sub main control unit SM side (even if it is transmitted at this timing). Alternatively, a command may be set at this timing and transmitted by a control command transmission process described later), and the process proceeds to step 1016. On the other hand, if No in step 1002, the main control board M checks the contents of the RAM area in the main control board M in step 1008 (for example, the checksum recorded at the time of power interruption and the RAM area are stored in the RAM area). Comparison with the amount of information). Next, in step 1010, the main control board M determines whether or not the contents of the RAM are not normal based on the check result (whether or not the information at the time of power interruption is accurately backed up in the RAM). If YES in step 1010, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is abnormal, the process proceeds to step 1004 (RAM clear process described above). On the other hand, if the data backed up to the RAM in Step 1010 is normal, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is normal, the main control board M is stored (backed up) in the RAM in the main control board M in Step 1012. The information command is acquired, and in step 1014, the acquired various information commands are transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side (the command may be transmitted at the timing, or the command is set at the timing and described later. It may be configured to transmit in the transmission process), and the process proceeds to step 1016. Next, in step 1016, the main control board M is triggered by a scheduled execution interrupt (for example, about every 1.5 ms) related to the main process on the main control board M side shown in FIG. However, in this example, the interrupt period is set to T) (as a result, when the execution scheduled interrupt timing is reached, (b) in FIG. 11 is executed), the process proceeds to step 1018. . After step 1018, the main control board M repeatedly executes various random number update processing (for example, random number counter increment processing) until the next scheduled interrupt timing is reached.

  It should be noted that the initial value of the temporary storage area (RAM or the like) mounted on the main control board M is preferably configured not to be a value at which a special game is executed (immediately after starting the program processing, noise or fraudulent behavior). In order to prevent the special game from being erroneously executed when the process for determining whether to execute the special game has been executed.

  Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The main control board M executes the process shown in FIG. 5B based on the interrupt request generated when the scheduled interrupt timing is reached. That is, triggered by the arrival of the scheduled interrupt period T (for example, a hardware interrupt about every 1.5 ms), in step 1100, the main control board M executes an auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process described later. Next, at step 1200, the main control board M executes an electric accessory driving determination process described later. Next, in step 1300, the main control board M executes a main game content determination random number acquisition process which will be described later. Next, in step 1400, the main control board M executes a main game symbol display process described later. Next, at step 1500, the main control board M executes a special game operation condition determination process described later. Next, in step 1600, the main control board M executes a special game control process described later. Next, in step 1997, the main control board M (especially the winning ball payout determining means MH) receives the winning ball payout control process (drive control of the winning ball payout device KE, etc.) based on the winning opening where the game ball has won. The payout control board KH is executed and processing for managing the result is executed. Next, in step 1998, the main control board M executes an external signal output process (information output to the external terminal board, the hall computer HC, etc.). Next, in step 1999, the main control board M executes a control command transmission process (transmits the command set in each process described above to the sub-main control unit side), and is executed immediately before the execution of this interrupt process. Return to the process that was being performed. In the control command transmission process, the order of receiving commands on the sub-main control unit SM side is important (for example, the process is normally executed by receiving another command after receiving a certain command). In some cases, the commands are transmitted in the order in which the main control board M determines to transmit the commands (in the order in which the commands are set).

  Next, NMI interrupt processing will be described. As described above, the main control board M is configured such that the power interruption signal from the reset IC is input to the NMI terminal of the CPU, and the processing of FIG. Is done. That is, when the gaming machine is powered off (in this example, when an NMI interrupt occurs), in step 1020, the main control board M sets power interruption information (for example, checksum) based on the information in the RAM area. Next, in step 1022, the main control board M prohibits writing to the RAM area, prohibits timer interrupt processing, and shifts to power-off waiting loop processing.

  Next, FIG. 6 is a flowchart of auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition processing according to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. First, in step 1102, the auxiliary game start port entrance determining means MJ11-H determines whether or not a game ball enters (inflow, passes in the case of a gate) at the auxiliary game start port H10. In the case of Yes in step 1102, in step 1104, the auxiliary game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-H, and whether or not the number of hold balls is not the upper limit (for example, 4). Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 1104, in step 1106, the auxiliary game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H acquires an auxiliary game content determination random number (for example, an auxiliary game symbol winning random number). Next, in step 1108, the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H sets the random number together with information on how many pieces are held, in the auxiliary game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-H. 1 is added, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1200). In addition, also when it is No in step 1102 or step 1104, it transfers to the next process (process of step 1200).

  Next, FIG. 7 is a flowchart of the electric accessory drive determination process according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1202, the second main game start opening electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B refers to the flag area of the auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means MB10-H and the electric accessory releasing flag is off. It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1202, in step 1204, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H to determine whether or not the auxiliary game symbol changing flag is off. To do. In the case of Yes in step 1204, in step 1206, the auxiliary gaming symbol holding means MJ32-H accesses the auxiliary gaming symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H and determines whether or not there is a holding ball related to the auxiliary gaming symbol. . In the case of Yes in step 1206, in step 1216, the auxiliary gaming symbol determination means MN41-H refers to the auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means MB10-H to determine the auxiliary gaming side gaming state (flag state of the auxiliary gaming short time flag). In addition to the acquisition, the auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-H is referred to, and the stop symbol is determined based on the acquired auxiliary game side game state and the auxiliary game symbol random number based on the reserved ball (for example, the auxiliary game short time flag When is turned on, the winning symbol is selected with a higher probability than when it is off) and temporarily stored in the auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H. Next, in step 1218, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H sends the auxiliary game symbol change management timer MP11t-C to the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C based on the auxiliary game side game state (the flag state of the auxiliary game short time flag). A predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds when the auxiliary game short flag is on, and 30 seconds when the auxiliary game short flag is off) related to the variable time is set. In step 1220, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H turns on the auxiliary game symbol changing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1222, the auxiliary gaming symbol holding means MJ32-H updates the holding information recorded in the auxiliary gaming symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H after subtracting 1 from the holding ball related to the auxiliary gaming symbol. At the same time, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H starts the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H, and then starts the auxiliary game symbol variation display on the auxiliary game symbol display section H21g.

  Next, in step 1224, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C and determines whether or not a predetermined time relating to the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol has been reached. To do. In the case of Yes in step 1224, in step 1226, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H to acquire the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol and the acquired auxiliary The stop symbol of the game symbol is confirmed and displayed on the auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g. In step 1228, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H turns off the auxiliary game symbol changing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1230, the second main game start opening electric accessory opening / closing condition determining means MP21-B determines whether or not the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol is “winning”. In the case of Yes in Step 1230, in Step 1232, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B determines the second main game based on the game state on the auxiliary game side (the flag state of the auxiliary game short time flag). A predetermined time (for example, 6 seconds when the auxiliary game short time flag is on, 0.5 seconds when the auxiliary game short time flag is off, and the predetermined time related to the opening time of the electric character in the start opening electric member release timer MP22t-B. Second). Next, in step 1234, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B turns on the electric accessory releasing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means MB10-H. . Then, in step 1236, the second main game start port electric combination opening / closing control means MP20-B opens the second main game start port electric combination B11d. Next, in step 1238, the second main game start port electric player opening / closing control means MP20-B refers to the second main game start port electric player opening timer MP22t-B, and determines the electric player's opening time. It is determined whether or not the predetermined time has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1238, in step 1240 and step 1242, the second main game start port electric combination opening / closing control means MP20-B closes the second main game start port electric combination B11d and temporarily turns the auxiliary game state temporarily. The open flag of the electric accessory in the flag area of the storage means MB10-H is turned off, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1300).

  If NO in step 1202, the process proceeds to step 1238. If NO in step 1204, the process proceeds to step 1224. If NO in step 1206, step 1224, step 1230, or step 1238, the next process is performed. The process proceeds to (Step 1300).

  Further, in this flowchart, for the sake of convenience, after the stop symbol is displayed in step 1226, the process proceeds to the next step immediately, but the present invention is not limited to this. In that case, it may be configured to move to the next processing after a fixed stop display time of about 500 ms (for example, this processing is performed by performing branch processing using a stop display fixing flag and a timer). Achievable).

  Next, FIG. 8 is a flowchart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing according to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. First, in step 1302, the first main game start entrance entering determination means MJ11-A receives the first main game start entrance entrance information from the first main game start entrance entrance detection device A11s of the first main game start entrance A10. Is received. In the case of Yes in step 1302, in step 1304, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A refers to the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A and determines the main game (especially the first main game). It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls related to the “side” is not the upper limit (for example, four). In the case of Yes in step 1304, in step 1306, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A acquires the first main game content determination random number. In the present embodiment, as the first main game content determination random number, a winning lottery random number for determining whether or not to win, a symbol lottery random number for determining a winning symbol, and a variation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol are determined. The three random numbers of the variation mode lottery random numbers to acquire are acquired. Incidentally, these three random numbers are generated from random number generation means having different update periods and random number ranges, and are sequentially acquired at this timing. Next, in step 1308, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A temporarily stores (holds) the acquired first main game content determination random number in the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A. . Next, in step 1310, the hold control means MJ30 sends a command transmission buffer for transmitting information indicating that the first main game random number has been acquired (first main game hold occurrence command) to the sub-main control unit SM. Set to MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM by the control command transmission process in step 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1312. Note that if the answer is No in Step 1302 or Step 1304, the process proceeds to Step 1312.

  Next, in step 1312, the second main game start entrance ball judging means MJ11-B enters the second main game start entrance ball from the second main game start entrance entrance detection device B11s of the second main game start entrance B10. It is determined whether information is received. In the case of Yes in step 1312, in step 1314, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B refers to the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B and determines the main game (especially the second main game). It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls related to the “side” is not the upper limit (for example, four). In the case of Yes in step 1314, in step 1316, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B acquires the second main game content determination random number. In the present embodiment, as the second main game content determination random number, three random numbers of the success / failure lottery random number, the symbol lottery random number, and the variation mode lottery random number are acquired as in the first main game content determination means. Incidentally, the acquisition range of each random number of the first main game content determination random number and the acquisition range of each random number of the second main game content determination random number (for example, the first lottery random number for the first main game and the right lottery random number for the second main game) Are set to the same range. Next, in step 1318, the second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B temporarily stores (holds) the acquired second main game content determination random number in the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B. . Next, in step 1320, the hold control means MJ30 sends a command transmission buffer for transmitting information indicating that the second main game random number has been acquired (second main game hold occurrence command) to the sub-main control unit SM. Set to MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999), and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1400). Note that the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1400) also in the case of No in step 1312 or step 1314.

  In this embodiment, information indicating that a random number has been acquired is transmitted as information to be transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM in Step 1310 and Step 1320. However, the information on the random number value and the main game symbol are transmitted. The number of reservations may be attached and transmitted, and the information indicating that a random number has been acquired can be substituted by these pieces of information.

  Next, FIG. 9 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. First, in step 1401, the hold digest control means MJ31 refers to the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B and confirms whether or not there is a hold of the second main game symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1401, in step 1400 (1), the game content determination means MN executes a first main game symbol display process described later, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 1500). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1401, in step 1400 (2), the game content determination means MN executes a second main game symbol display process described later, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 1500).

  Thus, in the present embodiment, when there is a holding ball of the second main game symbol, regardless of the presence of the holding ball of the first main game symbol (even if the winning order is the holding of the first main game symbol) However, this is not limited to this, but it is not limited to this (the pending digest based on the winning order and both main game symbols are simultaneously executed in parallel). It may be configured to execute a parallel lottery for lottery.

  Next, FIG. 10 is a flowchart of the first main game symbol display process (second main game symbol display process) according to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} in FIG. In addition, since this process is substantially the same process on the first main game symbol side and the second main game symbol side, the first main game symbol side will be mainly described, and the processing on the second main game symbol side will be described. Use parentheses. First, in step 1403, the pending digest control means MJ31 determines whether or not a change start condition is satisfied. Here, the change start condition is that the special game is not being played (or the condition device is being operated), the main game symbol is not changing, and there is a hold of the main game symbol. Although not shown in this example, in the case of providing a variable fixed time (time for displaying the fixed display symbol after the main game symbol is fixedly displayed), during the variable fixed time, the fluctuation start condition for the next variable You may comprise so that it may not satisfy | fill.

  In the case of Yes in step 1403, in steps 1405 and 1406, the hold digest control means MJ31 stores the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A (second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B). The first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) related to the current symbol variation that is temporarily stored is read and the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A (second main game) The information is deleted from the symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and the remaining information temporarily stored is shifted (holding digestion process). Next, at step 1410-1, the success / failure lottery means MN10 refers to the first main game success / failure lottery table MN11ta-A (second main game success / failure lottery table MN11ta-B) corresponding to each gaming state. Based on 1 main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, a winning lottery random number), a main game symbol winning lottery is executed.

  Here, FIG. 11 (main game table 1) is an example of a first main game success / failure lottery table MN11ta-A (second main game success / failure lottery table MN11ta-B). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the jackpot winning probability in the probability variation gaming state is configured to be higher than the jackpot winning probability in the non-probability variation gaming state. Note that the winning probability is merely an example, and is not limited to this. Further, in the present embodiment, the hit (so-called small hit) where the gaming state cannot be changed is not illustrated, but a small hit may be generated (winning for the small hit). Also, when configured in this way, for example, (1) the winning probability per small portion is different between the first main game side and the second main game side, the first main game side is more than the second main game side Is easy to win (the second main game side does not have to provide a small hit), (2) When winning a small hit, the gaming state after the small hit is the same as the gaming state before the small hit (If the big hit is won, the gaming state after the big hit ends may be different from the gaming state before the big hit starts), (3) The big win is the first main game side and the second main game side The winning probabilities are the same and the winning probability is increased by entering the probability variation gaming state, whereas the winning probabilities are different between the first main game side and the second main game side. The winning probability is not changed by obtaining and changing to a probability-variable gaming state. (4) As a stop symbol of the decorative symbol for the selected symbol variation, a special symbol (eg “★★★”, “★★★”, etc., that corresponds to “★★★”, etc.), which is exclusive to the small win, will stop) (5) As a stop pattern of the decorative pattern of the symbol variation won per small win, a specific outcome (for example, “a combination of numbers having a certain regularity and not a set of three identical symbols”). 234 ", reverse order such as" 432 ", or odd order such as" 357 ", etc.) can stop. (6) Similar to small hits (or similar) It is a big hit (2R or more, the number of rounds is different, but it looks like the same open mode when viewed from the player (the small hit is only one round, The grand prize opening is opened several times in one round, and the big hit is opened the same number of times as the multiple times. (Executed within a plurality of rounds)} (in such a configuration, it is preferable to stop and display a combination of decorative symbols that are difficult for the player to distinguish whether the game is a small hit or a big hit) (8) In the second decorative symbol, the “special symbol” dedicated to small hits does not stop (or may not stop), and (9) the decorative symbol is difficult for the player to distinguish between small hits and big hits. Even in the configuration in which the combination is stopped and displayed, the ratio of whether it is a small hit or a big hit differs depending on the type of combination of decorative symbols that the player is difficult to distinguish (for example, by combining three, If the decorative symbol that is almost deterministic to enter the probability-variable gaming state is included in the stop symbol, the probability that it is a big hit is higher than the case where it is not included).

  Next, in step 1410-2, the first main game symbol determining means MN41-A (second main game symbol determining means MN41-B) makes the first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game). With reference to the symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B), the main game symbol is determined based on the main game symbol determination lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the symbol lottery random number). Stop symbols are determined, and these are temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C.

  Here, FIG. 11 (main game table 2) is an example of a first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B). As shown in this example, in this embodiment, when a big hit is won, a plurality of main game symbol candidates (in this example, “4A, 5A, 7A” and “4B, 5B, 7B”) are selected. One main game symbol is configured to be determined as a jackpot symbol. Note that the number of rounds of special games determined with reference to the main game symbol is 4R for 4A and 5A, 8R for 4B and 5B, and 16R for 7A and 7B. Note that the types of random numbers and stop symbols are only examples, and the present invention is not limited to this. {For example, a lose symbol is not limited to one type of symbol, and a plurality of types of symbols may be provided. When the specific symbol is stopped and displayed, the state and the selection rate of the variation mode and / or the selection rate of the main game symbol are different from those before the specific symbol is stopped and displayed (limited frequency state). May be configured to migrate}.

  Next, in Step 1410-3, the first main game variation mode determination means MN51-A (second main game variation mode determination means MN51-B) draws the first main game variation mode determination lottery corresponding to each game state. Refer to the table MN51ta-A (the second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B), the main game symbol determination lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (especially the variation The main game symbol variation mode is determined based on the mode lottery random number), temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the process proceeds to step 1414.

  Here, FIG. 12 and FIG. 13 (main game table 3) are examples of the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, both the first main game side and the second main game side are based on the main game symbol winning / losing lottery result, the main game short flag state, and the number of reserves at the start of change, The variation mode (variation time) of the main game symbol is determined. That is, when the main game symbol winning / losing lottery result is a win, it is easy to determine a variation mode in which the variation time is relatively long, and when the main game short flag is on (relative to the short game state) The variation mode in which the variation time is short is easily determined, and the variation mode in which the variation time is relatively short when the number of reservations is 2 to 3 compared to the case where the number of reservations is 0 to 1 Is easily determined (only when lost). This example is merely an example, and is not limited to the type of stop symbol, the selection rate, or the like. Further, the symbol variation time on the first main game side in the time-reduced game state (when the main game short-time flag is on) may be configured to be relatively long {the symbol variation on the second main game side Is configured to be advantageous for the player, it is easy for the second main game side to be suspended by reducing the symbol variation efficiency on the first main game side (advantageous for the player). It is particularly effective when the starting port on the first main game side and the starting port on the second main game side cannot be distinguished in order to establish the situation. An example of the effect executed when each variation mode is selected is shown in “effect mode executed on the sub side”. In addition, as an effect mode executed on the sub side, a pseudo continuous variation described later (an effect in which it appears that a plurality of symbol variations are generated during one variation display of the main game symbol) is executed. It is possible to provide a “pseudo-continuous failure effect” which is an effect of notifying that the pseudo continuous variation is not executed after telling the player whether or not, and in such a case, for example, at the time of losing and the same In the gaming state, the random number distribution (execution frequency) of “pseudo-continuous failure production → losing out-of-game” is greater when the number of holds is 0 to 1 than when the number of holds is 2-3. (Any non-time-reduced gaming state or time-reduced gaming state may be configured as such.) In addition, when the “pseudo continuous success effect” is executed, Whether or not the change is executed It may be configured to notify that the pseudo-continuous variation is performed after the Tsu. In addition, the “pseudo-continuous failure effect” and the “pseudo-continuous success effect” are effects using “special symbols” or a specific event, which will be described later. For example, when the “pseudo-continuous failure effect” is executed, After asking the player whether or not the “special symbol” temporarily stops in the middle row, the decorative symbol one frame after the “special symbol” stops (temporarily stops) in the middle row, and the “pseudo-successful directing” When executed, after the player is asked whether or not the “special symbol” temporarily stops in the middle row, the “special symbol” stops (temporarily stops) in the middle row. Yes. Further, in order to cause the second main game hold to occur during the fluctuation of the first main game symbol in the time shortening game state which is an irregular symbol variation, the first main game symbol relating to the loss in the time reduction game state The contents of the variation mode determination table may be configured so that a short-term variation mode is not selected regardless of the number of holds (for example, the variation time is all 5 seconds or more). The number of holds shown in the figure is not the total number of the first main game hold and the second main game hold, but is the first main game change mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A. In the case of the second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B, it is the second main game hold number.

  Next, in step 1414, the game content determination means MN sends the symbol variation display start instruction command (stop symbol information, stop symbol attribute information) temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C. The information related to the determined main game symbol such as the variation mode information and the command related to the current gaming state) is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM side (control command transmission in step 1999) (Sent to the sub-main control unit SM side by processing). Next, in step 1416, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sets a predetermined time related to the main game symbol variation time in the first and second main game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C. To do. Next, in step 1417, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C causes the first main game symbol display unit A21g (first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20)). On the second main game symbol display unit B21g), the main game symbol variation display is started in accordance with the variation mode stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C. Next, in step 1418, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C turns on the changing flag in the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C, Control goes to step 1420.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1403, in step 1419, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refers to the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C and changes. It is determined whether or not the middle flag is on. If Yes in step 1419, the process proceeds to step 1420. If No in step 1419, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1500).

  Next, in step 1420, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C determines whether or not a predetermined time related to the variation time of the main game symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1420, in step 1422, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sends information indicating that the symbol variation has ended (the symbol confirmation display instruction command) to the sub main control unit SM side. It is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999). Next, in step 1423, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C causes the first main game symbol display unit A21g of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) ( The change display of the main game symbol on the second main game symbol display part B21g) is stopped, and the stop symbols stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C are displayed as the fixed stop symbols. Control. Next, in step 1428, the first / second main game symbol control means MP11-C turns off the changing flag in the flag area of the first / second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C. .

  Next, at step 1430, the game content determination means MN refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C and determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a big hit symbol. To do. In the case of Yes in step 1430, in step 1432, the game content determination means MN turns on the condition device operation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. On the other hand, if No at step 1430, step 1432 is skipped.

  Next, at step 1450, the specific game control means MP50 executes a specific game end determination process, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1500). Even in the case of No in step 1420, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1500).

  Next, FIG. 14 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1450 in FIG. First, at step 1452, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b and determines whether or not the main game probability change flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1452, in step 1470, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the value of the time reduction counter MP52c and determines whether or not the counter value is greater than zero. In the case of Yes in step 1470, in step 1472, the specific game control means MP50 decrements (decrements) the counter value of the time reduction counter MP52c. Next, in step 1474, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the value of the time reduction counter MP52c and determines whether or not the counter value (remaining time reduction count) is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1474, in step 1476 and step 1478, the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game short time flag and the auxiliary game short time flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. (Step 1500). In addition, also in the case of No in step 1452, step 1470, or step 1474, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1500).

  Next, FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the special game operation condition determination process according to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. First, in step 1502, the condition determination means MP31 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the condition device operation flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1502, in step 1514, the special game control means MP30 determines the specific game flag (main game probability change flag / main game short flag / auxiliary game short time) in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Flag) off. Next, in step 1518, the specific game control means MP50 clears the value of the time reduction counter MP52c. Next, in step 1520, the special game control means MP30 turns on a special game transition permission flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1522, the special game control means MP30 turns off the condition device operation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1600). In the case of No in step 1502, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1600).

  Next, FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. First, in step 1602, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the special game transition permission flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1602, in step 1604 and step 1606, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the special game transition permission flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and the special game execution flag. Turn on. Next, in step 1607, the special game execution means MP33 sets an initial value (1 in this example) to a round number counter (not shown) in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1608, the special game executing means MP33 sets information (special game start display instruction command) to start the special game in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit side ( The control command is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM in the control command transmission process of step 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1612.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1602, in step 1610, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the special game execution flag is on. If YES in step 1610, the process proceeds to step 1612. In the case of No in step 1610, the special game execution means MP33 determines that the special game permission is not granted, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1997).

  Next, in step 1612, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b to determine whether the round continuation flag is off, in other words, immediately before the start of each round. It is determined whether or not there is. In the case of Yes in step 1612, that is, immediately before the start of each round, first, in step 1614, the special game execution means MP33 sets the release pattern in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1616, the special game executing means MP33 clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c to zero. Next, in step 1618, the special game execution means MP33 turns on the round continuation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1620, the special game executing means MP33 drives the first big prize opening electric combination C11d (or the second big prize opening electric combination C21d) of the first big prize opening C10 to make the first big prize winning. The mouth C10 (or the second grand prize opening C20) is opened, the special game timer MP34t (particularly, the opening time timer) is set to a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), and the process starts. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1612, that is, when the big prize opening is being opened, the process proceeds to step 1622 without performing the processing of steps 1614 to 1620.

  Next, in step 1622, the special game execution means MP33 transmits a game state command (for example, the current round number, game ball winning number, etc.) related to the current special game to the sub-main control unit SM side. Is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM in the control command transmission process of step 1999). Next, in step 1624, the special game executing means MP33 refers to the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) is assigned to the first big winning opening C10 (or the second big winning opening C20) in the round. It is determined whether or not there is a winning ball. If Yes in step 1624, the process proceeds to step 1628. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1624, in step 1626, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game timer MP34t (especially the open time timer) to determine a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) related to the special prize opening. It is determined whether or not it has elapsed. Also in the case of Yes in step 1626, the process proceeds to step 1628. In the case of No in step 1626, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1997).

  Next, in step 1628, the special game executing means MP33 determines the first big prize opening electric combination C11d of the first big prize opening C10 (or the second big prize opening electric combination C21d of the second big prize opening C20). The driving is stopped and the first grand prize opening C10 (or the second big prize opening C20) is closed. Next, in step 1630, the special game execution means MP33 resets a special game timer MP34t (particularly an open time timer). Next, in step 1632, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the round continuation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1633, the special game execution means MP33 adds 1 to the counter value of the round number counter (not shown) in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1634, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the final round has ended (for example, the round number counter in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b). Whether or not the counter value (not shown) exceeds the maximum number of rounds). In the case of Yes in step 1634, in step 1636, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the special game execution flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1638, the special game executing means MP33 sets information (special game end display instruction command) to end the special game in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub main control unit SM side. (Sent to the sub-main control unit SM in the control command transmission process of step 1999). In step 1650, the specific game control means MP50 executes a game state determination process after the end of the special game, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 1997). Even in the case of No in step 1634, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1997).

  Next, FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the special game according to the subroutine of step 1650 in FIG. First, in step 1652, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the stop symbol is a probable big hit symbol (after the execution of the special game is finished, the probability variation game state is reached). It is determined whether or not the jackpot symbol to be transferred is 5A, 5B, 7A, 7B) in this example. In the case of Yes in step 1652, in step 1654, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game probability change flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and proceeds to step 1658. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1652, that is, in the case where the stop symbol is a non-probable variation big hit symbol (a big hit symbol that does not shift to the probability variation gaming state after the execution of the special game, 4A / 4B in this example), step 1656 Thus, the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined number of times (100 in this example) to the counter value of the time reduction number counter MP52c, and proceeds to step 1658.

  Next, in step 1658 and step 1660, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game short time flag and the auxiliary game short time flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and performs the next processing (step 1997).

  Next, control processing executed on the sub-main control unit SM side will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 18 is a main flowchart on the sub-control board S side (particularly on the sub-main control unit SM side) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. Here, the process of FIG. 9A is a process on the sub-main control unit SM side that is executed after resetting when the gaming machine is powered on. That is, at the time of powering on the gaming machine, in step 2002, the sub-main control unit SM executes an initial process based on information received from the main side (main control board M side) (for example, RAM clear information is stored). If received, the sub-side RAM is initialized, various information commands are received, and the production-related information at the time of power interruption is reset in the sub-side RAM). Next, in step 2003, the sub-main control unit SM restores the number of holds (for example, the drawing hold counter value) based on the information received from the main side (main control board M side). Note that the performance or the like being executed is not restored, and the “preparing” screen is displayed until the start of the next change. Thereafter, the process proceeds to a loop process for repeatedly executing (b) which is a repetitive process routine of the sub-main control unit SM. Here, when (b) is executed, as shown in the process of (b) of the figure, first, in step 2100, the secondary game control means (sub-main control unit) SM performs a hold information management process to be described later. Execute. Next, in step 2200, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a decorative symbol display content determination process described later. Next, in step 2300, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a first decorative symbol display control process to be described later. Next, in step 2350, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a second decorative symbol display control process described later. Next, at step 2400, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a special game related display control process which will be described later. Next, in step 2500, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a background effect control process described later. Next, in step 2999, the sub game control means (sub-main control unit) SM executes display command transmission control processing (transmits commands set in a series of these subroutines to the sub-sub control unit SS side). The repetition processing routine is terminated.

  As described above, the sub-main control unit SM employs a form in which the sub-main routine (S2100 to S2999) is loop-processed after reset. Further, the process of FIG. 5C is an interrupt process of the sub main control unit SM, and the signal from the STB signal line on the main control board M described above is a terminal of the CPU of the sub main control unit SM (in this example). , NMI terminal) is a processing flow (c). That is, when an NMI interrupt occurs in the CPU of the sub main control unit SM (when the STB signal line is turned on), in step 2004, the sub main control unit SM receives the command input port (from the main control board M side). Check the data signal line input port). In step 2006, the sub main control unit SM sends the command transmitted from the main control board M side to the RAM (eg, main side information temporary storage means SM11b) on the sub main control unit SM side based on the confirmation result. Is temporarily stored, and the process that was being executed immediately before this interrupt process is restored.

  Next, FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the hold information management process according to the subroutine of step 2100 in FIG. First, in step 2102, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b, and from the main control board M side, a command (first main game symbol or second main game symbol) related to the new hold occurrence. It is determined whether or not (holding information relating to a game symbol) has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2102, in step 2104, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 displays the drawing hold counter in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b (in this example, a maximum of four for the first main game, Add “1” to the maximum number of second main games. Next, in step 2106, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 is based on the hold occurrence command transmitted from the main control board M side, and holds the hold information (in particular, the random value and hold prefetch group information related to the main game symbol lottery). ) Is temporarily stored in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and the process proceeds to Step 2118.

  On the other hand, if No in Step 2102, has the drawing hold information display control means SM 22 received the symbol variation display start instruction command from the main control board M side with reference to the main side information temporary storage means SM 11 b in Step 2111? Determine whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2111, in step 2112, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 subtracts “1” from the drawing hold counter in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. Next, in step 2114, the figure hold information display control means SM22 deletes the hold information related to the symbol variation (particularly, the random value related to the main game symbol lottery) from the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. , Shift the remaining pending information. Next, in step 2116, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 turns on the symbol content determination permission flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to step 2118. Note that if the result is No in Step 2111, the process also goes to Step 2118.

  Next, in step 2118, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 makes full use of the effect display means SS on the effect display device SG (in particular, the first hold display portion SG12 and the second hold display portion SG13). The same number of hold images as the drawing hold counter value in the figure hold information temporary storage means SM22b are lit and displayed, and the process proceeds to the next processing (step 2200).

  Next, FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. First, in step 2202, the drawing display content determination means SM21n refers to the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the symbol content determination permission flag is on. If Yes in step 2202, in step 2204, the drawing display content determination means SM21n turns off the symbol content determination permission flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2206, the design display content determining means SM21n (and the notice effect display content determining means SM24n, the reach effect display content determining means SM25n) are temporarily stored in the main information temporary storage means SM11b (symbol information ( With reference to the stop symbol / variation mode related to the main game symbol and the drawing variation content determination lottery table SM21ta, the first decorative symbol (as described above, displayed based on the information from the main control board M side) Controlled so-called decorative symbols, the details of the display size and operation contents will be described later) (for example, when the stop symbol related to the main game symbol is a big hit symbol, "7-7. 7 ”etc., when the number is a flat or a lost symbol,“ 1 ・ 3 ・ 5 ”etc., and the variation mode {for example, the variation related to the main game symbol If it is a short-term fluctuation, non-reach, if it is a long-term fluctuation, normal reach, super reach, etc.} is determined and the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b (and the notice effect related information temporary storage means) SM24b, reach effect related information temporary storage means SM25b). Here, in the present embodiment, the first decorative symbols are composed of three columns of the left column, the middle column, and the right column, and an effective line (a line on which the result of success / failure can be notified by arranging three numeric symbols). ) Is one line, meaning that if the same numeric symbol is aligned on the effective line, it means a big hit (conversely, if the same numeric symbol is not aligned on the effective line, it will be lost). In addition, in the left column, middle column, and right column (or only in the middle column), a “special symbol” in addition to a numeric symbol (it does not mean a big hit when displayed on the active line, but after that a big hit The display size and the details of the operation will be described later), and the numerical design can also be temporarily stopped in the middle of symbol variation. Has been. The temporary stop means that the decorative symbols of all the rows are temporarily stopped during the period from the start of the variable display of the main game symbol to the stop display. This means a state where the variable display can be started again during the period (hereinafter, used in the same meaning). Although the details will be described later, the “special symbol” in the pseudo continuous fluctuation may not be included in the stop mode that can be temporarily stopped (provisionally stopped), does not stop fixedly, and notifies the big hit. The “special symbol” at the time of execution of the pre-reading effect is configured so as to be temporarily stopped (provisionally stopped), fixedly stopped, and not included in the stop mode for notifying the big hit. .

  Next, in step 2208, the design display content determination means SM21n (and the notice effect display content determination means SM24n, the reach effect display content determination means SM25n) are temporarily stored in the main information temporary storage means SM11b (symbol information ( Reference control based on information from the main control board M side as described above with reference to the stop symbol / variation mode related to the main game symbol and the drawing variation content determination lottery table SM21ta Is a so-called decorative symbol whose details of display size and operation will be described later) (for example, when the symbol relating to the main game is a jackpot symbol, “7. ”, Etc., in the case of a losing symbol or a lost symbol, a numerical variation such as“ 1, 3, 5 ”, etc.} and a variation mode {for example, a variation state related to a main game symbol Is a non-reach and if it is a long-term change, it determines normal reach, super reach, etc.} and displays the display display related information temporary storage means SM21b (and the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b). , Temporarily store in reach effect related information temporary storage means SM25b). Here, in the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol is composed of three columns of the left column, the middle column, and the right column, and one effective line (a line in which it is effective to arrange the same numeric symbols) is one line. If the same number design is aligned on the effective line, it means a big hit (conversely, if the same number design is not aligned on the effective line, it will be lost). Further, only the numeric symbols can be stopped in the left column, the middle column, and the right column (the “special symbol” does not stop like the first decorative symbol), and the temporary column is not temporarily stopped during the symbol variation. . As described above, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are configured to independently determine display contents for notifying whether or not the main game symbol is true, that is, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are determined. The decorative symbol has a property that both parties can notify the result of the main game symbol independently as a basic property.

  Next, in step 2216, the drawing display content determination means SM21n determines whether the main game symbol is temporarily stored in the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b and the decoration result (first decoration symbol and second decoration symbol). Based on the variation mode, the decorative design effect content is determined with reference to the decorative design effect table SM21ta-2 (for example, the decorative design effect table 1 to the decorative design effect table 2) in the drawing change content determination lottery table SM21ta, The display update timing and display update contents are set, and temporarily stored in the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2218, the drawing display content determination means SM21n turns on the symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 2300). Transition. Note that, also in the case of No in step 2202, the process proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 2300).

  In the above description, the main game symbol whose display is controlled on the main control board M side is the first main game side (first main game symbol) or the second main game side ( Although it is not mentioned whether it is the second main game symbol), basically, the display contents of both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are determined in correspondence with the first main game symbol. Alternatively, the display contents of both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be determined in correspondence with the second main gaming symbol, that is, the variation display of the first main gaming symbol and the second main gaming symbol. Regardless of which of the variable display is performed, the variable display of both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be executed in conjunction with it. However, this is not limited to the time-reduced gaming state (the state accompanied by the so-called electric support state). For example, in the time-reduced gaming state, the first main game symbol change display and the second main game symbol change. Regardless of which of the displays is performed, it is possible to exemplify that only one of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol is set in a state in which the variable display can be executed in conjunction with the display.

  Here, FIG. 21 and FIG. 22 (decorative design effect table 1, decorative design effect table 2) are the decorative design effect table SM21ta-2 (decorative design effect table 1, particularly when the result is a loss, And, it is an example of the decorative design effect table 2, in particular, a part of the case where the success / failure result is a big hit. In the drawing, the first decorative design may be simply described as the first decorative design, and the second decorative design may be described as the second decorative design (the same applies hereinafter). As shown in this example, in this embodiment, the result of the main game symbol (shown in the leftmost column, in this example, “losing” or “big hit”) and the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol) And the second decorative symbol) are shown in the second column on the left. In this example, only in the case of “pseudo continuous failure (total production time 30 seconds)” and “super reach (total production time 60 seconds)”. Example) and the obtained random number value (the random value obtained on the sub-main board SM side, a part of the random value is shown in the third column on the left) and the decorative design effect content (the fourth column on the left) In this example, “main effect A-1 (losing) pseudo-ream 1” and “main effect B-1 (big hit) pseudo-ream” etc.) can be determined. When the decoration symbol effect content is determined, “display update timing” and “display update content” can be uniquely determined. For example, if the decoration design effect content = “A-1 (losing) pseudo-ream 1”, “display update content” = “device update timing” at “display update timing” = “at the start of change (after 0 seconds)” The figure change start (all columns of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol) is determined, and “display update timing” = “12 seconds after start of change” “display update content” = “first figure temporary stop display” (Left column), “second display hidden” is determined. Then, as will be described later, the “display update content” that has reached the “display update timing” corresponds to the first decorative symbol according to the elapsed time related to the variation time of the decorative symbol (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol). This is sequentially executed for each of the second decorative symbols. That is, when “A-1 (losing) pseudo-ream 1” is determined, all the columns of the first decorative symbol and all the columns of the second decorative symbol are variably displayed, and then “display update timing” = “variation start” If the display is controlled so that all the columns are hidden (even if they are displayed in a fluctuating manner) until the time “12 seconds later” is reached, the second decorative symbol is When the display control is performed so that all the columns are variably displayed (the state of the variably displayed can be visually recognized) and “display update timing” = “12 seconds after the start of variation” is reached, the first decorative symbol is displayed. For the second decorative symbol, the display control is performed so that only the left column is stopped, while the second decorative symbol is not displayed (the state of the variable display is not displayed). . As described above, the basic operation in the example of this example is that when the first decorative symbol is visible to the player (easily visible), the second decorative symbol is directed to the player. If the first decorative symbol is invisible to the player (difficult to see) while being invisible (difficult to see), the second decorative symbol is visible to the player ( In order to ensure that the player is notified that the symbol is changing, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a complementary manner. It should be noted that the effect pattern (series of display contents) defined by “A-1 (losing) pseudo-ream 1” is different from the effect pattern defined by the name of other decorative design effect contents (that is, the display contents are different). ) To supplement that In addition, the range of the random number value is “0 to 1023” in all the variation modes, and this drawing excerpts a part of the random number range in the diagram variation mode. The random number range of the obtained random number value and the random number range of the acquired random value corresponding to the drawing variation mode different from the certain drawing variation mode are different from each other, but both are “0 to 1023”. Range).

  Here, in the present embodiment, so-called quasi-continuous variation can be executed. Specifically, the decorative design effect contents “A-1 (losing) quasi-continuation 1”, “A-2” in this example are configured. (Lost) pseudo-ream 2 "," B-2 (big hit) pseudo-ream 2 ". For example, in the decorative symbol effect content “A-2 (losing) pseudo-continuation 2”, “display update timing” = “start of change (after 0 seconds)”, “display update content” = “design change start (first) After “1st decoration pattern and all 2nd decoration symbols)” is executed, “display update timing” = “after 12 seconds from start of change”, “after 13 seconds from start of change”, “after 14 seconds from start of change” Display update content ”=“ first design temporary stop display (left column) ”(the left column of the first decorative symbol is the stop display),“ first design temporary stop display (right column) ”(the first decorative symbol of the first decorative symbol) The right column is the stop display), and the “first design special symbol temporary stop display” (the middle column of the first decorative symbol is the stop display at the above-mentioned “special symbol”) is sequentially executed. After that, when “display update timing” = “15 seconds after the start of change”, “display update content” = “first figure change start (all rows)” (only the first decorative symbols are changed and displayed again) After execution, “display update timing” = “change start 26 seconds”, “change start 27 seconds”, “change start 28 seconds”, “display update content” = “first equipment temporary stop display ( (Left column) ”(the left column of the first decorative symbol is displayed as a stop),“ First display temporary stop display (right column) ”(the right column of the first decorative symbol is displayed as a stop),“ Special symbol of the first component ” By sequentially executing “temporary stop display” (the middle display of the first decorative symbol is the “special symbol” described above), the player can perform the first display during the one-time variation display of the main game symbol. For one decorative symbol, it appears that the symbol variation has occurred multiple times (this pseudo continuous And how the dynamic is being performed, how the "special symbols" are stopped and displayed, see an image view of FIG. 40).

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the first decorative symbol is not displayed (the state where the stop display / variation display is not displayed) and the middle row of the first decorative symbol is the above-mentioned “special symbol”. The second decorative design is variably displayed when temporarily stopped, and the second decorative design is not displayed in other cases. That is, when the player can visually recognize the first decorative symbol, or when it is possible to determine which symbol is stopped as the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol is not displayed (the first decorative symbol is displayed). If the player cannot visually recognize the first decorative symbol or cannot determine which symbol is stopped as the first decorative symbol {for example, When the “special symbol” is stopped and the numbers in the middle row (or all rows) cannot be determined}, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner so that the player can always The decorative design (either the first decorative design or the second decorative design) can be visually recognized, and the progress of the game is easily grasped. In the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol is configured so that the “special symbol” is not temporarily stopped. However, this is not interesting for the first decorative symbol, but it is difficult to grasp the progress of the game. As the second decorative symbol provided to ensure that the progress of the game is easy to grasp, the “special symbol” (that is, the big hit when displayed on the active line) This is because, although it does not mean, after that, it is configured not to display a symbol that may make it difficult to grasp the progress of the game, such as a symbol predicting that a big hit may occur. In the case of the above-mentioned “non-display” (including both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol), a state in which the image is displayed at high speed (a changed state in which an afterimage can be seen) may be included. In the case of the “display” (including both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol), the display is changing at a low speed (in the case of a display mode changing from top to bottom, slowly from above) And (temporary) a fluctuating state toward the planned stop position).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol is configured not to temporarily stop in the middle of the change (and the “special symbol” is not stopped). Similarly to the first decorative design, it may be configured such that it can be temporarily stopped in the middle of the fluctuation (and a pseudo fluctuation can occur). That is, in such a configuration, all the columns of the first decorative symbol and all the columns of the second decorative symbol have substantially the same operation contents of the change display and the stop display (including the temporary stop), and are stopped and displayed. It will be configured so that the types of symbols to be different.

  The second decorative symbol need not always be displayed during the main game symbol variation display, and the display condition and display mode of the second decorative symbol may be appropriately changed. For example, (1) a specific effect is being generated (instead of making the first decorative symbol invisible, an effect is such that a movie moving image is reproduced using the entire display area on the effect display device SG, or a so-called effect) The second decorative symbol is displayed when the movable accessory for use advances to a state of covering the display area on the effect display device SG), (2) At the time of a specific reach effect (the first Instead of making one decorative symbol invisible, it is at the time of execution of a reach effect in which the expectation of jackpot rises remarkably. For example, the display content of the effect performed on the effect display device SG is forcibly suspended The second decorative symbol is displayed only when the so-called freeze reach effect is performed, and the second decorative symbol is not displayed in other reach effects (particularly when the reach effect having a low jackpot expectation is performed). ) Different appearance positions of the second decorative symbols on the effect display device SG in accordance with the effect pattern (for example, the above-described effect movable accessory advances into a state of covering the display area on the effect display device SG) In the case of an effect, the display is moved to a display area on the effect display device SG that is not covered by the effectable movable accessory), and (4) movement / reduction / enlargement display can be executed for the first decorative symbol. On the other hand, the second decorative symbol cannot be moved / reduced / enlarged, or the probability of moving / reducing / enlarged display, the movement width, the reduction rate, the enlargement rate, etc. are higher than those of the first decorative symbol. May be low.

  Next, FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the first decorative symbol display control process according to the subroutine of step 2300 in FIG. First, in step 2302, the decorative design display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the design content determination flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2302, in step 2304, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2306, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns on the symbol changing flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2309, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 starts the first figure variation time management timer SM21t-1, and proceeds to step 2310. In the case of No in step 2302, the process proceeds to step 2310.

  Next, in step 2310, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the symbol changing flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2310, in step 2312, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 confirms the timer value of the first design variation time management timer SM21t-1. Next, in step 2314, the decorative design display control means SM21 determines the first decoration based on the first design change time management timer SM21t-1 and the change mode temporarily stored in the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. It is determined whether or not the symbol variation start timing has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2314, in step 2316, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the first decorative symbol variable display command (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999). ) And the process proceeds to Step 2330.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2314, in step 2318, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 displays the variation mode temporarily stored in the first drawing variation time management timer SM21t-1 and the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Based on the above, it is determined whether or not the stop display timing (temporary stop display timing) of the first decorative symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2318, in step 2320, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not it is the above-mentioned “special symbol” stop timing ( In this example, the “special symbol” is configured to temporarily stop only the middle symbol). In the case of Yes in step 2320, in step 2322, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 informs that the angel zone flag (the jackpot expectation will be increased) in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. The flag that triggers the display of the background image is turned on, and the process proceeds to step 2324. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2320, the process proceeds to step 2324. Next, in step 2324, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the first decorative symbol stop display command (temporary stop display command) (transmits to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999). The process proceeds to step 2330. In the present embodiment, the “angel zone background” is displayed as a background effect when the angel zone flag is turned on, but the timing at which the angel zone flag is turned on is, for example, (1) During symbol fluctuations with relatively high jackpot expectation (for example, symbol fluctuations that reach reach), (2) When symbol fluctuations related to suspension scheduled to be digested prior to symbol fluctuations with high jackpot expectation, Etc. As will be described in detail later, the “special symbol” that triggers the angel zone flag to turn on may be temporarily stopped in the case of (1) described above, or in the case of (2) described above. It may be confirmed and stopped.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2318, in step 2326, the notice effect display control means SM24 (and reach effect display control means SM25), the first equipment variation time management timer SM21t-1 and the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. Based on the variation mode temporarily stored in (and reach effect related information temporary storage means SM25b), it is determined whether or not the display timing of the preview image and the reach image has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2326, in step 2328, the notice effect display control means SM24 (and the reach effect display control means SM25) set the image display command related to the notice image and the reach image (display command transmission control processing in step 2999). At step 2330, and the process proceeds to step 2330. Note that if the result is No in step 2326, the process proceeds to step 2330.

  Next, in step 2330, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and the first decorative symbol is normally displayed (as described above, the player visually recognizes the first decorative symbol). It is determined whether or not it is a case where it is possible to determine which symbol is stopped as the first decorative symbol and when the second decorative symbol is not displayed. In the case of Yes in step 2330, in step 2332, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the second symbol display flag (with respect to the second decorative symbol in the non-display state) in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. ON = OFF or display state = ON) is turned OFF, and the process proceeds to Step 2336. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2330, in step 2334, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns on the second symbol display flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to step 2336. .

  Next, in step 2336, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b to determine whether or not the main game symbol has been stopped (for example, main side information temporary storage means). Referring to SM11b, it is determined whether or not information indicating that the main game symbol is stopped and displayed is received from the main control board M side). In the case of Yes in step 2336, in step 2338, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a stop display command (definite display command) of the first decorative symbol (sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999). To be sent). Next, in step 2340, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 stops and resets (zero clears) the first design variation time management timer SM21t-1. Next, in step 2342, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the symbol changing flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to the next processing (step 2350 processing). To do. Note that if the answer is No in Step 2310 or Step 2336, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in Step 2350).

  In the present embodiment, the sub-main control unit SM uses the first design variation time management timer SM21t-1 to manage the timing related to the first decorative symbol variation display, the execution timing of the background effect, and the like. Although configured, the management method of the timing related to the variation of the first decorative symbol, the execution timing of the background effect, etc. is not limited to this, and the temporary stop of the first decorative symbol is performed in the decorative symbol display content determination process in step 2200 Timing, notice image / reach image display timing, background effect display timing (background effect display switching timing), etc. are all determined and transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS. The sub-sub control unit SS follows the received content. The presentation may be executed (displayed) at any time at the same timing (the same applies to the second decorative symbol).

  Next, FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the second decorative symbol display control process according to the subroutine of step 2350 in FIG. First, in step 2352, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the first symbol changing flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2352, in step 2354, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the second symbol display flag is on. . In the case of Yes in step 2354, in step 2356, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a second decorative symbol variable display execution command (command for variable display of the second decorative symbol) (display command transmission in step 2999). Is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the control process), and the process proceeds to Step 2360. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2354, in step 2358, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a variable display deletion command for the second decorative symbol (command for hiding the second decorative symbol) (in step 2999). And is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process), and the process proceeds to Step 2360.

  Next, in step 2360, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the main game symbol has been stopped (for example, main side information temporary storage means). Referring to SM11b, it is determined whether or not information indicating that the main game symbol is stopped and displayed is received from the main control board M side). In the case of Yes in step 2360, in step 2362, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the stop display command (definite display command) of the second decorative symbol (the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process in step 2999). To be sent). Next, in step 2364, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the second symbol display flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2400). Transition. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 2352 or step 2360, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2400).

  Here, the lower part of the figure is a decorative symbol display area image diagram. As shown in the figure, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the hold display (the hold relating to the first main game symbol and the hold relating to the second main game symbol may be displayed simultaneously) are effect display devices. In the present embodiment, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at the final display timing (the timing at which the main game symbol is stopped and displayed). Since the first decorative symbol is the main decorative symbol, the first decorative symbol has higher visibility than the second decorative symbol (the displayed area is supposedly larger). In the present embodiment, the variation start timing and variation end timing (determined display timing) of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are the same timing.

  Next, FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the special game related display control process according to the subroutine of step 2400 in FIG. First, in step 2402, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b and determines whether or not the special game flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2402, in step 2404, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a special game start display instruction command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2404, in step 2406 and step 2408, the background effect display control means SM23 turns on the special gaming flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and the effect display device. A big hit start display is performed on the SG (appropriate display is performed based on the type of the big hit), and the process proceeds to step 2412. Note that if the result in Step 2402 is No, the process proceeds to Step 2412.

  Next, in step 2412, the background effect display control means SM23 sequentially displays the number of rounds and the number of winnings on the effect display device SG based on the game information sequentially transmitted from the main side (gameability and jackpots). It may be executed as needed based on the type).

  Next, in step 2413, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command for displaying the effect related to the special game being executed based on the game state at the time of winning the big hit being won and the big hit symbol being stopped ( (For example, in the case of a special game related to the latent probability variation big hit symbol, the display command transmission control process of step 2999 will be shifted to the probability variable gaming state after completion of the special game.) An effect that the player cannot recognize is executed). Next, in step 2414, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a special game end display instruction command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2414, in step 2416, the background effect display control means SM23 performs jackpot end display on the effect display device SG (performs display appropriately based on the type of jackpot). Next, in step 2418, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the special gaming flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2500). . Note that if the answer is No in Step 2404 or Step 2414, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in Step 2500).

  Next, FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the background effect control process according to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. First, in step 2502, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the angel zone flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2502, in step 2504, the background effect display control means SM23 sets “angel zone background” (background effect that can be displayed with the temporary stop of “special symbol”) as the background effect, and step 2506. Migrate to Next, in step 2506, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b, and whether or not the change (part of the pseudo continuous change) that triggered the transition to the “angel zone” has ended. Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 2506, in step 2508, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the angel zone flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2509, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a predetermined background effect (for example, sets the background effect set before the “angel zone background” is set), and proceeds to step 2520. To do.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2502, in step 2512, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a symbol variation display start instruction command has been received from the main side. . In the case of Yes in step 2512, in step 2514, a stage shift lottery to win with a predetermined probability (in this example, 1/20) is executed (the stage shift lottery is executed at the start of fluctuation of each variation). . Next, in Step 2516, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the lottery result in Step 2514 and determines whether or not the stage transition lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 2516, in step 2518, the background effect display control means SM23 shifts to a predetermined stage transition pattern (for example, in order of looping each stage in the order of flat stage → space stage → volcano stage → flat stage). The background effect is set, and the process proceeds to Step 2520. Note that the process proceeds to step 2520 also in the case of No in step 2506, step 2512 or step 2516.

  Next, in step 2520, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command for displaying the set background effect on the effect display device SG (in the display command transmission control process of step 2999, the sub-sub control unit SS side). The process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2999).

  By configuring as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, two types of decoration patterns, a first decoration symbol and a second decoration symbol, are provided, and the first decoration symbol is not displayed (stopped). In a state where the display / variation display state is not displayed) or in a situation where it is difficult to visually recognize, the player can always display one of the decorative symbols by displaying the second decorative symbol (variable display). A user-friendly gaming machine that can be visually recognized and can accurately determine whether the symbol that is stopped or whether the jackpot symbol is stopped, or the like can be provided.

(Modification 1 from this embodiment)
Here, in the present embodiment, when the pseudo continuous variation is executed, the “special symbol” is always stopped as the temporary stop symbol in the middle row, and the first decorative symbol is always displayed during the variation display of the first decorative symbol. 2 The decorative design is configured not to be displayed, but the display control method of the decorative design is not limited to this. Therefore, an example of such a configuration is a first modification from the present embodiment, and only the changes from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 27 and FIG. 28 (decorative symbol effect table 3, ornament symbol effect table 4) are an example of the adornment symbol effect table SM21ta-2 (decorative symbol effect table 3, especially when the result is a failure, and , Is an example of the decorative design effect table 4, in particular, a part of the case where the result is a big hit. The changes from the present embodiment will be described in detail for the first decorative design. In the modification 1 from this embodiment, it is comprised so that a 1st decoration symbol may be displayed even if it fluctuates. Also, for example, when performing pseudo continuous variation such as “A-6 (losing) quasi-run 2 (specific appearance)”, the specific appearance is stopped in addition to “special design” at the temporary stop timing of the middle design. It is configured to be able to. Here, unlike the “special symbol”, the specific outcome is that all columns (left column, middle column, right column) stop with numbers, but the outcome is a stop mode according to certain rules. (For example, in the order of “345” or the like), and is configured to notify the player that the quasi-continuous variation is being executed when the specific outcome stops. In addition, in the first modification from the present embodiment, at the time of quasi-continuous variation execution, in the case of a loss, it becomes easier to stop the specific appearance than the “special symbol” at the temporary stop timing of the middle row. On the other hand, in the case of big hit, at the temporary stop timing in the middle row, the “special symbol” is easier to stop than the specific event, that is, the “special symbol” than when the specific event stops. The expectation that becomes a big hit is higher when is stopped. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and there is no problem even if it is configured such that the degree of expectation that is a big hit is higher when the specific appearance is stopped than when the “special symbol” is stopped. In addition, when the pseudo variation is executed in the pseudo continuous variation, all the symbols are re-variable, that is, the three symbols are re-variable after the three symbols are temporarily stopped. When the “special symbol” is temporarily stopped in the middle row and then the middle row is re-variable, the decorative symbol in the middle row at the start of the re-variation is no longer “special symbol” {for example, “6 ★ 7 ”(★ = special symbol), if it is temporarily stopped, it will change again in the state of“ 667 ”(the middle symbol is preferably the symbol of“ ± 1 ”frames of the right symbol or the left symbol)} You may comprise.

  Next, changes from the present embodiment will be described in detail for the second decorative design. In the first modification from the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol is configured to be always displayed while the main game symbol is changing. In the case of reach, the second decorative symbol is also temporarily stopped at the temporary stop timing of the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol is also determined and displayed at the fixed display timing of the first decorative symbol at the same time. (The same symbol is stopped and displayed for the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol). Note that the variation display mode of the second decorative symbol is not limited to this. For example, the first decorative symbol can be visually recognized, and the player can easily grasp the game progress status by visually recognizing the first decorative symbol. The second decorative symbol is not displayed, that is, when the first decorative symbol is being displayed, the left and right columns are temporarily stopped, and the specific appearance is stopped at the temporary stop timing of the middle column. In the case where the second decorative symbol is not displayed while the “special symbol” is stopped at the temporary stop timing in the middle row, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner (or temporarily displayed). (Stop display). Moreover, you may comprise so that all the 2nd decoration symbols may be stopped and temporarily stopped according to the stop and temporary stop of a 1st decoration symbol. Further, the second decorative symbol may be always displayed in a variable manner regardless of the variation state of the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol may be fixed and stopped only when the first decorative symbol is fixed and stopped.

  With the configuration as described above, in the gaming machine according to the first modification from the present embodiment, the pseudo-continuous variation can be achieved by configuring the specific outcome to be temporarily stopped at the temporary stop timing in the middle row. A plurality of types of stop modes at the time of temporary stop can be provided at the time of execution, and the player pays attention to which one of the stop modes by changing the expectation level that is a big hit depending on the stop mode. This will increase the fun of the game.

  In the first modification from the present embodiment, the first decorative symbol is variably displayed. However, the first decorative symbol is not limited to this. May be configured not to be variably displayed (not displayed), or may be configured not to display only a specific column (for example, a middle column).

  In the first modification from the present embodiment, the specific event (or “special symbol”) can be temporarily stopped at the temporary stop timing in the middle row, but the specific event (or “special symbol”) is configured. ) May be changed, for example, (1) the left column and the right column are the same number, and the middle column is ± 1 of the same number. (For example, “4 ・ 5 ・ 4” or “special symbol” is placed at position 5 in the middle row). (2) In the same stop mode as the losing eye that is not a specific appearance There is a notification of a specific appearance due to a change in sound or color, (3) temporary stop at the same time in all rows, (4) numbers in the left row and / or right row at the temporary stop timing in the middle row (5) If the decorative pattern in the left column and the right column is a number that is 2 or more apart, the decorative pattern in the middle column is left And / or right columns and the case was temporarily stopped at a loss in the "2" or more away from the numbers, it may be used as such. In addition, the appearance condition of the specific item may be changed. For example, it appears easily when the temporary stop symbols (numbers) in the left column and the right column are the same (or appears only when they are the same). For example, the appearance condition of the “special symbol” may be different. In addition, it is more likely that a “special design” (or specific appearance) will appear after reach than if a “special design” (or specific appearance) appears if it is not a reach, or There is a high possibility that the “special symbol” will temporarily stop again during the symbol fluctuation {for example, “7 ★ 7” has a higher expectation of jackpot than “7 ★ 8” (★ = special symbol). Alternatively, there is a high possibility that a temporary stop will occur again}.

(Modification 2 from this embodiment)
Here, although the configuration of the display mode of the first decorative symbol at the time of the pseudo continuous variation is given in the present embodiment and the modified example 1 from the present embodiment, the first decorative symbol at the time of the pseudo continuous variation other than the configuration is described. With the configuration of the display mode, a new game can be created. Therefore, an example of such a configuration is referred to as a second modification from the present embodiment, and only changes from the first modification to the first embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 29 and FIG. 30 (decorative symbol effect table 5, ornament symbol effect table 6) are an example of an ornament symbol effect table SM21ta-2 (decorative symbol effect table 5, particularly when the result is a failure, and , Is an example of the decorative design effect table 6, in particular, a part of the case where the result is a big hit. First, the first decorative design will be described in detail with respect to changes from the present embodiment to the first modification. In the second modification from the present embodiment, the “special symbol” and “special symbol A” which are displayed while the first decorative symbol is changing and can be stopped at the temporary stop timing of the middle row in the pseudo continuous variation are “special symbol A” and “ Two types of special symbols B ”are provided. Here, the “special symbol A” is configured to be temporarily stopped from the first middle column temporary stop timing in the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (after that timing), while the “special symbol B” is pseudo-continuous. It is configured to be able to temporarily stop from the temporary stop timing of the second middle row in the fluctuation. Further, the specific event is configured to be able to temporarily stop from the first temporary stop timing of the middle row in the pseudo continuous variation (and after that timing). That is, at the temporary stop timing of the first middle row in the quasi-continuous variation, “special symbol A” and two types of specific appearances can be temporarily stopped as the stop mode, while the second middle row in the quasi-continuous variation. In the temporary stop timing, three types of “special symbol A”, “special symbol B”, and a specific pattern can be temporarily stopped as stop modes. There are more types of stop modes that can be stopped in the second temporary stop timing in the middle row in the pseudo continuous variation than in the temporary stop timing. In this way, in the temporary stop timing in the middle row of the pseudo continuous variation, it may be configured such that the number of stop modes increases as the second half temporary stop timing is reached, or the stop mode types increase as the second half temporary stop timing is reached. However, it may be configured to reduce the number. Also, in the case of a configuration in which the types of stop modes increase as the second half temporary stop timing is reached, there is a stop mode with a high expectation that the variation will be a big hit as a selection candidate type each time a pseudo variation is executed. It may be configured to be newly added, and by such a configuration, the player pays attention every time the pseudo variation is executed. Also, in the case of a configuration in which the type of stop mode decreases as the latter half of the temporary stop timing is reached, there is a stop mode with a low expectation that the variation will be a big hit as a selection candidate type each time a pseudo variation is executed. You may comprise so that it may be deleted, and by configuring in that way, the expectation degree that the fluctuation becomes a big hit every time the pseudo fluctuation is executed can be secured. In addition, about the 2nd decoration design, since it becomes the structure similar to the example 1 of a change from this embodiment, description is omitted.

  With the configuration as described above, in the gaming machine according to Modification 2 from the present embodiment, the temporary stop timing of the middle row in the pseudo continuous variation can be temporarily stopped as the temporary stop timing becomes the second half. By configuring so that the number of stop modes increases, the player pays attention to the number of times that the middle row temporarily stops and the stop mode at the time of temporary stop, and the fun of the game is enhanced.

(Modification 3 from this embodiment)
Here, in the present embodiment, there are two types of decorative symbols, a first decorative symbol and a second decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol is not displayed (the display of stop display / variable display is not displayed). (State) or in a situation where it is difficult to visually recognize, the second decorative symbol is displayed (variable display). However, the configuration using the second decorative symbol is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment. Thus, an example of such a configuration is referred to as a third modification from the present embodiment, and only the changes from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process according to the subroutine of Step 2200 in FIG. 18 in Modification 3 from the present embodiment. Changes from the present embodiment are Step 2232 (Modification 3) to Step 2236 (Modification 3), Step 2900 (Modification 3), Step 2246 (Modification 3) and Step 2248 (Modification 3), that is, Step 2204. Then, after turning off the symbol content determination permission flag, in step 2232 (change 3), the figure display content determination means SM21n refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and the current gaming state is the probability variation gaming state. It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in Step 2232 (Variation 3), in step 2234 (Variation 3), the drawing display content determination means SM21n changes the display mode of the first decoration symbol and the second decoration symbol to the probability variation display mode (in the probability variation gaming state). (Decoration display mode of decorative symbols to be displayed), and the process proceeds to Step 2900 (Modification 3). On the other hand, in the case of No in Step 2232 (Modification 3), in Step 2236 (Modification 3), the drawing display content determination means SM21n changes the display mode of the first decoration symbol and the second decoration symbol to the non-probable change display mode ( The display mode of the decorative symbol to be displayed during the non-stochastic variation gaming state is determined, and the process proceeds to Step 2900 (Modification 3). Thus, in the modification 3 from this embodiment, the display mode of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol is configured to be different depending on whether or not the game is in the probability variation gaming state, and the first decorative symbol is displayed. When the display mode of the symbol changes (for example, when the non-stochastic variation gaming state shifts to the probability variation gaming state), the display mode of the second decorative symbol is also changed with the change. Note that the display mode of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol is not limited to a configuration that differs only depending on whether or not the game is in the probability variation gaming state. You may comprise so that it may differ with which production (production stage) is.

  Next, in step 2900 (modification 3), the drawing display content determination means SM21n executes a drawing stop symbol determination process, which will be described later. Next, in Step 2246 (Modification 3), the equipment display content determination means SM21n determines the variation mode of the first decorative symbol based on the information related to the variation mode of the main game symbol. Next, in step 2248 (modification 3), the drawing display content determination means SM21n determines the variation aspect of the second decorative symbol based on the information regarding the variation aspect of the main game symbol, and proceeds to step 2216.

  Next, FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the drawing stop symbol determination process related to the subroutine of Step 2900 (Modification 3) in FIG. 31 in Modification 3 from the present embodiment. First, in step 2902, the figure display content determination means SM21n refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol related to the symbol variation is a jackpot symbol. In the case of Yes in step 2902, in step 2904, the drawing display content determination means SM21n refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and the number of rounds executed in the special game related to the jackpot symbol is the maximum number of rounds ( In this example, it is determined whether it is 16R). In the case of Yes in step 2904, in step 2906, the drawing display content determination means SM21n sets the stop symbols of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol in a set of three “white” symbols (for example, “777”) and Decided to be one of the three sets of “black” symbols (for example, “444”) (the total distribution ratio for selecting the three sets of “white” symbols and the three sets of “black” symbols The total distribution rate selected is 1: 1), and the process proceeds to the next process {the process of Step 2246 (Modification 3)}. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2904, in step 2908, the drawing display content determination means SM21n sets the stop symbols of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol in three “black” symbols (for example, “444”). And the process proceeds to the next process {the process of Step 2246 (Modification 3)}. As described above, in the third modification from the present embodiment, a set of three “white” symbols (for example, “777”) is a special game with the maximum number of rounds (16R in this example). It can be stopped only, i.e., when a set of three white symbols is stopped, a special game with the maximum number of rounds (16R in this example) is executed. (It may be more profitable for the player than a set of three “black” symbols).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2902, in step 2910, the drawing display content determination means SM1n determines the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol based on the information related to the stop symbol of the main game symbol. Next, in step 2912, the figure display content determination means SM21n sets the stop symbol of the second decorative symbol as a predetermined loss symbol (in this example, “345”, and the stop symbol of the second decorative symbol is only one pattern). The process proceeds to the next process {the process of Step 2246 (Modification 3)}. Note that the type of stop symbol of the second decorative symbol does not have to be only one pattern, but it is desirable that the number of stop symbols of the second decorative symbol is smaller than the type of stop symbol of the first decorative symbol. Further, the stop symbol at the time of losing the second decorative symbol is a predetermined loss symbol (in this example, “345”), whereas the stop symbol at the time of losing the first decorative symbol is selected from a plurality of candidates. (For example, randomly selected from 300 kinds of stop symbol candidates), the frequency of the second decorative symbol being higher than the first decorative symbol is such that the predetermined loss symbol is stopped at the time of loss ( A predetermined lost symbol may be configured not to stop as the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol). Further, all the lost symbols that can stop the second decorative symbol (for example, only one pattern of “375”) may be the highest for the player in any game state when three identical symbols are arranged. You may comprise so that one or more symbols (for example, "7" symbol) which become profit may be included necessarily (for example, "375" and "276" may stop).

  Next, FIG. 33 is an image diagram relating to a display mode of decorative symbols in the third modification from the present embodiment. As shown in the figure, in the modified example 3 from this embodiment, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are different depending on whether the gaming state is a non-probability variation gaming state or a probability variation gaming state. The display mode (in this example, the display color is a display attribute such as a color arrangement pattern, shape, size, etc.) may be different. Specifically, in the non-stochastic game state, only the “7” symbol is displayed in “white” together with the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, and all symbols other than “7” are “ While it is configured to be displayed in “black” (becomes a non-probability display mode), in the case of the probability variation gaming state, “3” symbol and “7” together with the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol. The symbols are displayed in “white”, and all symbols other than “3” and “7” are displayed in “black”. In other words, the “3” symbol, together with the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, is configured such that the display mode can be different depending on the gaming state (becomes a probable display mode). The condition that the display mode is different is not limited to whether or not the game is in the probability variation gaming state, and may be whether or not it is in the time-saving gaming state, and is different depending on which background effect (effect stage) is being executed. You may comprise so that it can do. In the modified example 3 from the present embodiment, the symbol whose display attribute can be changed depending on whether or not it is in the probability variation gaming state is the symbol “3”, but the symbol “3” is described above. In the non-stochastic game state, it is included in a combination of predetermined symbols (in this example, “345”) that will cause the second decorative symbol to stop when lost. In the probability variation game state, the stop symbols of the second decorative symbols at the time of loss are displayed as “white” from the left column, while the stop symbols of the second decorative symbols at the time of loss are all displayed in “black”. , “Black” and “black”.

  Next, FIG. 34 and FIG. 35 (decorative design effect table 7, decorative design effect table 8) are shown in the decorative symbol effect table SM21ta-2 (decorative symbol effect table 7, especially when the result is a loss, And, it is an example of the decorative design effect table 8, in particular, a part of the case where the success / failure result is a big hit. The change from this embodiment is that the item of the decorative symbol type is set as the display update type, and three items of “first decorative symbol”, “second decorative symbol”, and “transparent liquid crystal” are provided, In the modified example 3 from this embodiment, it is comprised so that the transmission effect which J display area SG10 of the effect display apparatus SG permeate | transmits can be performed, and the period when the transmission effect is performed is 1st decoration. The symbol is not displayed, but the second decorative symbol is displayed (see “33 seconds” of the display update timing).

  Next, FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. 18 according to the third modification from the present embodiment. Changes from the present embodiment are step 2327-1 (modification 3) and step 2327-2 (modification 3). That is, when the display timing of the preview image or reach image is reached in step 2326, step 2327- 1 (change 3), the notice effect display control means SM24 transmits the transmission effect (effect) based on the first design change time management timer SM21t-1 and the change mode temporarily stored in the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. It is determined whether or not it is the execution timing of the effect that the display area SG10 of the display device SG is transmitted. In the case of Yes in Step 2327-1 (Modification 3), in Step 2327-2 (Modification 3), the notice effect display control means SM24 sets an image display command related to the transmission effect (in the display command transmission control process of Step 2999). Then, the process proceeds to step 2336. On the other hand, in the case of No in Step 2327-1 (Modification 3), the process proceeds to Step 2328. In addition, when the transmission effect is executed, the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG is transmitted, and the state in which the accessory in the effect display device SG is driven can be visually recognized, and the first decorative symbol is displayed. Is deleted (hidden), and the second decorative symbol is continuously displayed by the second decorative symbol display device in the effect display device SG (details will be described later). Moreover, in the example 3 of a change from this embodiment, the display of the 2nd decoration symbol of the production | presentation display apparatus SG is adjoined (right direction seeing from a player), and the holding | maintenance number display area is provided. With this configuration, the player can visually recognize the number of holds even during execution of the transmission effect.

  Next, FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the special game related display control process according to the subroutine of Step 2400 in FIG. 18 in Modification 3 from the present embodiment. The change from the present embodiment is Step 2410 (Modification 3), that is, after setting the command related to the jackpot display in Step 2408 or when the special game flag is on, Step 2410 ( In the strange 3), the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command for continuously displaying the second decorative symbol from the time of the stoppage of the jackpot symbol related to the special game (for example, “777” continues to stop) (step) In the display command transmission control process 2999, it is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side), and the process proceeds to Step 2412. Thus, in the third modified example from the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol is displayed even during execution of the special game, and the player can select which decorative symbol (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol). Whether or not the special game is being executed can be determined even while the special game is being executed.

  Next, FIG. 38 is an image diagram relating to the configuration of the effect display device in Modification 3 from the present embodiment. First, as shown in the conceptual perspective view and the conceptual top view of the effect display device, a second decorative symbol display device is provided on the back side (viewed by the player) from the display area SG10, and the device emits light ( The light is output in the direction of the display area SG10), whereby the second decorative symbol and the reserved number display area are displayed in the display area SG10. In addition, an effect can be displayed in the display area SG10 by outputting light from the light source, but no effect is displayed in the area adjacent to the second decorative symbol display device in the display area SG10. The display of the second decorative symbol and the hold number display area by the two decorative symbol display device is configured to be visible to the player. Further, when the transmission effect is executed, the effect in the display area SG10 is not displayed, and the accessory in the effect display device SG is visible. In addition, since the effect display in the second decorative symbol display device is being executed even during the execution of the transmission effect, it is visible to the player. By configuring in this way, even in a situation where a transmission effect is being executed, the player can recognize the variation status of the decorative symbol and the number of holds by visually recognizing the effect display on the second decorative symbol display device. Become. In addition, the display of the hold number may be different depending on the game state (for example, the first main game hold number is displayed in the non-time-reduced game state, and the time-reduced game state is displayed. (The second main game hold number is displayed), the first main game hold number and the second main game hold number may be always displayed, or the total of the first main game hold number and the second main game hold number You may comprise so that the number of pending | holdings may be displayed. In addition, the structure which displays an effect in display area SG10 is not limited to this, What is necessary is just to be comprised so that display area SG10 can be switched to a permeation | transmission state and a non-transmission state, for example, the position of a light source is changed. Or a light guide plate (a transmissive plate-like member that scatters light emitted from the light emitting element incident from the side surface in the vertical direction). It is good also as a display area (what is called edge light type) which displays via, a display area which consists of organic EL, etc. In addition, as a structural example using the light guide plate, as viewed from the player side, “transmission liquid crystal (liquid crystal shutter)” and “light guide plate {adjacent to the transmission liquid crystal (about 5 mm) are provided from the front side. The light source A for distributing light to the light guide plate is disposed in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the light source plate} ”,“ the light source B that always outputs light to the lower left of the display area SG10 ”,“ the accessory ”,“ the role When the light source C is arranged in the order of “light source C for emphasizing an object to be shown to the player” and a transmission effect is executed (when it is desired to emphasize the object and show the player), the output of the light source A is turned off (light source The output of A may be lower than when the transmission effect is not executed), the output of the light source B and the light source C is turned ON, and the transmission effect is not executed (I do not want to show the player the actor) In the case of wanting to show the player the effect in the display area SG10), the light source A and ON the output of the source B, and outputs the OFF of the light source C (output of the light source C also may as an output lower than the transmissive demonstration execution) may be configured to. Further, the display of the second decorative symbol and the reserved number display area is not limited to the configuration of the present example. For example, when the second decorative symbol display device emits light (light is output in the direction of the display region SG10). The second decorative symbol and the reserved number display area can be displayed in the display area SG10 by the same mechanism as that in which the effect is displayed by outputting light from the light source toward the display area SG10. When the second decorative design display device replaces the light source, the second decorative design display device always outputs light even when a transmission effect is executed and the light source stops outputting light. The display of the two decorative symbols and the number-of-holds display area may be configured to be visible at all times (the light guide plate is used to prevent transmission of the transmissive liquid crystal).

  Next, FIG. 39 is a transmission effect execution image diagram in Modification 3 from the present embodiment. In this example, the quasi-continuous variation is executed twice in the normal gaming state (non-stochastic variation gaming state and non-time-reduced gaming state) (the variation of pseudo-continuation 2). The case is shown as an example. First, a certain decorative symbol (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) starts to fluctuate, and then the special symbol temporarily stops as the first middle row temporary stop symbol. Thereafter, the variation of certain decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) is started again, and then the special symbol is temporarily stopped again as the second middle row temporary stop symbol. Thereafter, the variation of certain decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol) is started again, and the display region SG10 is in a transmissive state due to the transmission effect being executed. The player is able to visually recognize the state in which the accessory is being driven. Thereafter, the transmission effect is finished (the display area SG10 is in a non-transparent state), the character in the back of the display area SG10 (as viewed from the player) becomes invisible, and the first decorative symbol is changed and displayed again. It becomes visible (displayed). Thereafter, in the case of a loss, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol stop at the lost symbol {the second decorative symbol stops at the predetermined lost symbol ("345") and the first decorative symbol stops. It is a combination of stop symbols that may differ from the lost symbol (“787”)}. Also, in the case of a big hit, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol stop at the big hit symbol {the first decorative symbol big hit symbol and the second decorative symbol big hit symbol have the same combination of stop symbols. }. After that, a special game is executed, and the second decorative symbol continues to be stopped and displayed with the same jackpot symbol as that at the start of the special game even during the execution of the special game. Even during the execution of the special game, the transmission effect may be executed (the display area SG10 may be set to the transmission state). For example, an effect of informing whether or not the probability variation game state is set after the special game ends. By configuring so that the transmission effect can be executed immediately before the execution, the player can increase the expectation to shift to the probability variation gaming state after the special game is finished by visually recognizing the transmission effect. Even if the transmission effect is executed during the execution of the special game, the display of the second decorative symbol and the number-of-holds display area is maintained (because it is visible), so that the progress of the game is not hindered. It is configured as follows. As an example of display of decorative symbols during a special game, for example, during a special game, in order to notify the player which of the three decorative symbols has become a big hit, only one such uniform symbol is displayed. (For example, “7” is displayed when a big hit is made at “777”), and when the transmission effect is executed, the display of the aligned symbols becomes invisible. In order to make it possible to recognize, the display of the second decorative symbol and the hold number display area may be maintained even during the special game.

  With the configuration as described above, in the gaming machine according to the third modification from the present embodiment, the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG is in a transparent state, and the objects in the effect display device SG can be visually recognized. Since the effect is configured to be executable and the display of the effect on the second decorative symbol display device is executed even if the first decorative symbol is not displayed during the execution of the transmission effect, the player can display the second decorative symbol. By visually recognizing the effect display on the display device, it is possible to recognize the variation status of the decorative symbol and the number of reserved symbols, and to make the gaming machine more user-friendly. Also, the game state transition distribution ratio after the end of the special game related to the ball entering the first main game start opening A10 and the game state transfer distribution after the end of the special game related to the ball entering the second main game start port B10. It is possible to suggest or notify that the player is highly profitable by changing the display attributes of the decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol) depending on whether or not the game is in the probability variation gaming state. By making the number of types of symbols different, the game ball enters the first main game start port A10 and enters the second main game start port B10 rather than the non-stochastic variation game state in which the game proceeds. In the probability variation gaming state where the game will progress by entering the ball, the number of types of display attributes of the jackpot symbol that the transition to the probability variation gaming state becomes almost definite after the end of the special game, Whether the gaming state of the player is highly profitable for the player And thus capable of appropriately suggest or notifiable configured for player a.

  In the third modification from the present embodiment, the current game state and the effect display mode (background effect, etc.) correspond to any variation of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol. The decorative symbol of the display attribute is variably displayed, and the decorative symbol corresponding to the variation of the first main game symbol and the decorative symbol corresponding to the variation of the second main game symbol are displayed in common (and display attributes). (The display attributes and display areas of the decorative symbols are not differentiated between the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol).

(Second Embodiment)
Here, in the present embodiment, two types of decorative symbols, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, are provided so that the result of symbol variation can be accurately recognized. The present invention can also be applied to a configuration that can execute the above. Therefore, an example of such a configuration is referred to as a second embodiment, and only differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 40 is a flowchart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing according to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. 5 in the second embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 1322 (second) to step 1344 (second), the purpose of which is to subtract the variation mode random number delimiter information, which is information to be referred to when determining the look-ahead effect content. That is, after storing the first main game content determination random number in step 1308, in step 1322 (second), the hold control means MJ30 sets the flag of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Referring to the area, it is determined whether or not the special game execution flag is off. If Yes in step 1322 (second), in step 1324 (second), the hold control means MJ30 determines whether or not the main game short time flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b is off. Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 1324 (second), in step 1326 (second), the hold control means MJ30 determines whether or not the result of the stored hold and the stop symbol based on the hold information (the lottery random number and symbol determination random number). Is determined in advance. Next, in step 1328 (second), the hold control unit MJ30 sends a command related to the newly generated hold result / stop result information and stop symbol information to the sub-main control unit SM for transmitting a command MT10. Is set (sent to the sub-main control unit SM by the control command transmission process in step 1999).

  Next, in step 1330 (second), the hold control unit MJ30 preliminarily determines the change mode random number delimiter information and the change mode group related to the stored hold based on the hold information (variation mode determination random number) (change mode). Regarding the mode random number delimiter information and the variation mode group, refer to the main game table 3 of FIGS. Moreover, also in the case of No in step 1322 (second) or step 1324 (second), the process proceeds to step 1332 (second). In the second embodiment, one variation mode group is configured to include a plurality of types of variation modes (variation times). Next, in step 1332 (second), the hold control means MJ30 executes a command related to the new hold occurrence (the hold occurrence command of the first main game content determination random number, the command related to the variation mode random number separator information, etc.) The command is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the main control unit SM (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM by the control command transmission process in step 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1312. When the symbol information is configured to be transmitted to the sub side as in the second embodiment, an effect suggesting a big hit may be executed as an effect to be executed on the sub side. It is desirable that the player can be notified of the stop symbol of the main game symbol that is a big hit (the stop symbol is notified only when the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a big hit).

  As described above, in the second embodiment, when the main game content determination random number (the first main game content determination random number or the second main game content determination random number) is acquired (or when the hold occurs), the variation mode random number delimiter information and the variation mode It is configured to determine a group.

  In addition, it may be configured to transmit the main game content determination random number information, the failure random number delimiter information, the variation mode random number delimiter information, and the variation mode group information to the sub side at the timing when the hold occurs, The information to be transmitted to is not limited to this, but information related to the main game symbols that are stopped, information related to the main game symbols that are jackpots (number of special game rounds related to the main game symbols scheduled to stop, etc.) ), The number of holdings immediately after the winning of the holding (the number of holdings on the winning side of the first main game side or the second main game side may be only the holding number of both the first main game side and the second main game side) May be configured to transmit information related to the {the failure random number delimiter information refers to each gaming state and random number value (or random value range) on the first main game side (second main game side) And the lottery results are grouped together. This is one piece of random number separator information. If it is a floating game state, it is a win, but if it is a non-stochastic variable game state, a grouping such as losing can be given}.

  Next, after storing the second main game content determination random number in step 1318, in step 1334 (second), the hold control means MJ30 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and the special game. It is determined whether or not the execution flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1334 (second), in step 1338 (second), the hold control means MJ30 determines whether or not the stored result is the hold result and the stop symbol based on the hold information (the lottery random number and symbol determination random number). Is determined in advance. Next, in step 1340 (second), the hold control unit MJ30 sends a command related to the newly generated hold result and stop symbol information to the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM. Is set (sent to the sub-main control unit SM by the control command transmission process in step 1999).

  Next, in step 1342 (second), the hold control unit MJ30 preliminarily determines the fluctuation mode random number delimiter information and the change mode group related to the stored hold based on the hold information (variation mode determination random number) (change). Regarding the mode random number delimiter information and the variation mode group, refer to the main game table 3 of FIGS. 32 and 33), and the process proceeds to step 1344 (second). Next, in step 1344 (second), the hold control means MJ30 executes a command related to a new hold occurrence (a hold occurrence command of the second main game content determination random number, a command related to the variation mode random number separator information, etc.) It is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the main control unit SM (sent to the sub main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999), and the process proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1400). .

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1334 (second), in step 1336 (second), the hold control means MJ30 has the main game short time flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b turned off. It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1336 (second), the process proceeds to step 1344 (second). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1336 (second), the process proceeds to step 1338 (second).

  In step 1308 and step 1318, the first main game content determination random number is stored and the second main game content determination random number is stored, but the main game content determination random number is stored in the RAM storage area of the main control board. Is stored, and only the information related to the “main game content determination random number” is stored in the byte storing the information related to the main game content determination random number (various timers). It is preferable to configure such that other information such as value is not stored) (when operating another data stored in the same 1 byte, information related to the main game content determination random number is rewritten due to noise or the like) To prevent it). In addition, with respect to the winning lottery random number, the change of the gaming state (from the gaming state related to the hold that has already been recorded) between the acquisition of the winning lottery random number and the execution of the winning lottery related to the winning lottery random number. Since not only the change but also the game state may change due to the newly generated hold, the game state at the time of the lottery execution related to the lottery random number may be unpredictable). Until the process is executed, the lottery random number is stored. In the second embodiment, the command to the sub-main control unit SM related to the hold information can be transmitted only at the occurrence of the hold related to the first main game in the non-time-saving game state, while the time-saving game state Is configured so that it can be transmitted only at the time of occurrence of the hold related to the second main game, but regardless of whether it is the hold related to the first main game or the hold related to the second main game in any game state. Alternatively, the command may be transmitted, and in such a case, the sub-main control unit SM may determine whether to use the received command. Further, a specific example of the command related to the success / failure result information to be transmitted to the sub main control unit SM is “D000H: out of place, D001H: out of low probability, hit with high accuracy, D002H: hit with both low accuracy and high accuracy”. Yes, a specific example of the command related to the stop symbol information transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM is “D100H: 16R probability variation, D101H: 16R non-probability variation, D102H: 2R probability variation”, and the sub-main control unit SM A specific example of the command related to the variation mode random number delimiter information to be transmitted is “D200H: delimiter 1, D201H: delimiter 2, D202H: delimiter 3”.

  Next, FIG. 41 and FIG. 42 (main game table 3) are the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B) in the second embodiment. It is an example. The difference from the present embodiment is that a variation mode group and variation mode random number delimiter information are provided. That is, in the second embodiment, a variation mode for a certain random value (or random value range). Random number separator information is determined, and the number of variation mode groups (number in which random numbers are divided), variation time, and random value range of variation mode groups are different depending on the gaming state and the lottery result (for example, , Even in the same group 1, the range of random number values can be different), and by transmitting the variation mode random number delimiter information to the sub-side, the variation mode group corresponding to these gaming states is sub-side It can be derived at That is, when the gaming state transitions between the occurrence of the hold and the digestion of the hold, the variation mode group that was planned at the time of the occurrence of the hold and the change mode group that is executed at the time of the hold can be different. (For example, the change mode group was scheduled to be group 1 because it was a non-time-reduced gaming state at the time of the onset of hold, but the actual change mode group became group 2 because the time-reduced game state was reached at the time of deferring the hold. The fluctuation mode random number delimiter information to which a common variation mode group is assigned over all the gaming states is obtained at the time when the variable mode random number delimiter information is received on the sub-side (the subsequent gaming state) It is possible to normally execute the so-called hold prefetch effect without considering the transition. In addition, the variation mode random number separation information in FIGS. 32 and 33 is a variation on the first main game side or a variation on the second main game side, whether the result of the lottery is win or miss, Depending on whether the state is a time-reduced gaming state or a non-time-reduced gaming state, it is configured to form different variation mode random number separator information, but is not limited to this, it is a variation on the first main game side One variation mode random number delimiter including whether it is a variation on the second main game side, whether the lottery result is winning or losing, and whether the game state is a time-reduced game state or a non-time-reduced game state You may comprise so that information may be formed. Further, in order to cause the second main game hold to occur during the fluctuation of the first main game symbol in the time shortening game state which is an irregular symbol variation, the first main game symbol relating to the loss in the time reduction game state The contents of the variation mode determination table may be configured so that a short-term variation mode is not selected regardless of the number of holds (for example, the variation time is all 5 seconds or more). The number of holds shown in the figure is not the total number of the first main game hold and the second main game hold, but is the first main game change mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A. In the case of the second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B, it is the second main game hold number.

  Next, FIG. 43 is a main flowchart on the sub control board S side (particularly on the sub main control unit SM side) in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 2003 (second), that is, after executing the initial processing in step 2002, in step 2003 (second), the sub main control unit SM is connected to the main side (main). Based on the information received from the control board M side), the number of holdings (for example, the drawing holding counter value) is restored. In addition, the information related to the effect that is being executed or the look-ahead effect is not restored (and the information related to the pending content is not retransmitted from the main side), and the “preparing” screen is displayed until the start of the next change. . With this configuration, when power interruption occurs when the background effect is “angel zone background”, the information stored on the sub side is lost. After the return of, information indicating that the trigger is suspended does not remain, and the background effect is changed from the “angel zone background” to another background effect (background effect such as a flat ground stage described later). As a result, there is a discrepancy between the hold information stored on the main side and the hold information stored on the sub side due to power interruption (for example, due to power interruption or noise at power recovery). However, it is possible to avoid a situation in which a zone effect with a high degree of expectation is executed on the sub side while a low degree of expectation is changing on the main side. In addition, the process after the return of the power interruption is not limited to this, and after the interruption of the power interruption, the information indicating that the trigger is held immediately before the occurrence of the power interruption is restored, and “ It may be configured to maintain an “angel zone background”. In such a configuration, for example, a subsidence area is provided on the sub side where information can be maintained even during power interruption, and information related to performance is backed up in the retreat area when a power interruption occurs, and power interruption recovery is performed. It may be configured to restore backed up information from time to time. In addition, it may be configured so that information related to the content of the hold is received again from the main side at the time of power failure recovery, at the start of change, at the time of change stop, at the time of occurrence of hold (even for hold other than the newly generated hold) Good {Although not specifically shown in this example, at the time of power failure recovery, only information related to the number of holds is transmitted from the main side (information related to the contents of hold is not sent). . For this reason, since the information related to the hold that existed at the time of power interruption does not exist after the return from power interruption, the pre-reading effect cannot be executed for the hold (the hold from the main side at the time of power interruption return) It may be configured so as to receive information related to the above, and may be configured so that a pre-reading effect can be executed for the suspension. In addition, when a power interruption occurs while the decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol) are fluctuating, if the function for maintaining the information at the time of the power interruption is not provided, the fluctuation from the main side. A dark screen (for example, a screen displaying “Preparing” or the like) is displayed until an end command is received}. In the second embodiment, switching the background effect so as to display the “angel zone background” as the background effect may be described as shifting to the “angel zone”.

  Next, FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the hold information management process according to the subroutine of Step 2100 of FIG. 43 in the second embodiment. Differences from this embodiment are step 2120 (second) to step 2128 (second), step 2550 (second), step 2600 (second), and step 2650 (second), that is, step 2104. Then, after adding 1 to the drawing hold counter, in step 2120 (second), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 sends a new hold result and stop symbol information transmitted from the main control board M side. Is temporarily stored in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. Next, in step 2122 (second), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 is based on the hold occurrence command transmitted from the main control board M side, and holds the hold information (in particular, the change mode group, the change mode random number delimiter information). , Etc.) are temporarily stored in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. In addition, when the information regarding the result of the determination, the stop symbol, the variation mode group, and the variation mode random number separator information is not transmitted from the main side, in Step 2120 (second) or Step 2122 (second), The information is not temporarily stored in the hold information temporary storage area. Next, in step 2124 (second), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 determines whether or not the new hold is a hold on the first main game side. In the case of Yes in step 2124 (second), in step 2550 (second), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 executes a first main game winning prefetch determination process to be described later, and step 2126 (second) Migrate to On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2124 (second), in step 2600 (second), the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 executes a second main game winning prefetch determination process to be described later, and step 2126 (second) Move to 2).

  Next, in step 2126 (second), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and has information indicating that the new hold is a trigger hold. (The information indicating that the trigger is suspended is added at step 2576 or step 2622). In the case of Yes in step 2126 (second), in step 2650 (second), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 executes a prefetch hold content determination process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2118. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2126 (second), the process proceeds to step 2118.

  On the other hand, after subtracting 1 from the drawing hold counter in step 2112, in step 2128 (second), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 displays the hold information related to the symbol change (in particular, the result of the determination, the stop symbol information, The change mode group and the change mode random number delimiter information) are deleted from the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and the remaining hold information is shifted, and the process proceeds to Step 2116.

  Next, FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the first main game winning prefetch determination process according to the subroutine of step 2550 (second) in FIG. This process will be described in two parts: a process related to the prohibition condition of the pre-read lottery and a process related to the pre-read lottery. In the former prefetch lottery prohibition process, first, in step 2552, the hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and holds the second main game hold (first main hold) in the hold. It is determined whether or not there is a hold that is digested in preference to the game side. In the case of Yes in step 2552, in step 2554, the hold prefetch effect execution possibility determination means SM26k refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the current gaming state is not the time reduction gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 2554, in step 2558, the hold prefetch effect execution possibility determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and there is a hold having information indicating that the trigger is held in the hold. Judge whether or not there is. Here, the trigger hold is a hold that is won in the pre-read lottery at the time of winning a prize (the pre-read lottery at the time of the first main game winning a prize, the pre-read lottery at the time of the second main game winning a prize). In the case of Yes in step 2558, in step 2560, the hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and whether there is a big hit hold before the new hold. Determine whether. If Yes in step 2560, the process proceeds to step 2562.

  Next, in the processing related to the latter prefetch lottery, first, in step 2562, the hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and the new hold is a big hit. It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2562, in step 2564, the holding pre-reading effect execution availability determination means SM26k executes a pre-reading lottery for winning winning with a predetermined probability (1/3 in this example) for the new holding, Control goes to step 2574. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2562, in step 2568, the hold prefetching effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and whether or not the new hold variation mode group is group 3 or not. Determine whether. As described above, in the second embodiment, when determining whether or not the prefetch lottery can be executed, it is configured to determine whether or not the prefetch lottery can be executed in consideration of the variation mode group. When determining whether or not the prefetch lottery can be executed, it may be configured to determine whether or not the prefetch lottery can be executed in consideration of the variation mode random number separation information. In the case of Yes in step 2568, in step 2570, the hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k executes a prefetch lottery for winning winning with a predetermined probability (1/10 in this example) for the new hold, Control goes to step 2574. On the other hand, if the result is No in step 2568, the process proceeds to step 2574.

  Next, in step 2574, the pending pre-reading effect execution availability determination means SM26k determines whether or not the winning pre-read lottery is won. In the case of Yes in step 2574, in step 2576, the hold pre-reading effect execution availability determination means SM26k is set to “trigger hold” for the new hold won in the winning pre-read lottery in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. Information to that effect is added and temporarily stored, and the processing proceeds to the next processing {step 2126 (second) processing}.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2552 (when the second main game hold is present in the hold), in step 2578, the hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k is temporarily stored in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. Delete the information indicating "trigger hold" from the stored hold information (if there is no hold in the hold with information indicating that the trigger is held, this process is not executed and the next ), The process proceeds to the next process {step 2126 (second) process}. In addition, also in the case of No in step 2554, step 2558, step 2560, or step 2574, the process proceeds to the next process {step 2126 (second) process}. In the process of step 2578, when there is a hold on the second main game side (occurrence), in the second main game side preferential digestion gaming machine as in the second embodiment, the newly generated second This is a configuration for avoiding a situation in which the pre-reading effect over a plurality of fluctuations is not normally executed because the reservation on the main game side is digested first, so that the planned fluctuation order is not achieved. In addition, as a prohibition condition of the pre-read lottery, a condition that whether or not there is a hold of a specific variation mode group (or a hold of specific variation mode random number separator information) in the hold before the new hold is set as a prohibition condition Also good.

  Next, FIG. 46 is a flowchart of the second main game winning prefetch determination process according to the subroutine of step 2600 (second) in FIG. This process will be described in two parts: a process related to the prohibition condition of the pre-read lottery and a process related to the pre-read lottery. In the former prefetch lottery prohibition process, first, in step 2602, the hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the main information temporary storage means SM11b, and whether or not the current gaming state is a time-reduced gaming state. Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 2602, in step 2604, the hold pre-reading effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and there is a hold having information indicating that the trigger is held in the hold. Judge whether or not there is. In the case of Yes in step 2604, in step 2606, the hold prefetch effect execution possibility determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and whether there is a big hit hold before the new hold. Determine whether. If Yes in step 2606, the process proceeds to step 2608.

  Next, in the processing related to the latter prefetch lottery, first, in step 2608, the hold prefetch effect execution possibility determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and the new hold is a big hit. It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2608, in step 2610, the hold pre-reading effect execution availability determination means SM26k has a predetermined probability (a probability lower than the winning rate of the first main game winning pre-fetch lottery for the big hit hold for the new hold). Yes, in this example, a winning prefetch lottery to be won in 1/5) is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2620. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2608, in step 2612, the hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and whether or not the new hold variation mode group is group C. Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 2612, in step 2616, the hold prefetch effect execution possibility determination means SM26k has a predetermined probability (a probability lower than the winning rate of the first main game winning prefetch lottery with respect to lose hold) for the new hold. Yes, in this example, the winning pre-fetch lottery for winning at 1/15) is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2620. On the other hand, if NO in step 2612, the process also proceeds to step 2620.

  Next, in step 2620, the hold pre-reading effect execution availability determination means SM26k determines whether or not the winning pre-read lottery is won. In the case of Yes in step 2620, in step 2622, the hold pre-reading effect execution availability determination means SM26k is “trigger hold” for the new hold in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b that is won in the winning pre-read lottery. Information to that effect is added and temporarily stored, and the processing proceeds to the next processing {step 2126 (second) processing}. In addition, also in the case of No in step 2602, step 2604, step 2606, or step 2620, the process proceeds to the next process {step 2126 (second) process}.

  In this way, in the second embodiment, in both cases where the new hold becomes a big hit and loses, the look-ahead for the hold on the first main game side rather than the look-ahead lottery for the hold on the second main game side The lottery is easier to win (Look-ahead lottery win rate when the first main game hold is a big win hold = 1/3> Pre-fetch lottery when the second main game hold is a big win hold Winning rate = 1/5, prefetch lottery win rate when first main game hold is lost hold = 1/10> prefetch lottery win rate when second main game hold is a big hit hold = 1 / 15). By configuring in this way, the “special symbol” related to the first main game side appears more than the “special symbol” related to the second main game side even in the appearance rate of the “special symbol” as the look-ahead effect. It is easy to do.

  Next, FIG. 47 is a flowchart of prefetch hold content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2650 (second) in FIG. First, at step 2652, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether or not the trigger hold is a big hit hold. In the case of Yes in step 2652, in step 2654, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 determines the display mode of the trigger hold with reference to the hold display mode determination table (at the time of big hit), and performs the next process (step 2118). The process proceeds to (1). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2652, in step 2656, the display mode of the trigger hold is determined with reference to the hold display mode determination table (at the time of losing), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2118).

  Here, the two tables at the bottom of the figure are a hold display mode determination table (at the time of a big hit) and a hold display mode determination table (at the time of a loss). In the second embodiment, the type of display mode that can be selected when determining the display mode of the trigger hold that can change at the time of execution of the hold change effect with reference to the hold display mode determination table (at the time of big hit) is rainbow color, There are four types of red, green, and blue, and the types of display modes that can be selected when determining with reference to the hold display mode determination table (at the time of losing) are red, green, and blue. A lottery will be drawn with a random number dedicated to determining the mode. It should be noted that red is most easily selected when referring to the hold display mode determination table (at the time of big hit), while blue is most easily selected when referring to the hold display mode determination table (when lost). The jackpot expectation degree for each display mode when an event occurs is the expectation degree (expectation degree that becomes a big hit by the symbol variation related to the hold), and the rainbow color is selected only at the time of the big hit. From high to low, the order is red, green, and blue. Note that the display mode that can be changed is merely an example, and there is no problem even if the number of types is changed or the color that can be changed is changed. In addition, in this example, it is configured so that the expected degree of big hit can be suggested by the display color of the hold, but is not limited to this, for example, in the case of big hit (or combined with the expected degree of big hit) The game state after the execution of the special game may be suggested. In such a configuration, particularly in the probability variation gaming state, the display color of the suspension suggests the expectation degree to shift to the probability variation gaming state after the execution of the special game in the case of a big hit in the suspension. (For example, if the hold display color is red, the probability variation expectation is large, if the blue display probability is blue, the probability variation expectation is small, etc.), it is determined whether the probability variation gaming state advantageous to the player continues or ends. It is possible to perform an effective production.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, when executing the hold change effect, the big hit expectation can be different depending on the display mode selected from the plural types of hold display modes. Further, it may be configured such that the hold change effect can be executed a plurality of times during execution of the prefetch effect (from the timing of winning the prefetch lottery to the end of the change of the main game symbol related to the trigger hold). For example, in the case where the hold change effect is executed twice during the execution of the prefetch effect, when the display mode of the hold that changes in the first hold change effect is blue, the second time The on-hold display mode that changes in the on-hold change effect is changed to green or red, that is, every time the on-hold change effect is executed, it changes (ranks up) to a on-hold display mode with a high jackpot expectation. It is desirable to configure it so that it does not impair the player's expectation. In addition, the effect related to the change in the hold display is not limited to this, and as a result, an effect mode that does not involve the change in the hold display may be provided. There may be provided an effect form (so-called gas pattern) in which an effect occurs and the hold display does not change as it is, and an effect form in which the hold display change is executed thereafter.

  Next, FIG. 48 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. 43 in the second embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is about step 2206 (second) and step 2250 (second), and the purpose thereof is to stop the first decorative symbol (including the temporary stop), in particular, “ The purpose is to change a factor for determining a “special symbol” (that is, a symbol that does not mean a big hit, but then notifies that a big hit can occur). That is, after the symbol content determination permission flag is turned on in step 2204, in step 2206 (second), the drawing display content determination means SM21n (and the notice effect display content determination means SM24n, the reach effect display content determination means SM25n). Refers to the symbol information temporarily stored in the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b (variation mode relating to the main game symbol) and the drawing variation content determination lottery table SM21ta, the variation mode of the first decorative symbol {For example, when the variation mode related to the main game symbol is short-term variation, non-reach, when it is long-term variation, normal reach, super reach, etc.} is determined and the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b (And notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, reach effect related information temporary storage means SM25b), and temporarily stored in step 2 To migrate to 08.

  In step 2216, the decoration design effect content is determined and the display update timing and the display update content are set. Then, in step 2250 (second), the design display content determination means SM21n is a notice effect / display device which will be described later. The figure stop symbol determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to Step 2218. That is, the stop symbol (including the temporary stop time) of the first decorative symbol is determined by a notice effect / illustration stop symbol determination process, which will be described later.

  Next, FIG. 49 is a flowchart of the notice effect / illustration stop symbol determination process according to the subroutine of step 2250 (second) in FIG. First, in step 2252, the notice effect display control means SM24 refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b and determines whether or not the change is a change related to the trigger hold. In the case of Yes in step 2252, in step 2254, the notice effect display control means SM24 turns off the angel zone entry flag in the flag area of the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. Next, in step 2260, the notice effect display control means SM24 determines the contents of the notice effect from “special notice effect candidates”. Here, the “special notice effect candidate” is a notice effect candidate to be referred to when determining the notice effect when the background effect is an “angel zone background” described later. Next, in step 2262, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines the stop symbol (temporary stop symbol) of the first decorative symbol based on the information related to the stop symbol of the main game symbol, and performs the next process (the process of step 2218). ). Here, in Step 2262, it is desirable that the above-mentioned “special symbol” is not selected as the stop symbol (temporary stop symbol) of the first decorative symbol. In the case of “Background” (that is, a state in which the presence of a high-hit expectation hold is already informed), the above-mentioned “special symbol” (that is, it does not mean a big hit, but a big hit can occur after that) This is because, if the symbol (notifying the player) is stopped and displayed, similar information is double-informed, which may result in an inexplicable presentation for the player.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2252, in step 2256, the notice effect display control means SM24 refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b and determines whether or not there is a trigger hold in the hold. In the case of Yes in step 2256, in step 2258, the notice effect display control means SM24 refers to the flag area of the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b and determines whether or not the angel zone entry flag is off. If Yes in step 2258, the process proceeds to step 2264. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2258, the process proceeds to step 2260.

  Next, in step 2264, the notice effect display control means SM24 determines the contents of the notice effect from “normal notice effect candidates”. Here, the “normal notice effect candidate” is a notice effect candidate to be referred to when determining the notice effect when the background effect is other than “angel zone background” described later. Next, in Step 2266, the notice effect display control means SM24 turns on the angel zone entry flag in the flag area of the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. Next, in step 2268, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines the stop symbol in the middle row of the first decorative symbol as “special symbol”, and based on the information regarding the stop symbol of the main game symbol, The temporary stop symbols of the left column and the right column are determined (designs different from the left column and the right column are temporarily stopped), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2218).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2256, in step 2270, the notice effect display control means SM24 determines whether or not the variation mode group of the variation is group 3. {By this processing, the variation that is not group 3 is The angel zone transfer lottery, which will be excluded from the angel zone transfer lottery described later, and the change related to the hold of group 3 that did not win the prefetch lottery (prefetch lottery at the time of winning a prize) (which did not become the trigger hold) Is eligible for lottery}. In the case of Yes in step 2270, in step 2272, the notice effect display control means SM24 indicates that the change is a pseudo continuous change (a change in which the pseudo change is executed at least once. In this example, the change is illustrated in FIGS. It is determined whether or not it is a change in which the effects (A-1, A-2, B-2, etc.) are executed. In the case of Yes in step 2272, in step 2274, the notice effect display control means SM24 changes the angel zone background to the angel zone background lottery to win with a predetermined probability (1/10 in this example). Or lottery). Next, in step 2276, the notice effect display control means SM24 determines whether or not the angel zone transition lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 2276, in step 2278, the notice effect display control means SM24 determines the contents of the notice effect from “normal notice effect candidate → special notice effect candidate after special symbol temporary stop timing” (for example, FIG. 21). In the case of A-1 and A-2, the content of the notice effect is determined from the “normal notice effect candidate” for 14 seconds from the start of the change, and after 14 seconds from the start of the change that becomes the first middle row temporary stop timing. The content of the notice effect is determined from “special notice effect candidates”). Next, in step 2280, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 changes the temporary stop symbol of the middle row of the first game symbol (first in pseudo continuous fluctuation) to “special symbol” (the background effect is changed to the angel zone). Decorative symbols to notify the player), and based on the information about the stop symbol of the main game symbol, the temporary stop symbols in the left column and the right column of the first decorative symbol are the same as in the case of reach (Stop mode), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2218). The temporary stop symbol is a temporary stop symbol of pseudo variation in pseudo continuous variation, and may be hereinafter referred to as a pseudo continuous symbol.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2270, step 2272, or step 2276, in step 2282, the notice effect display control means SM24 determines the notice effect contents from “normal notice effect candidate”. Next, in step 2284, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines a stop symbol (temporary stop symbol) of the first decorative symbol based on the information related to the stop symbol of the main game symbol, and performs the next process (the process of step 2218). ).

  In the second embodiment, the angel zone transition lottery is executed at step 2274 to determine whether or not the transition angel zone transition is possible (the quasi-continuous symbol in the middle of the variation is set as a “special symbol” and the special symbol It is configured to determine whether or not to move to the Angel Zone when triggered by a temporary stop), but is not limited to this. Combination of the first pseudo-continuous symbol (first middle temporary stop symbol) and the notice effect A plurality of candidates may be provided, and at the time of pseudo continuous variation, a combination of pseudo-continuous symbols and notice effects may be determined from the combination candidates. Specifically, as the combination candidates, “pseudo continuous symbol A, notice effect 1”, “pseudo continuous symbol A, notice effect 2”, “pseudo continuous symbol A, notice effect 3”, “pseudo continuous symbol A, notice” There are six combinations of “effect 4”, “special symbol, notice effect 1”, and “special symbol, notice effect 2”, and a combination of the pseudo-continuous symbol and the notice effect is determined by lottery from the candidates. When a combination of a pseudo-continuous symbol whose symbol is “special symbol” and a notice effect is selected, a transition may be made to the angel zone during the change. Note that the method for determining the combination of the pseudo-continuous symbol and the notice effect is not limited to the time of pseudo continuous variation, and the determination method may be used for other variations. Moreover, the said combination is not limited only to a pseudo | simulation continuous pattern and a notice effect, You may include a background effect, a sound aspect, etc.

  In addition, as a method of determining the notice effect, first, the basic notice effect (the notice effect that can be executed regardless of the background effect being executed, the effect that is executed in the first half of the fluctuation, etc.) is decided. Then, based on the determined basic notice effect, an effect that is not a notice effect such as a background effect is determined, the decided effect (notice effect, background effect, etc.) is executed, and then the decided Based on a basic notice effect and an effect that is not a notice effect such as the determined background effect, an effect that is not determined among the notice effects may be determined (the determination method is repeated a plurality of times). , It may be configured to determine all of the notice effects to be executed by the change). By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine the announcement effect executed by the change at a plurality of timings, and it is caused by determining all the announcement effects executed by the change at one timing. It is possible to alleviate production problems and the like. In this example, (1) “Confirmed stop”: Confirmed stop is executed after a temporary stop, and if the symbol combination that has been confirmed and stopped is a big hit (a set of three identical symbols), the game shifts to a special game. , If it is lost (it is not a set of three of the same design), it will not shift to a special game. (2) “Temporary stop”: The temporary stop is executed before the fixed stop (for example, fluctuation fluctuation), The pseudo-variation can be executed by re-varying after temporarily stopping in the middle of the fluctuation in the symbol fluctuation. (3) When “special symbol” is displayed at the time of pre-reading effect execution, the “special symbol” is determined to be fixed stop It is configured not only to be displayed but also to be displayed as a temporary stop before a fixed stop. In this example, fixed stop and final stop are synonymous, and `` stop '' is used for both fixed stop and temporary stop, but the stop symbol in the variation of the main game symbol is the fixed stop symbol The stop symbol in the decorative symbol variation is used for both the temporary stop symbol and the fixed stop symbol (if the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is “777”, etc., the stop symbol is used) = It is a fixed stop symbol).

  Here, the lower part of the figure is an image diagram showing an example of a notice effect / illustration stop symbol display. As shown in the upper part of the same image diagram, in this example, when transitioning to the angel zone in the change, as a background effect, a normal background effect (an example of a background effect that is not an angel zone background effect) is being executed. The “special symbol” stops as the first middle row temporary stop symbol. In addition, when the “special symbol” is temporarily stopped, the angel zone background effect is executed as the background effect, and then the final stop symbol is stopped. In addition, in this example, although the case where it is a big hit is illustrated, it is configured so that the background effect is similarly switched in the case of a loss. {For the temporary stop of the "special symbol" in this case, The decorative design may be broken (different designs), but may not (be the same design) (= the “special design” may be temporarily stopped after reaching)}.

  In addition, as shown in the middle of the figure, in this example, when other pseudo-continuous fluctuations that do not involve the transition to the Angel Zone are performed (when the Angel Zone Transition lottery is not won), the background effect is a normal background effect. In the situation where is executed, the first middle row temporary stop symbol is “pseudo continuous symbol A” (a temporary stop symbol notifying the player that a pseudo continuous variation different from “special symbol” is being executed. ) Temporarily stops. Next, after the “pseudo continuous symbol A” temporarily stops, the background effect is executed as the normal background effect, and then the final stop symbol is stopped.

  In addition, as shown in the lower part of the image diagram, in this example, when the normal background effect is executed as the background effect, if the winning look-ahead lottery is won while the decorative design is changing, it will stop when the change stops Lost symbols (breaks) stop as symbols. Thereafter, the next change is started, and the “special symbol” is stopped as a stop symbol of the change (that is, the change is a change before entering the pre-reading angel zone). Next, when the “special symbol” is stopped, the angel zone background effect is executed as the background effect from the next change (that is, the next change is the first change in the prefetch zone). In addition, in this example, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) in the symbol variation related to the reservation to be digested before the trigger hold, the temporary stop is not performed except for the fixed stop (previous temporary stop). (It is not used in the case of re-variation after a temporary stop as a pseudo-variation stop symbol). In other words, in the symbol variation related to the suspension scheduled to be digested before the trigger suspension, the symbol variation related to the trigger suspension from “the timing when the special symbol is temporarily stopped → the pseudo variation is executed and the symbol variation is lost”. Until the Angel Zone background is displayed, it cannot be executed. As described above, in the second embodiment, the player can stop the “special symbol” by configuring the angel zone background effect in response to the stop (or temporary stop) of the “special symbol”. (Or temporary stop) can be recognized to recognize the transition to the Angel Zone, and not only at the time of change stop (at the time of stop for fixed display) but also at the time of change stop It is possible to have a sense of expectation to stop (or temporarily stop) the symbol.

  As shown in the figure, when the “special symbol” stops as a temporary stop symbol at the time of quasi-continuous fluctuation, the same number stops (temporarily stops) in the left column and the right column (at the time of reach) On the other hand, when the “special symbol” is stopped as the final stop symbol of the next change after the pre-read lottery win, different numbers (separated eyes) are configured to stop in the left column and the right column. Yes.

  Next, FIG. 50 is a flowchart of the background effect control process according to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. 43 in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 2506 (second), that is, after setting “angel zone background” as the background effect in step 2504, the background effect display control means in step 2506 (second). SM23 refers to the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and changes (part of the pseudo continuous fluctuation) that triggered the transition to the “angel zone” (or puts them on hold) Whether or not the change that triggered the transition of the “angel zone” (or the change related to the hold is the change related to the hold of the trigger, or the change to the change Angel Zone)} judge. If Yes in step 2506 (second), the process proceeds to step 2508, and if No, the process proceeds to step 2520.

  By configuring as described above, the gaming machine according to the second embodiment has the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol as the decorative symbols, and is configured to be able to execute a so-called hold prefetch effect. When the “special symbol” is stopped and displayed as the first decorative symbol, a background change effect indicating that the expected degree of transition to the special game is increased is executed. Then, regarding the hold that is in the digestion order before the hold (trigger hold) that is the trigger for the prefetching effect, the “special symbol” is stopped and displayed as the fixed stop symbol at the time of the symbol change of the first decorative symbol at the time of the hold digest In this case, the meaning that the “special symbol” is stopped and displayed in this case is “the symbol variation has ended” and “the expectation of transition to the special game has increased”. On the other hand, regarding the trigger hold, since the “special symbol” can be stopped and displayed as a temporary stop symbol when the symbol of the first decorative symbol changes at the time of the hold-up, the meaning of the “special symbol” being stopped and displayed in this case is , “The design fluctuation will change again” and “the expectation of the transition to the special game has increased”. In this way, in the gaming machine according to the second embodiment, while creating the “special symbol” of the same type, a novel production method is created that has different meanings depending on the timing (or situation) of the stop display. Will be able to.

  In addition, in 2nd Embodiment, regarding the hold | maintenance which becomes the digestion order before a trigger hold | maintenance, when "the special symbol" is stopped and displayed as a fixed stop symbol at the time of the pattern change of the 1st decoration symbol at the time of the hold digest The trigger hold is configured so that the “special symbol” of the same type is displayed when the “special symbol” is stopped and displayed as a temporary stop symbol when the symbol of the first decorative symbol is changed when the trigger is suspended. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the “special symbol” in the former case may be “special symbol A”, and the “special symbol” in the latter case may be “special symbol B”. By comprising in this way, the meaning that the "special symbol" in both is stopped-displayed can be transmitted clearly to a player. Further, the probability that the “special symbol” is displayed in the former case may be configured to be lower than the probability that the “special symbol” is displayed in the latter case.

  Further, in this example, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol have three symbol rows and one effective line, but there is no problem even if they are changed. For example, (1) “special symbol” (2) The symbol sequence and / or the effective line is increased when the “special symbol” is stopped (for example, the effective line becomes 9 lines). The number of lines decreases (for example, the number of symbol rows becomes two, and one symbol stops to reach a reach state. May notify the difference in the profit rate attached to the player by the type of symbol that is stopped and displayed).

(Modification 1 from the second embodiment)
Here, in the second embodiment, the “special symbol” has a different meaning depending on the timing (or situation) when the “special symbol” is stopped and displayed. It is possible to create a more innovative production method by further increasing the linkage with. Thus, an example of such a configuration is a first modification from the second embodiment, and only the changes from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 51 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. 43 in the first modification from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are step 2220 (second modification 1) to step 2224 (second modification 1), and the purpose of the suspension is that the display mode has changed due to the suspension pre-reading effect. The content of the production is to be configured to be associated with the changed display mode. That is, after determining the decorative design effect content in step 2216 and setting the display update timing and display update content, in step 2220 (second variation 1), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 displays the drawing hold information. Referring to temporary storage means SM22b, it is determined whether or not the hold display mode related to the change is a dedicated effect display mode (a specific hold display mode different from other hold display modes, in this example, red). To do. In the case of Yes in step 2220 (second variation 1), in step 2222 (second variation 1), the notice effect display control means SM24 determines the contents of the notice effect from “dedicated notice effect candidates”. Here, the “exclusive notice effect candidate” is an effect candidate that is selected only in the change related to the hold of the dedicated effect display mode (in this example, red) that is a specific hold display mode. It can be mentioned that a battle effect with a specific enemy character is executed. It should be noted that the symbol variation related to the “exclusive notice effect candidate” is preferably configured so that the big hit expectation is relatively higher than other notice effect candidates. Next, in step 2223 (second variation 1), the notice effect display control means SM24 turns off the angel zone entering flag in the flag area of the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. Next, in step 2224 (second variation 1), the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines the stop symbol (temporary stop symbol) of the first decorative symbol based on the information related to the stop symbol of the main game symbol, and step 2218. Migrate to If step 2220 (second modification 1) is No, the process proceeds to step 2250 (second). Here, if it is configured so that the “special symbol” is easily selected as the stop symbol (temporary stop symbol) of the first decorative symbol, the hold display mode is a dedicated effect display mode, and the first decorative symbol is Interlocking with the fact that the “special symbol” is easily selected as the stop symbol (temporary stop symbol) can be further enhanced.

  By configuring as described above, in the gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment, a dedicated effect display mode (in this example, red) that is a specific hold display mode is reserved as a preview effect candidate. By configuring so that a “dedicated notice effect candidate” that is an effect candidate that is selected only in the variation related to the above can be selected, during the execution of the hold change effect (effect that changes the hold display mode) based on the winning of the pre-read lottery , It is possible to provide a notice effect that is executed only when the display is changed to a specific hold display mode, and by increasing the expectation of jackpot when the effect is executed, the player can change the hold when the hold changes. Attention is paid to the display color (holding change execution mode), and the fun of the game is enhanced. Further, in the first modification from the second embodiment, the effect executed by the symbol variation related to the trigger suspension is not determined when the trigger suspension occurs, but determined when the trigger suspension is completed. By configuring as such, “trigger hold occurs → hold display mode is determined and displayed in the display mode → trigger hold is digested → hold display related to trigger hold” It is possible to configure such that an effect to be executed is determined based on a design variation related to the trigger suspension based on the mode. It should be noted that there is no problem even if the configuration relating to the pending digest transmission image described later is applied to the first modification from the second embodiment.

  In the first modification from the second embodiment, when a hold change effect is executed as a so-called hold prefetching effect, and the hold display form becomes a dedicated effect display form (red in this example), the notice effect contents Is selected from “dedicated notice effect candidates”, but the hold change effect is executed when the “special symbol” is stopped as the stop symbol (temporary stop symbol) of the first decorative symbol. It may be configured to further link the stop of “special symbol”. For example, “special symbol A” and “special symbol B” are provided as “special symbol”, and “special symbol A” stops. In such a case, it may be configured to change to a hold display mode other than red as a hold change effect, while changing to a red hold display mode as a hold change effect when “special symbol B” stops. With such a configuration, it is possible to further enhance the linkage between the so-called reservation pre-reading effect and the “special symbol”.

(Modification 2 from the second embodiment)
Here, in 2nd Embodiment, although it is comprised so that the interlocking | linkage with what is called a hold prefetching effect and a "special symbol" may be improved, this interlocking | linkage is carried out by the 1st main game side and the 2nd main game side. An example of such a configuration may be referred to as a second modification from the second embodiment, and only the changes from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 52 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. 43 in the second modification from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are step 2226 (second), step 2250 (1) (second variation 2) and step 2250 (2) (second variation 2), the purpose of which is the first main The control is to change the selection rate of the “special symbol” in accordance with whether the symbol changes on the game side or the symbol variation on the second main game side. That is, after the decoration design effect content is determined in step 2216 and the display update timing and the display update content are set, in step 2226 (second modification 2), the drawing display content determination means SM21n temporarily stores the main side information. With reference to the means SM11b, it is determined whether or not the symbol variation is a symbol variation on the first main game side. In the case of Yes in step 2226 (second variation 2), in step 2250 (1) (second variation 2), the drawing display content determination means SM21n determines the first main game notice effect / illustration stop symbol, which will be described later. The process is executed, and the process proceeds to Step 2218. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2226 (second variation 2), in step 2250 (2) (second variation 2), the drawing display content determination means SM21n stops the second main game notice effect / illustration stop, which will be described later. The symbol determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to Step 2218.

  Next, FIG. 53 shows a first main game notice effect / illustration stop symbol determination process according to the subroutine of step 2250 (1) (second modification 2) in FIG. 52 in the second modification from the second embodiment. It is a flowchart of. The processing of this subroutine is the same processing as the notice effect / illustration stop symbol determination processing in step 2250 (second), and thus the description thereof is omitted. In the second embodiment, the same process is executed on the first main game side and the second main game side in the second embodiment, but in the second modification from the second embodiment, The purpose is to execute separate processing on the first main game side and the second main game side.

  Next, FIG. 54 is a second main game notice effect / illustration stop symbol determination process according to the subroutine of step 2250 (2) (second modification 2) in FIG. 52 in the second modification from the second embodiment. It is a flowchart of. The processing of this subroutine is similar to the notice effect / design stop symbol determination processing of step 2250 (second), and therefore only the differences from the processing will be described in detail. The difference from the notice effect / illustration stop symbol determination process in step 2250 (second) is step 2286 (second modification 2) and step 2288 (second modification 2). When there is no trigger hold in step 2286 (second change 2), the notice effect display control means SM24 refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b, and the change is related to the group C. It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2286 (second variable 2), in step 2272, the notice effect display control means SM24 refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b, and is the fluctuation a fluctuation in which pseudo continuous fluctuation is executed? Determine whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2272, in step 2288 (second variation 2), the notice effect display control means SM24 is the predetermined probability (the first main game side angel zone transition lottery winning rate executed in step 2274 is 1). An angel zone shift lottery that is won at 1/30) is executed in this example, and the process proceeds to step 2276. In addition, when it is No at step 2286 (second modification 2), the routine proceeds to step 2282.

  With the configuration as described above, in the gaming machine according to the modified example 2 from the second embodiment, the angel zone transition lottery (pseudo) is performed based on the symbol variation on the first main game side and the symbol variation on the second main game side. By making the “special symbol” temporarily stop by continuous variation and making the winning probability of the lottery (whether or not the angel zone background is displayed as a background effect) be different, the symbol variation on the first main game side Depending on whether there is symbol variation on the second main game side, it becomes possible to change the selection rate of the “special symbol” in the first decorative symbol, so that the symbol variation on the first main game side It is possible to expand the range of the production and enhance the interest in the production by making the accompanying production tendency different from the production tendency accompanying the symbol variation on the second main game side.

  In the second modification from the second embodiment, the second main game hold cannot be a trigger hold in the non-time-reduced gaming state, and therefore the second main game hold is not in the non-time-reduced gaming state. The hold prefetch effect for the game side hold is not executed. Therefore, in the non-time-reduced gaming state, the appearance rate of the “special symbol” related to the reserved pre-reading effect on the first main game side and the appearance rate of the “special symbol” related to the reserved pre-reading effect on the second main game side are compared. Even so, the appearance rates are different (the first main game side is higher). Furthermore, as described above, whether the lottery probability for temporarily stopping the “special symbol” by pseudo continuous variation is the symbol variation on the first main game side or the symbol variation on the second main game side Depending on the situation (the “special symbol” temporarily stops with a higher probability depending on the symbol variation on the first main game side), and whether the trigger hold is also on hold on the first main game side Depends on whether the hold is on the second main game side (the hold on the first main game side is more likely to be a trigger hold), so a trigger hold occurs → Hold on hold digested before the trigger hold “Special symbol” is fixedly displayed at the time of digestion (so-called hold pre-reading effect is executed) → “Special symbol” is temporarily stopped (so-called pseudo-continuous variation is executed) at the time of trigger hold on-hold digestion The probability that a series of production flows will also occur in the first main game It is also possible to configure so that the direction of the high-probability than the second main player side. In addition, in the non-time-reduced gaming state, the appearance rate of the symbol variation in which the “special symbol” temporarily stops due to the pseudo continuous variation in the symbol variation related to the first main game symbol and the pseudo continuous in the symbol variation related to the second main game symbol. The difference between the appearance rate of the symbol variation where the “special symbol” temporarily stops due to the variation, the appearance rate of the “special symbol” as the look-ahead effect in the symbol variation related to the first main game symbol, and the second main game symbol When the difference from the appearance rate of the “special symbol” as the pre-reading effect in the symbol variation is compared, the difference relating to the pseudo continuous variation (the former difference) is smaller.

  In this example, (1) the selection probability (appearance rate) of “special symbol” may be the same on the first main game side and the second main game side. When the second main game hold is present, the “special symbol” related to the pre-reading effect does not appear due to the fluctuation of the second main game design. (3) There is a big hit hold in the first main game hold. The “special symbol” related to the pre-reading effect may appear in the variation of the first main game symbol. (4) “special symbol” related to the pseudo continuous variation in the case of the variation that becomes the big hit of the second main game symbol. (5) In the case of a variation that becomes a big hit of the first main game symbol, a “special symbol” related to pseudo-continuous variation may or may not appear. Further, in the second modification from the second embodiment, the “special symbol” is configured to appear at the time of the pre-reading effect or at the time of the pseudo continuous variation, but the “special symbol A” can appear only at the time of the pre-reading effect. “Special symbol” and “Special symbol B” are “special symbols” that can appear only during pseudo-continuous fluctuation, and the appearance rates of “special symbol A” and “special symbol B” are compared, and the second main game symbol It may be configured such that “special symbol A” does not appear in variation, “special symbol B” has a low appearance rate in variation of the second main game symbol, and the like.

(Modification 3 from the second embodiment)
Here, in the second embodiment, as the so-called hold pre-reading effect, the background change effect and the hold change effect are configured to be executable, but a new game is created by changing the execution mode of the hold pre-reading effect. It is possible. Thus, an example of such a configuration is referred to as a third modification from the second embodiment, and only the changes from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 55 is a main flowchart on the sub control board S side (particularly on the sub main control unit SM side) in the third modification from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are step 2700 (second modification 3) and step 2750 (second modification 3), that is, after executing the decorative symbol display content determination process in step 2200, step 2700 (second modification 3). In the second modification 3), the sub-control board S executes a hold display mode change control process, which will be described later. Next, in step 2750 (second modification 3), the sub control board S executes a pending digest transmission image display control process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2300.

  Next, FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the hold information management process according to the subroutine of step 2100 in FIG. 55 in the third modification from the second embodiment. The change from the second embodiment is step 2130 (second modification 3), and the purpose is to notify that the certain hold is being digested (the symbol is changing) at the time of digestion of a certain hold. It is to make it possible to display the image. That is, after subtracting 1 from the drawing hold counter value in step 2112, in step 2130 (second variation 3), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 displays the hold information (particularly the display mode) related to the symbol variation. And “variation mode group information”, “pending digest transmission image information” {the pending display of the suspended digest to be digested according to the starting variation, during the starting variation (the starting variation starts, As information related to “pending digestion transmission image” to be displayed continuously after digestion}, it is temporarily stored (overwritten and stored) in the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and the process proceeds to Step 2128 (second). To do. In the third modification from the second embodiment, the second main game winning prefetch determination process is deleted (the prefetch lottery is executed only on the first main game side).

  Next, FIG. 57 is a flowchart of the first main game winning prefetch determination processing according to the subroutine of Step 2550 (second modified 3) in FIG. 56 in Modification 3 from the second embodiment. Here, this process will be described in two parts: a process related to the prohibition condition of the pre-read lottery and a process related to the pre-read lottery. In the processing related to the prohibition condition of the former prefetch lottery, first, in step 2580, the hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and the new hold is the second main game. It is determined whether or not it is a holding (holding that is digested with priority over the first main game holding). In the case of Yes in step 2580, in step 2582, the hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the current gaming state is not the time reduction gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 2584, in step 2586, the hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and the hold change mode group before the new hold becomes the group 1 hold. It is determined whether or not there is no hold that becomes a big hit before the new hold, a hold that can be a long fluctuation time, or a trigger hold. If Yes in step 2584, the process proceeds to step 2586.

  Next, in the process relating to the latter prefetch lottery, first, in step 2586, the hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and the new hold variation mode group is determined. Determining whether or not it is group 3 {even if the variation related to the hold whose change mode group is group 3 is a large number of hold at the start of the change (for example, the number of hold is 2 or 3) A relatively long variation time}. In the case of Yes in step 2586, in step 2588, the hold prefetch effect execution possibility determination means SM26k has a predetermined probability (for example, 2/3 if the hold is a big hit hold, 1/8 if the hold is a loss hold). A pre-read lottery is performed when winning a prize. Next, in step 2590, the pending pre-reading effect execution availability determination means SM26k determines whether or not the winning pre-read lottery is won. In the case of Yes in step 2590, in step 2591, the hold pre-reading effect execution availability determination means SM26k adds information indicating “trigger hold” to the new hold selected in the winning pre-read lottery and holds the hold display. The mode is determined to be “yellow zako hold” and stored in the hold information temporary storage area of the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. Here, the trigger hold is a hold that has been won in the winning look-ahead lottery, and is a hold in which the display mode of the hold can be different from the normal hold. Next, in step 2592, the hold pre-reading effect execution availability determination means SM26k determines whether or not the new hold (trigger hold) is held and the hold change plan until the trigger hold is digested based on the current hold number ( For example, the execution plan of the production such as green zako hold at the start of the next change, change to red zako hold at the start of the change, etc.) is determined and stored in the hold information temporary storage area of the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, The process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2118).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2580 (when the new hold is the second main game hold), in step 2596, the hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k is temporarily stored in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. Information indicating “trigger hold” is deleted from the information related to the first main game hold that has been made (if there is no hold with information indicating that the trigger is on hold, this processing is executed Without moving to the next process), the hold display mode is changed to “normal hold” (for example, white hold) and stored in the hold information temporary storage area of the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and step 2594 Migrate to Note that if the answer is No in Step 2582, Step 2584, Step 2586, or 2590, the process proceeds to Step 2594.

  Next, in step 2594, the hold pre-reading effect execution availability determination means SM26k determines that the new hold display mode of the hold is “normal hold” (for example, white hold), and stores the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. The information is stored in the hold information temporary storage area, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2118). Here, the processing of step 2596 and step 2594 is newly generated in the second main game side priority digestion gaming machine as in this example when there is a hold on the second main game side (occurrence). Since the second main game side is digested first, the planned order of change is not achieved, and a prefetch effect (eg, a hold display mode change effect based on the hold change plan) is not normally executed over a plurality of changes. It is the structure for avoiding.

  Next, FIG. 58 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process according to the subroutine of Step 2200 in FIG. 55 in Modification 3 from the second embodiment. Changes from the second embodiment are step 2208 (second modification 3), step 2222 (second modification 3) to step 2226 (second modification 3), and step 2228 (second modification 3). In step 2206 (second), after the variation pattern of the first decorative design is determined, in step 2208 (second variation 3), the drawing display content determination means SM21n (and the notice effect display content determination means SM24n, reach effect display) The content determination means SM25n) refers to the drawing variation content determination lottery table SM21ta, and when the variation mode of the second decorative symbol {for example, the variation mode related to the main game symbol is a short-time variation, If the reach is long-term fluctuation, normal reach, super reach, etc. are determined and the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b (and the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM) are determined. 4b, temporarily stored in the reach demonstration related information temporary storage means SM25b). Next, in step 2216, the drawing display content determination means SM21n determines whether the main game symbol is temporarily stored in the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b and the decoration result (first decoration symbol and second decoration symbol). Based on the variation mode, the decorative design effect content is determined with reference to the decorative design effect table SM21ta-2 (for example, the decorative design effect table 1 to the decorative design effect table 2) in the drawing change content determination lottery table SM21ta, The display update timing and display update contents are set, and temporarily stored in the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2222 (second modification 3), the drawing display content determination means SM21n draws and determines the content of the notice effect to be executed during the change. Here, as shown in the notice content image diagram on the right side of the figure, in this example, the content of the notice effect that can be executed differs depending on the image (so-called stay stage) set as the background effect. The lottery for the announcement effect to be executed may be executed on the basis of an appropriate random number acquired on the sub main control unit SM side, the result of the change, the winning symbol, the change time, or the like. Here, the content of the notice effect provided with a star in the image diagram is the specific notice effect in this example, and is configured such that a different specific notice effect can be executed based on the stay stage (specific notice effect) Will be described later in the processing). Further, the content of the notice effect (in this example, an effect that can be executed before the reach effect or the like) is not limited to this, and for example, a pseudo-continuous effect (an effect in which pseudo continuous variation is executed) can be executed. (In that case, the hold digest transmission image and the display mode of the hold described later in the pseudo continuous effect may be changed, or the hold digest transmission image described later by the notice effect executed during the pseudo continuous effect) Or the display mode of the hold may be changed).

  Next, in step 2224 (second modification 3), the drawing display content determination means SM21n refers to the “pending digest transmission image information” temporarily stored in the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and the fluctuation is determined. It is determined whether the change is related to the trigger hold. In the case of Yes in step 2224 (second modification 3), in step 2226 (second modification 3), the drawing display content determination means SM21n displays the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b (or the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b). ), Based on the “pending digest transmission image information” regarding the validity, variation mode, or notice effect related to the variation, the suspended digest transmission image change plan (for example, when the pseudo-simultaneous symbols are stopped: yellow zako hold → green zako The button is repeatedly pressed during hold and reach: execution plan of effect such as change from green Zako hold to red star hold) is stored in the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and the process proceeds to Step 2218. Note that if the result is No in step 2224 (second modification 3), the process proceeds to step 2218.

  Next, in step 2218 and step 2228 (second modification 3), the drawing display content determination means SM21n turns on the symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21. Then, the on-hold display mode changing process execution flag is turned on, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2300).

  Next, FIG. 59 is a flowchart of the hold display mode change control process according to the subroutine of Step 2700 (second modification 3) of FIG. 55 in Modification 3 from the second embodiment. First, in step 2702, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the flag area of the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether or not the on-hold display mode change processing execution flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2702, in step 2704, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the current gaming state is not the time-saving gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 2704, in step 2706, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b and determines whether there is a trigger hold in the hold. If Yes in step 2706, in step 2708, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 confirms the hold change plan stored in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. Next, in step 2710, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 determines whether or not the hold display mode is scheduled to be changed during the change based on the hold change plan.

  In the case of Yes in step 2710, in step 2712, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and the specific notice effect (see FIG. 49) during the notice effect executed during the change. ) Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 2712, in step 2714, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 is based on the notice mode temporarily stored in the first figure change time management timer SM21t-1 and the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. Then, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the specific notice effect has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2714, the process proceeds to step 2718 (the hold display mode is changed in accordance with the execution of the specific notice effect).

  Here, FIG. 60 is an image of change in hold in the specific notice effect. In this example, an explanation will be given by taking an example in which the display mode of the hold is changed by a grassland notice in a flat zone (especially, a grassland notice in which a snake as a specific notice effect appears). First, in a state where there is a trigger hold in the hold, the fluctuation related to the hold before the trigger hold starts {in this example, the display mode of the trigger hold at this time is the normal hold (white hold)}.

  Next, the grass spot notice which is the notice effect during the change is executed, and an image for searching for something by scraping the grass spot is displayed.

  Next, an image is displayed in which a snake appears (because the expectation that is a big hit during the change is “low”) from behind the grass.

  Here, when there is no plan to change the hold display during the change, an image in which the snake appearing from behind the grass leaves the screen is displayed, and the notice effect is ended.

  On the other hand, if there is a plan to change the hold display during the change, unlike the above case, an image is displayed in which the snake that appears from behind the grass jumps into the hold (the trigger hold that is normally held at this time). The Thereafter, the display mode of the hold (trigger hold) in which the snake jumped in is changed and displayed in a hold display mode (Zako hold in this example) different from the normal hold. In addition, you may comprise so that the production | generation (what is called a gaze production | presentation) which does not change the display mode of a hold | maintenance may be performed even if the said specific notice production | presentation is performed.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2712 (when the specific notice effect is not executed during the change), in step 2716, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 can execute the general-purpose hold change effect (can be executed independently of other effects). In addition, it is an effect that can be executed in any effect stage. For example, a command for displaying an effect that explodes on hold is set (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process in step 2999). Then, the process proceeds to step 2718.

  Next, at step 2718, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 changes the display mode of the trigger hold based on the hold change plan stored in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and the drawing hold information is displayed. Store in the temporary storage means SM22b. Next, in step 2720, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 turns off the on-hold display mode change processing execution flag in the flag area of the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and the next process {step 2750 The process proceeds to (Process 2). In the case of No in step 2704, step 2706, or step 2710, the process proceeds to step 2720, and in the case of No in step 2702 or step 2714, the next process {the process of step 2750 (second modified 3)} is performed. Transition.

  Next, FIG. 61 is a flowchart of the pending digest transmission image display process according to the subroutine of Step 2750 (second modification 3) of FIG. 55 in Modification 3 from the second embodiment. First, in step 2752, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the symbol changing flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2752, in step 2754, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the flag area of the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and whether or not the hold digest transmission image display flag is off. Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 2754, in step 2756, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 displays the hold digest transmission image based on the hold digest transmission image information temporarily stored in the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. (Initial display mode) is determined. Here, the hold digest transmission image is an image that continuously displays the hold related to the change even during the change (after the change starts and the hold related to the change is digested). . By displaying the hold digest transmission image, the player can easily recognize that the change is a change related to Zako hold even during a change related to hold (for example, Zako hold) whose display mode has changed within the hold. During the change, an effect of changing the display mode of the pending digest transmission image can be executed.

  Next, in step 2758, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 turns on the hold digest transmission image display flag in the flag area of the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and proceeds to step 2760. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2754, the process proceeds to step 2760.

  Next, in step 2760, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b and confirms the hold digest transmission image change plan. Next, in step 2762, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 determines whether or not there is a plan to change or delete the display mode of the hold digest transmission image during the change based on the hold digest transmission image change plan. To do. In the case of Yes in step 2762, in step 2764, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 displays the hold digest transmission image display mode based on the first drawing variation time management timer SM21t-1 and the hold digest transmission image change plan. It is determined whether or not the change timing has been reached (for example, at the start of re-variation after the pseudo-continuous symbol temporary stop display, at the time of execution of a predetermined effect, or at a predetermined period during reach effect). In the case of Yes in step 2764, in step 2766, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 sets the hold digest transmission image display mode change condition (for example, pressing of the sub input button during the predetermined period, the maximum number of hold, etc.) It is determined whether or not the above is satisfied. In the case of Yes in step 2766, in step 2768 and step 2770, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 sets a command for displaying a general-purpose hold change effect (for example, an effect that the hold explodes) (display command transmission in step 2999). Is transmitted to the sub-sub-control unit SS in the control process), and the display mode of the reserved digest transmission image is changed based on the reserved digest transmission image change plan (for example, red star hold, green zako hold, no display, etc. Change to the display mode) and store it in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and the process proceeds to Step 2780. Note that if the answer is No in step 2762 or step 2766, the process proceeds to step 2780.

  Here, FIG. 62 is an image diagram of a change in the pending digest transmission image. The change in the display mode of the pending digest transmission image in the third modification from the second embodiment is configured to be executed in the flow illustrated in FIG. In this example, a pattern in which the battle effect does not end in the first half but shifts (develops) to the battle effect (second half) is illustrated. First, the fluctuation related to the trigger hold (currently Zako hold) starts, and Zako hold is displayed as a hold digest transmission image.

  Next, a battle effect (first half) is executed as the effect during the change. In this example, when the hold digest transmission image is Zako hold, the display mode of the Zako hold can be changed by pressing the sub input button a predetermined number of times during execution of the battle effect (first half) in the change. It is configured. In this example, a predetermined effect can be executed by pressing the sub input button during execution of the battle effect (first half), but an effect that prompts the player's operation (pressing the sub input button) Since it is not particularly executed, the operation of the sub input button is an input of a so-called hidden command (back button).

  If you press the button repeatedly (press the sub-input button a predetermined number of times) during the execution of the battle production (first half), each time you press the sub-input button, an attack is applied to the Zako hold displayed as the hold digest transmission image The effect image is displayed.

  Next, when the number of times the sub input button is pressed in the battle effect (the first half) reaches a predetermined number, an image of exploding Zako hold that is a reserved digest transmission image is displayed, and based on the reserved digest transmission image change plan, The display mode of the hold digest transmission image is changed and displayed (for example, the display mode of the hold is changed to red star hold or no display). Even after the transition to the battle effect (second half), the reserved digest transmission image will be displayed (or not displayed) in the display mode after the display mode is changed {the player who enters the hidden command Since there is an intention of predicting the jackpot expectation degree of the fluctuation depending on the display mode of the transmission image, the suspended digest transmission image is continuously displayed in the display mode after the display mode change even after shifting to the battle effect (second half). }.

  On the other hand, if the button is not repeatedly hit in the battle effect (first half) (or the number of consecutive hits is less than the predetermined number), the Zako hold, which is the hold digest transmission image, will automatically explode at the timing of shifting to the battle effect (second half). An image is displayed and the display of the pending digest transmission image is erased. (Don't dare to press the button, so that the player who enjoys not expecting the big hit expectation of the change, the pending digest transmission image change plan is considered. The display is erased regardless of the content of). In this example, the expectation degree of jackpot holding for Zako is medium, and the expectation degree for hitting red star is high. In addition, when the battle effect (the second half) is executed, the big hit expectation degree increases at a stretch as compared with the case where the battle effect (the first half) is executed. Here, in the situation where the jackpot expectation level has risen due to the transition to the battle stage (second half), if the display of Zako hold with a medium level of jackpot expectation level is continued, the battle stage is a stage effect with a high level of jackpot expectation level. Although it may impair the interest of the (second half), a stage with a high degree of expectation {this example, battle stage (second half)} is not expected at the timing of the start (in this example Zako hold) By erasing, such a situation can be avoided. Although not particularly illustrated in this example, even if the number of times the sub input button is pressed is less than the predetermined number, the display status change timing of the pending digest transmission image is based on the pending digest transmission image change plan. You may comprise so that the display mode of a pending | holding digestion transmission image can be changed automatically. In such a configuration, for example, the display mode of the pending digestion transmission image is automatically changed only when a change to a display mode that suggests that the degree of expectation of jackpot in the fluctuation is high is scheduled. You may comprise. In addition, when the button is not repeatedly hit (or the hit count is less than the predetermined number), the display mode of the pending digest transmission image is automatically changed at a predetermined timing only when the fluctuation is a big hit or a probable big hit. It may be configured as described above (so-called accurate production can be executed).

  In addition, when transitioning to the battle production (second half) without going through the battle production (first half) {for example, start of drawing change (all rows) → notification production 1, display temporary stop display (left column) → provision of drawing Stop display (right column) → Reach development → Battle reach (second half) image display → Drawing temporary stop display (middle row) → Execution depending on the result → Drawing confirmation display (all columns) , I.e., in the case where there is no period {in this example, a battle production (first half)} and there is a transition to the battle production (second half), the timing of the transition to the battle production (second half) Thus, the Zako hold, which is the hold digest transmission image, automatically explodes, and the display mode of the hold digest transmission image is changed and displayed based on the hold digest transmission image change plan. Although not particularly illustrated in this example, the number of times the sub input button is pressed to change the display mode of the hold digest transmission image has a high degree of expectation for jackpot in the fluctuation (the hold display mode with high expectation) It may be configured so that a larger number of times is more easily selected. Although not specifically shown in this example, when the display mode of the reserved digest transmission image changes, in addition to the general-purpose hold change effect, an effect suggesting the content of the change (for example, when Zako hold explodes) It may be configured to execute a disapproval notice to issue a line. The contents suggested by the ending magic notice suggest the jackpot expectation degree of the fluctuation and the production contents scheduled to be executed (for example, “Achichi!” = 60% or more expectation degree of jackpot expectation, “Congratulations!” = If the player does not press the sub input button, the jackpot expectation related to the change is calculated. It is preferable to assume that the player does not think that he / she wants to predict and does not execute the end-of-flight advance notice related to the big hit expectation degree of the change (only the end-of-use advance notice related to the performance contents scheduled to be executed can be executed). . That is, only when the display mode of the pending digest transmission image is changed by the player's operation, the notice effect related to the big hit expectation degree of the change may be executed based on the result of the change. It should be noted that the effect of the battle effect (first half) can be executed at “a4” and “b4”, which have a fluctuation time of 30 seconds.

  Returning to the description of the flowchart, in the case of No in step 2764 (when it is not the timing to change the display mode of the pending digest transmission image), in step 2772, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 displays the display mode of the pending digest transmission image. It is determined whether or not it is time to erase the. In the case of Yes in step 2772, in step 2774, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 displays the display state deletion condition of the hold digest transmission image (for example, the sub input button is not pressed during the predetermined period, the number of times the sub input button is pressed). Is less than a predetermined number of times, etc.). In the case of Yes in step 2774, in step 2776 and step 2778, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 sets a command for displaying a general-purpose hold change effect (for example, an effect in which the hold explodes) (display command transmission in step 2999). Sent to the sub-sub control unit SS in the control process), and the display mode of the pending digest transmission image is changed to "no display" (regardless of the content of the pending digest transmission image change plan, it is changed to "no display") ) Temporarily stored in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and the process proceeds to step 2780.

  Next, in step 2780, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 sets a command for displaying the hold digest transmission image based on the display mode of the hold digest transmission image temporarily stored in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. (Sent to the sub-sub control unit SS in the display command transmission control process in step 2999), and proceeds to the next process (process in step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2752, in step 2782, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 turns off the pending digest transmission image display flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. . Next, in step 2784, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 changes the display mode of the hold digest transmission image to “no display” and temporarily stores it in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. Next, in step 2786, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 displays the hold digest transmission image based on the display mode of the hold digest transmission image temporarily stored in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b (this process). Then, a command to be used to hide the pending digest transmission image is set (sent to the sub-sub control unit SS in the display command transmission control process in step 2999), and the next process (process in step 2300) Migrate to

  In the third modification from the second embodiment, the reserved digest transmission image is configured to be displayed. However, the reserved digest transmission image may not always be displayed. The hold digest transmission image corresponding to the hold that has been digested as it is may not be displayed, and the hold digest transmission image corresponding to the hold in which the hold display mode is changed from the normal hold may be displayed. By configuring as such, the player confirms the reserved digest transmission image at the timing when the player wants to know the expected success rate of the symbol variation, and if the reserved digest transmission image is displayed, the expectation is relatively high, If it is not displayed, it can be easily recognized that the degree of expectation is relatively low.

  Next, FIG. 63 is a flowchart of the background effect control process according to the subroutine of Step 2500 in FIG. 46 in Modification Example 3 from the second embodiment. Changes from the second embodiment are step 2524 (second modification 3) to step 2534 (second modification 3), that is, if the angel zone flag is off in step 2502, step 2524 (second modification). In the second modification 3), the background effect display control means SM23 changes the decorative design based on the first design change time management timer SM21t-1 and the change mode temporarily stored in the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. It is determined whether or not the start timing has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2524 (second modification 3), in step 2526 (second modification 3), the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b and holds the trigger within the hold {as described above. It is determined whether or not there is a hold for the pre-drawing lottery at the time of the first main game winning. In the case of Yes in step 2526 (second variation 3), in step 2528 (second variation 3), the background effect display control means SM23 executes an angel zone transition lottery to win with a predetermined probability (1/3 in this example). To do. Next, in step 2530 (second variation 3), the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the lottery result in step 2528 (second variation 3) and determines whether or not the angel zone transition lottery has been won. . In the case of Yes in step 2530 (second modification 3), in step 2532 (second modification 3), the background effect display control means SM23 sets the angel zone flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b. Turn on and go to step 2504.

  In step 2504, “angel zone background” is set as the background effect, and in step 2534 (second modification 3), the background effect display control means SM23 stores the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b and the drawing hold information temporarily. Referring to the storage means SM22b, it is determined whether or not the symbol variation related to the trigger suspension has ended. If Yes in step 2534 (second modification 3), the process proceeds to step 2508, and if No, the process proceeds to step 2520.

  With the configuration as described above, according to the gaming machine according to the third modification from the second embodiment, the sub-main control for the high-expected hold (especially the hold on the first main game side) that is a big hit. The display mode of the hold on the part SM side can be changed and displayed, and when a predetermined notice effect (in this example, a specific notice effect, especially a low expectation notice effect) is executed, In accordance with the notice effect and the movement of the displayed image, the display mode of the hold can be changed and displayed. As a result, even if it is a notice effect with a low expectation degree of big hit in the fluctuation, the display mode of the hold may be changed, so that the player's interest in the notice effect can be increased and the fun of the game is improved. It becomes possible. Also, when the jackpot expectation rises after the transition to the battle stage (second half), if the display of Zako hold with a medium jackpot expectation level is continued, the battle stage is a stage effect with a high jackpot expectation level. Since there is a possibility that the interest of the (second half) may be impaired, even if there is no operation by the player, a high-expected production (in this example, battle production (second half)) is started at a timing when the expectation is not high ( In this example, Zako hold) is not displayed, and the interest of the production can be prevented from being impaired. In addition, it is a condition that the player performs a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the sub input button SB a predetermined number of times) during a period in which the predetermined effect {eg, battle reach (first half)} is being performed. Since the display mode of the pending digest transmission image can be changed, it can be a player participation type effect, and the player who does not want to know the jackpot expectation level of the change by the effect can perform the predetermined operation. By not, it is possible to provide a game that can be selected such that the display mode of the reserved digest transmission image becomes an effect that does not suggest the degree of expectation of jackpot (for example, deletion of the reserved digest transmission image).

  In the third modification from the second embodiment, the background change effect and the hold change effect are provided as the prefetch effects, and only the hold change effect is configured to be executed a plurality of times during the prefetch effect. The background change effect may be executed a plurality of times during execution of the prefetch effect (for example, it may change to the “true angel zone background” even after the change to the “angel zone background”). In such a configuration, the more the background change effect is executed (the more the number of executions is), the higher the expectation level that is a big hit in the change related to the prefetch effect being executed (rank). It is desirable to configure so that It should be noted that the background change effect does not change (does not rank up) during execution of symbol variation related to the trigger hold.

(Third embodiment)
Here, in the above-described embodiment, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are configured to start and stop varying almost simultaneously with the main game symbol, but the variation pattern of the decorative symbol is not limited to this. . Therefore, an example of such a configuration is referred to as a third embodiment, and only differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  In addition, in 3rd Embodiment, it has the specific area | region C22 which is an area | region used as a transition opportunity of a probability fluctuation | variation game state by entering a ball in the 2nd big winning opening C20.

  First, FIG. 64 (main game table 1 and main game table 2) shows the first main game success / failure lottery table MN11ta-A (second main game success / failure lottery table MN11ta-B) and the first in the third embodiment. It is an example of a main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B). The difference from this embodiment is that the big hit probability in the probability variation gaming state is low, and the short open big hit and the long open big hit are provided as the big hit. Here, the short open big hit is the second big prize opening C20 in a short time (for example, 0.1%) in the distribution game execution round during the big hit (the second big prize opening C20 will be opened). 2) is a big hit that is only open, and the long open big hit is the second big prize opening C20 for a long time in the distribution game execution round (the second big prize opening C20 will be opened) during the big hit. A jackpot that can be opened (for example, 30 seconds). Note that in the third embodiment, the game characteristics such that the game ball enters the specific area C22 during the above-described distribution game execution round and shifts to the probability-variable game state after the execution of the special game being executed. (So-called tamaki machine).

  Next, FIGS. 65 and 66 (main game table 3) are examples of the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B). The difference from this embodiment is that both the first main game side and the second main game side are tables that are referred to when lost and time-reduced game state. And “1 to 3” are configured so that the contents of the table are different. In the third embodiment, among the variation modes of the second main game symbol selected in the time-reduced game state, “b0 (1 second)” is a short variation, and the other variation modes are long variations. Depending on whether the variation mode of the second main game symbol is a short variation or a long variation, the method for determining the variation mode of the decorative symbol (particularly the first decorative symbol) is configured to be different (details will be described later). . In the time-reduced game state, the game is mainly progressed on the second main game side (only the symbol variation on the second main game side is executed in order to progress the game on the right hand, Or, the variation of the second main game symbol is easier to be executed than the variation of the first main game symbol).

  Although details will be described later, in the time-reduced gaming state, the variation time of the second decorative symbol is configured to be the same as the variation time of the second main gaming symbol. The variation time of the two decorative symbols is also determined depending on the number of reservations at the start of symbol variation (it may be different depending on the number of reservations).

  Although not shown, in the third embodiment, in the time-reduced game state, the game proceeds mainly on the second main game side (the game proceeds on the right hand, so the second main game progresses). Since only the game side symbol variation is executed), the first main game hold will not basically occur. Therefore, the variation mode determination table content related to the first main game symbol in the time-reduced gaming state is In such a case, the content may have only one type of variation time for a short time (for example, 3 seconds), and in the case of big hit, the content may have only one type of variation time for a long time (for example, 30 seconds). Since the symbol variation of the first main game symbol in the shortened gaming state is irregular symbol variation, there is no problem even if the content of the variation mode determination table is simple. In addition, in order to cause the second main game suspension during irregular symbol variation, the contents of the variation mode determination table related to the first main game symbol related to the loss in the time-reduced gaming state are displayed for a short time regardless of the number of suspensions. It is also possible to configure so that the fluctuation mode is not selected (for example, the fluctuation time is all 5 seconds or more). The number of holds shown in the figure is not the total number of the first main game hold and the second main game hold, but is the first main game change mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A. In the case of the second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B, it is the second main game hold number.

  Next, FIG. 67 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1450 of FIG. 5 in the third embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 1454 (third) to step 1464 (third), and the purpose is to end the probability variation gaming state by the number of times of variation of the main game symbol (to change to the non-probability variation gaming state). To migrate). That is, in step 1454 (third), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the probability variation counter MP51c and determines whether or not the counter value is greater than zero. In the case of Yes in step 1454 (third), in step 1456 (third), the specific game control means MP50 decrements (decrements) 1 from the count value of the probability variation counter MP51c. Next, in step 1458 (third), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the probability variation counter MP51c and determines whether or not the counter value is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1458 (third), in step 1460 (third), the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game probability change flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Next, at step 1462 (third), the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game short time flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Next, in step 1464 (third), the specific game control means MP50 turns off the auxiliary game short time flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and proceeds to step 1470. Note that if the result is No in step 1454 (third) or step 1458 (third), the process proceeds to step 1470. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, the symbol variation is executed in the probability variation gaming state, and the probability variation gaming state ends when the count value of the probability variation counter MP51c becomes 0 (so-called ST). Although it is configured, it is not limited to this, for example, it is configured so that the probability variation game state does not end depending on the number of symbol variations (can be terminated when the special game is won), and the big hit related to the first main game The ratio of the big hits related to the second main game to the long open big hits is higher than the ratio of the long open big hits, and the short hit big hits related to the second main games may exist. Good.

  Next, FIG. 68 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1600 of FIG. 5 in the third embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is Step 1611 (third), Step 1700 (third) and Step 1650 (third), that is, after setting the special game start display instruction command in Step 1608, or If the special game execution flag is ON in step 1610, the special game control means MP30 refers to the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b in step 1611 (third), and the currently executed round is assigned to the allocated game. It is determined whether or not it is an execution round (a round in which the second big prize opening C20 having the specific area C22 is to be opened, in this example, 2R · 4R). In the case of Yes in step 1611 (third), in step 1700 (third), the special game control means MP30 executes a distribution game execution process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 1634. On the other hand, if step 1611 (third) is No, the process proceeds to step 1612. Also, after setting a special game end display instruction command in step 1638, in step 1650 (third), the special game control means MP30 executes a game state determination process after the end of special game, which will be described later, and The process proceeds to the process (step 1997).

  Next, FIG. 69 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution process according to the subroutine of step 1700 (third) in FIG. 68 in the third embodiment. First, at step 1702, the allocated game execution control means MP36 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the allocated game execution flag is on. If Yes in step 1702, the process proceeds to step 1716. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1702, in step 1704, the distribution game execution control means MP36 refers to the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and the main game symbol that is stopped is the long open symbol (7A, 4B, 5B and 7B, and the second main game jackpot symbol is a long open symbol). In the case of Yes in step 1704, in step 1706, the distribution game execution control means MP36 uses a long open pattern (for example, 30 seconds open as the open pattern of the second big prize opening C20 having the specific area C22, An opening pattern designed so that the ball entering the specific area C22 is substantially definite is set, and the process proceeds to Step 1710. In the case of No in step 1704, in step 1708, the allocation game execution control means MP36 uses the short release pattern (for example, release for 0.1 second) as the release pattern of the second big prize opening C20 having the specific area C22. Then, an opening pattern designed so that non-entry into the specific area C22 is substantially definite is set, and the process proceeds to Step 1710.

  Next, at step 1710, the allocated game execution control means MP36 clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c. Next, at step 1712, the allocated game execution control means MP36 turns on an allocated game execution flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, at step 1714, the distribution game execution control means MP36 opens the second big prize opening C20 with the set release pattern, and proceeds to step 1716.

  Next, at step 1716, the allocation game execution control means MP36 confirms the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c and determines whether or not a predetermined number (10) of gaming balls have won the second big winning opening C20. To do. If Yes in step 1716, the process proceeds to step 1720. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1716, in step 1718, the allocation game execution control means MP36 determines whether or not the opening period (set opening pattern) of the second big prize opening C20 has ended. If Yes in step 1718, the process proceeds to step 1720. Next, at step 1720, the sorting game execution control means MP36 closes the second big prize opening C20. Next, at step 1722, the allocated game execution control means MP36 turns off the allocated game execution flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1724, the allocated game execution control means MP36 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the specific area C22 in the allocated game execution round. In the case of Yes in step 1724, in step 1726, the allocated game execution control means MP36 turns on the main game probability change transition reservation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and proceeds to step 1728. . In the case of No in step 1724, the process proceeds to step 1728. Next, at step 1728, the allocated game execution control means MP36 adds 1 to the round number counter (ends the allocated game execution round), and proceeds to the next process (the process at step 1634). Even in the case of No in step 1718, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1634).

  Next, FIG. 70 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of Step 1650 (third) in FIG. 68 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1662, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b and determines whether or not the main game probability change transition reservation flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1662, in step 1664, the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game probability change transition reservation flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Next, in step 1666, the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined number of times (in this example, 200 times) in the probability variation number counter MP51c. Next, in step 1668, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game probability change flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and proceeds to step 1672. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1662, in step 1670, the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined number of times (in this example, 50 times) in the time-count counter MP52c, and proceeds to step 1672.

  Next, at step 1672, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game short time flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Next, at step 1684, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the auxiliary game short time flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1997).

  FIG. 71 is a main flowchart on the sub control board S side (particularly on the sub main control unit SM side) in the third embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 2010 (third) and step 2850 (third), that is, after executing the above-described decorative symbol display content determination processing in step 2200, step 2010 (third). The sub-control board S refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the current gaming state is a time-saving gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 2010 (third), the process proceeds to step 2300. In the case of No, in step 2850 (third), the sub-control board S performs a time-short / medium decorative symbol display control process, which will be described later. Execute and go to step 2400.

  Next, FIG. 72 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. 71 in the third embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 2230 (third) and step 2800 (third), that is, after turning off the symbol content determination permission flag in step 2204, in step 2230 (third), The drawing display content determination means SM21n refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the current gaming state is a time-saving gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 2230 (third), the process proceeds to step 2206. In the case of No, in step 2800 (third), the drawing display content determination means SM21n The figure content determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to Step 2208. Note that the processing of step 2218 is not executed in the third embodiment (the symbol content determination flag does not exist). In the third embodiment, the first decorative symbol is composed of three columns, the left column, the middle column, and the right column, and the effective line (the line that becomes effective when the same numeric symbol is arranged) is 1. If it is a line and the same numeric symbol is aligned on the effective line, it means a big hit (conversely, if the same numeric symbol is not aligned on the effective line, it will be lost). Also, in the left column, middle column, and right column (or in the middle column), only numeric symbols can be stopped (temporarily stopped) (the above-mentioned “special symbol” does not stop, or the appearance frequency itself is extremely high) (It is a low probability) and can be temporarily stopped in the middle of symbol variation (or the probability of temporary stop is very low). The second decorative symbol is composed of three columns, the left column, the middle column, and the right column, and the effective line (the line in which it is effective to arrange the same symbol) is one line, and is the same as the effective line. If the number symbols are aligned, it means a big hit (conversely, if the same number symbols are not aligned on the effective line, it will be lost). In addition, in the left column, middle column, and right column (or in the middle column), only numeric symbols can be stopped (temporarily stopped) (the above-mentioned “special symbol” does not stop), and during symbol variation It is configured to be able to temporarily stop.

  Next, FIG. 73 is a flowchart of the first and second short-term contents determination processing according to the third embodiment according to the subroutine of step 2800 (third) in FIG. 72. First, in step 2802, the drawing display content determination unit SM21n refers to the main-side information temporary storage unit SM11b and determines whether or not the first decorative symbol is currently stopped. In the case of Yes in step 2802, in step 2804, the drawing display content determination means SM21n determines the second main game suspension content (particularly, the result of the success / failure and the variation time) related to the symbol variation (main game symbol variation), and Confirm the contents of the second main game hold (especially variable time) in the order of the first to second items, that is, the second main game hold content excluding the third hold (especially the result of the determination and the change time). . Next, in step 2806, the drawing display content determination means SM21n determines whether or not there is a hold (including the symbol change) having a change time of a predetermined time (5 seconds in this example) related to the confirmed hold. Based on the digestion order of the suspension (including the symbol variation) for a variation time of a predetermined time (5 seconds in this example) or more, the first decoration symbol of the first decorative symbol The variation mode is determined.

  Here, the right side of the figure is an example of a table for determining the first variation variation mode for the short time in the third embodiment. As shown in this table, in the third embodiment, when the first decorative symbol is stopped (the timing of step 2806), the second main game pending number, the second main game symbol variation, and the second main game variation The variation time of the first decorative symbol is determined based on the variation time related to the game hold. As described above, among the fluctuation modes of the second main game symbol, “b0 (1 second)” is a short fluctuation, and other than “b0 (1 second)” is a long fluctuation.

  Specifically, when there are two or more second main game holds, it is determined whether or not there is a long change hold in the symbol fluctuation, the first hold and the second hold. If there is no long-pending hold, the change time corresponding to three changes of the second main game symbol becomes the change time of the first decorative symbol. For example, when the number of second main game holds is 3 and the number of second main game holds is “1-3”, the change time is “the change: 1 second, 1st: 1 second, 2” In the case of “1st: 1 second, 3rd: 1 second”, the variation time of the first decorative symbol when the second main game pending number is maintained “1-3” is “the variation” and “ The total of the “first” and “second” is 3 seconds, and the first decorative symbol is also stopped at the same time (or substantially simultaneously) as the main game symbol related to the second hold is stopped. . The second decorative symbol is configured to stop at the same time (or substantially at the same time) as the main game symbol stops at every change.

  On the other hand, if there are two or more second main game holds, and if there is a long fluctuation hold in any of the symbol fluctuation, the first hold and the second hold, the earliest The variation time until the variation of the main game symbol related to the hold that becomes a long variation of the digestion order becomes the variation time of the first decorative symbol. For example, when the number of second main game holds is 3 and the number of second main game holds is “1-3”, the fluctuation time is “the change: 1 second, 1st: 10 seconds, 2 In the case of “1st: 1 second, 3rd: 1 second”, the variation time of the first decorative symbol when the second main game pending number is maintained “1-3” is “the variation” and “ The first decoration symbol is also stopped at the same time (or substantially at the same time) as the main game symbol related to the first hold, which is a long fluctuation, is 11 seconds in total with the “first”.

  In addition, when the number of second main game holds is 1 or less, it is determined whether there is a hold that becomes a long change until the hold that becomes the final digestion order (including the symbol change), and the long change If there is no hold, the change time of the second main game symbol and the total change is the change time of the first decorative symbol. For example, when the second main game hold is 1 and the second main game hold number maintains “1-3”, the change time is “the change: 1 second, the first: 1 second” The change time of the first decorative symbol when the number of second main game holds is “1-3” is 2 seconds, which is the sum of “the change” and “first”. The first decorative symbols are also stopped at the same time (or substantially simultaneously) as the main game symbols related to the eye suspension are stopped.

  On the other hand, if the number of second main game holds is 1 or less, and if there is a hold that becomes a long fluctuation until the hold that becomes the final digest order (including the symbol variation), the earliest digest order The variation time until the variation of the main game symbol related to the hold that becomes a long variation is the variation time of the first decorative symbol. For example, when the second main game hold is 1 and the change time when the second main game hold number is maintained “1-3” is “the change: 1 second, 1st: 10 seconds” In the case where the number of second main game holds is maintained at “1-3”, the variation time of the first decorative symbol is 11 seconds, which is the sum of “variation” and “first”, and the long variation The first decorative symbol is also stopped at the same time (or substantially at the same time) as the main game symbol related to the first hold.

  In the third embodiment, the variation time of the first decorative symbol is determined at the timing of step 2806, that is, the timing after the suspension digestion, but the present invention is not limited to this. You may comprise so that the 2nd main game reservation information may be confirmed at a timing and the variation time of a 1st decoration symbol may be determined.

  Next, in step 2808, the drawing display content determination unit SM21n refers to the hold information confirmed in step 2804, and determines whether or not there is a big hit in the confirmed second main game hold. In the case of Yes in step 2808, in step 2810, the figure display content determination means SM21n determines the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol based on the information related to the stop symbol of the main game symbol related to the jackpot holding, Go to 2814. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2808, in step 2812, the figure display content determination means SM21n determines the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol as a losing symbol, and proceeds to step 2814. In the process of step 2812, the stop pattern of the first decorative symbol is set to the reach mode (the stop symbols of the left column and the right column are the same depending on the variation time of the first decorative symbol. For example, “4. 4 ") or a disjointed pattern (the stop symbols in the left and right columns are not the same, for example," 4, 6, 3 ") may be determined. Next, in step 2814, the drawing display content determination means SM21n turns on the first symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b and performs the next processing (step 2208). The process proceeds to (1). In the case of No in step 2802, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in step 2208).

  Although not shown, in the third embodiment, in the time-reduced game state, the game is progressed mainly on the second main game side (the game proceeds on the right hand, so the second The first main game hold will not occur basically because only the symbol change on the main game side is executed), but the first main game hold occurred due to the player performing a left-handed strike, etc. In such a case, it is desirable that the first decorative symbol has the same variation time as the main game symbol until the variation relating to the first main game suspension ends.

  Next, FIG. 74 is a flowchart of a short / medium decorative symbol display control process according to the subroutine of step 2850 (third) in FIG. 71 in the third embodiment. First, in step 2852, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the main game symbol has started to change. In the case of Yes in step 2852, in step 2854, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns on the symbol changing flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2856, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 starts the first figure change time management timer SM21t-1 and the second figure change time management timer SM21t-2, and proceeds to step 2858. On the other hand, if the result in step 2852 is No, the process proceeds to step 2858.

  Next, in step 2858, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the symbol changing flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2858, in step 2860, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 confirms the timer values of the first equipment variation time management timer SM21t-1 and the second equipment variation time management timer SM21t-2. Next, in step 2862, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the first decorative symbol is stopped. In the case of Yes in step 2862, in step 2864, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and proceeds to step 2866. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2862, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 continues the variable display of the first decorative symbol in step 2865, and proceeds to step 2866.

  Next, in step 2866, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 displays the second decorative symbol in a variable manner. Next, in step 2868, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 appropriately executes the determined image display such as temporary stop display, notice image display, reach image display, etc. related to the change of the main game symbol. The first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol can be temporarily stopped in the time-saving gaming state, but are not temporarily stopped in the stop mode such as “special symbol” or pseudo-continuous symbol. As a specific example of the temporary stop, the first decorative symbol is reached due to the symbol variation that becomes a reach variation for a long time (for example, 30 seconds or more) (the left column and the right column are temporarily stopped). The second decorative symbol may be temporarily stopped during the period, or the first decorative symbol may be temporarily stopped as a quasi-continuous variation before the first decorative symbol reaches reach. .

  Next, in step 2870, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the main game symbol has stopped. In the case of Yes in step 2870, in step 2872, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the stop timing of the first decorative symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2872, in step 2874, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 confirms and displays the first decorative symbol. Next, in step 2876, the decorative design display control means SM21 stops and resets (zero clears) the first design variation time management timer SM21t-1, and proceeds to step 2880. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2872, in step 2878, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 continues the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and proceeds to step 2880.

  Next, in step 2880, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 confirms and displays the second decorative symbol. Next, in step 2882, the decorative design display control means SM21 stops and resets (zero clears) the second figure variation time management timer SM21t-2, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2400). It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 2858 or step 2870, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2400).

  Here, the upper part of the figure is a short-time, medium-decoration pattern fluctuation image diagram, and exemplifies an example of the action related to the decoration pattern fluctuation in the third embodiment. First, the “main game symbol change start state” means that the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) start to change at the timing when the main game symbol (especially the second main game symbol) starts to change. Whether or not is displayed. In addition, the part currently displayed with the oblique line has shown that the decoration symbol (1st decoration symbol) is changing. In addition, it is displayed whether or not the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) stop varying at the timing when the main gaming symbol (in particular, the second main gaming symbol) stops varying. In addition, the part currently displayed with the oblique line has shown that the decoration symbol (1st decoration symbol) is changing. Thus, the second decorative symbol starts and stops changing at the same timing (or substantially the same) as the main game symbol (especially the second main game symbol). The second decorative symbol is configured to start and stop changing every three changes of the main game symbol (particularly, the second main game symbol). In other words, the first decorative symbol is configured such that one symbol variation can be executed over a plurality of variation periods of the main game symbol (and the second decorative symbol).

  By configuring as described above, according to the gaming machine according to the third embodiment, by determining the variation time of the first decorative symbol based on the number of the second main game suspension and the variation time, By configuring the variation time of the first decoration symbol to be the value of the variation time of the second main game symbol multiple times, the game as if the variation of the main game symbol multiple times is a single variation Even if the number of times of change of the main game symbol which is the end condition of the probability variation game state is large (200 in this example) as in the third embodiment, the number of times ( For example, the game can be shown to the player as 100 times, and it is possible to alleviate the fact that the losing fluctuation during the probability fluctuation gaming state is continuously boring and the probability fluctuation game. The jackpot probability in the state is actually So that the can feel like the remote has risen.

  In the third embodiment, the second decorative symbol can be fixed and stopped three times during the period in which the first decorative symbol is fixed and stopped once. The maximum number of 3 times is smaller than the second main game reservation upper limit number of 4 (if the second main game reservation upper limit number is exceeded, the first decorative symbol is changing) This may cause a situation where the second main game hold is completely consumed).

  It should be noted that the board configuration of the third embodiment may be changed, for example, the game ball passes almost certainly when the right strike is executed through the auxiliary game start port H10 and the second main game start port B10. (Auxiliary game start opening H10 is arranged on the upper side when viewed from the player) and almost all of the game balls that have flowed down the route and passed through the auxiliary game start opening H10, You may comprise so that a ball can be entered into 2nd main game start opening B10. In such a configuration, in the time-saving gaming state, during the period from when the game ball passes through the auxiliary game start opening H10 to when it enters the second main game start opening B10, “the auxiliary game symbol of Since it is desirable to be able to be changed start → change end of auxiliary game symbol → second main game start opening electric accessory B11d ”, the change time of auxiliary game symbol is 0.2 seconds, the second main game start opening electric It is preferable to adopt a configuration in which the opening mode of the accessory B11d is “6 seconds open → close”. In such a configuration, in order to prevent a large amount of game balls from entering the second main game start port B10 when a right hand is executed in the time-saving game state, the second main game It is desirable that the number of prize balls in the start opening B10 is 1 (the number of prize balls in the first main game start opening A10 is 3).

  In the third embodiment, the second main game holding content is confirmed while the first decorative symbol is stopped, and the variation time related to the next variation of the first decorative symbol is determined. If there is a hold that becomes a long variation of the main game symbol by the second digestion order, the first decorative symbol is also stopped at the same time when the symbol change related to the hold that becomes the long variation is stopped. Therefore, the variation time of the first decorative symbol may not depend on the number of reservations at the start of the variation of the first decorative symbol, and the first variation of the first variation is caused by the retention occurring during the variation of the first decorative symbol. The variation time of the decorative design is configured to be different.

  In the third embodiment, as described above, when there are two or more second main game holds, and there is a long fluctuation in any one of the symbol fluctuation, the first hold and the second hold. When there is a hold that becomes, the change time until the change of the main game symbol related to the hold that becomes the longest change of the first digestion order becomes the change time of the first decorative design, If there is no long-change hold in any of the symbol change and the hold 1st and 2nd hold, the change time of the 3rd change of the 2nd main game design is the change of the 1st decoration design Although it is configured to be time, for example, when the number of second main game hold is 3 and the number of second main game hold is “1-3”, the change time is “the change: 1 second In the case of “1st: 1 second, 2nd: 1 second, 3rd: 1 second”, the second main game holding number is “1-3” The change time of the first decorative symbol when it is held is scheduled for a total of 3 seconds of “the change”, “the first piece” and “the second piece”, but the second main game hold is “1 to 1”. For example, when the actual variation time is “the variation: 1 second, the first: 1 second, the second: 5 seconds” without maintaining “3”, the variation of the first decorative design The time is 7 seconds, which is the sum of “the change”, “the first piece”, and “the second piece”, and the change time of the first decorative symbol can be different depending on whether or not the additional holding occurs.

  In the third embodiment, while the first decorative symbol is stopped, the second main game pending content is confirmed and the variation time related to the next variation of the first decorative symbol is determined. During the stop, the effect related to the first decorative symbol may be determined. For example, when “the effect that lightning runs” is executed on the effect display device SG at the start of the change due to a certain first decorative symbol variation. In addition, while the first decorative symbol variation is stopped, the subsequent variation content of the second decorative symbol (or the variation content of the second main game symbol) is confirmed. It may be determined whether or not to execute the “running performance” again. As the “lightning run effect” continues, the degree of expectation that becomes a big hit in the first decorative symbol variation (or the main game symbol variation included in the first decorative symbol variation) related to the effect is increased. It is desirable to make it high. The timing for confirming the variation content of the second decorative symbol (or the variation content of the second main game symbol) may be changed, but when confirming the variation start timing of the first decorative symbol, In contrast to the fact that only the contents of change related to the second main game hold can be confirmed, when the change is made at the timing of the first decoration symbol change stop or at the end of the change, the first change occurred during the change period of the first decoration symbol. Since the fluctuation content of the two main game hold can also be confirmed, it is desirable that the confirmation timing is after the last stage of the fluctuation of the first decorative symbol.

(Fourth embodiment)
Here, in the above-described embodiment, the configuration in which the two decorative symbols of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are displayed on the effect display device has been described in detail. It is not limited only to the configuration of the form. Therefore, an example of such a configuration is referred to as a fourth embodiment, and only differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  In the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment, a right-handed instruction display that is a display indicating that a right-handed strike should be performed in a gaming situation in which a right-handed strike (a launch mode in which a game ball is launched toward the right side of the board surface) Right-handed display control means SM27 for controlling the display control.

  First, FIG. 75 is a main flowchart on the sub-control board S side in the fourth embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 3400 (fourth), that is, when execution of (b), which is a repetitive processing routine of the sub-main control unit SM, is started, step 3400 (fourth) The sub-control board S executes a right-handed instruction display control process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2100.

  Next, FIG. 76 is a flowchart of a right-handed instruction display control process according to the subroutine of Step 3400 (fourth) in FIG. 75 in the fourth embodiment. First, in step 3402, the right-handed display control means SM27 refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the current gaming state is a time-saving gaming state. In this example, it is determined in step 3402 whether or not it is a time-reduced gaming state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured to determine whether or not it is a state, whether or not it is a probability variation gaming state and a non-time-shortening gaming state, and the like. If “Yes” is determined in step 3402, the process proceeds to step 3406.

  In the case of No in step 3402, in step 3404, the right-handed display control means SM27 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a special game is currently being executed. In the case of Yes in step 3404, in step 3406, the right-handed display control means SM27 sets a command for displaying a right-handed instruction display on the effect display device SG, and proceeds to the next processing (step 2100 processing). Here, the upper right part of the figure is a display image diagram of a right-handed instruction display. As shown in the figure, the right-handed instruction display is displayed on the effect display device SG, and is configured to notify the player that the game should be progressed right-handed now. Since it is important for the player to recognize whether or not to make a right stroke, the right stroke instruction display is configured to increase the priority of the display priority (details will be described later). In addition, the display always displayed on the production display device SG such as a second decorative symbol and a hold display (including a first hold display and a second hold display) to be described later is a right-handed instruction display. You may comprise so that it may not overlap.

  Note that the right-handed display mode in each game state or situation may always be the same display mode even if the game state or situation (such as when a special game is being executed and when a special game is not being executed) is different. You may comprise so that a display mode may differ (for example, a magnitude | size differs) according to a state or a condition. Further, when configured so that the display mode can be different, for example, during a big hit, the display mode of the right-handed instruction display may be different depending on the open mode of the big prize opening. The right-handed instruction display during big hits with all open forms being long open is the first display pattern, which is relatively large, and the right-handed instruction display during big hits with all short-opened open forms is relatively small. The right-handed instruction display during the big hit, in which long opening and short opening are mixed as the second display pattern, and the opening mode of the big winning opening is a relatively large first display pattern in the round in which the big winning opening is long open. Thus, in a round in which the big winning opening is short-opened, the right-handed instruction display may be switched while being switched so that the second display pattern is relatively small.

In the case where the first right-handed instruction display having a relatively small display area and the second right-handed instruction display having a relatively large display area can be displayed as the right-handed instruction display, as follows. It may be configured.
(1) In a situation where right-handed is to be made (for example, a time-saving gaming state), the first right-handed instruction display is configured to be displayed. When the machine detects (for example, when three game balls have entered the first main game start opening A10 that can be entered by left-handed in the time-saving game state), the second right-handed instruction display Is displayed for a predetermined time (the first right-handed instruction display is still displayed).
(2) The first right-handed instruction display is displayed near the four corners (for example, the upper right) of the effect display device SG, and the second right-handed instruction display is displayed near the center of the effect display device SG. The display area of the first right-handed instruction display and the display area of the second right-handed instruction display do not overlap. The display area of the first right-handed instruction display may overlap with the display area of the second right-handed instruction display. In such a case, the display priority of the second right-handed instruction display is given. You may comprise so that the display priority of a 1st right-handed instruction | indication display may become higher than degree.
(3) From the higher display priority in the effect display device SG, it is “first right-handed instruction display → second right-handed instruction display → notification effect → decorating decorative pattern” (“second right-handed” For example, when the display area of the second right-handed instruction display overlaps with the display area of the decorative pattern that is changing). The second right-handed instruction display is displayed on the front (becomes visible).

Further, in the case where the display mode of the right-handed instruction display may be different depending on the gaming state and situation, the following configuration may be used.
(1) The right-handed instruction display is relatively small (for example, one arrow or the like) during the small hit execution, and the display mode is different from the case where the small hit is not executed.
(2) Probability-variable gaming state and non-time-reduced gaming state when the special game is not being executed, Non-probability changing gaming state and non-time-reduced gaming state when the special game is not being executed, and Special game being executed Is in a non-time-saving gaming state.
(3) The time shortening gaming state includes a non-stochastic variation gaming state and a time shortening gaming state, and a probability variation gaming state and a time shortening gaming state.
(4) When the special game is not being executed, the right-handed instruction display is not displayed in the non-stochastic game state and the non-time-reduced gaming state and the probability-change game state and the non-time-reduced game state. On the other hand, during the execution of the special game, a right-handed instruction display is displayed (a display for prompting left-handed is not displayed).
(5) In the time-saving gaming state, a right-handed instruction display is displayed (a display for prompting left-handed is not displayed).
(6) When the above-described first right-handed instruction display and second right-handed instruction display are configured to be displayed in the non-time-shortened gaming state or the time-shortened gaming state, The display mode of the first right-handed instruction display is different between the time-reduced gaming state, but the display mode of the second right-handed instruction display is the same.
(7) The display for prompting left-handed is a predetermined period (for example, an auxiliary game start port that is easy to enter when performing a right-handed strike in a situation that should be left-handed for a predetermined period of time after a situation in which it should be left-handed from Is displayed (predetermined period from the detection of right-handed hitting when a game ball enters the game) (not displayed after the predetermined period elapses), while the right-handed instruction display is in a situation where right-handed should be made The period in which the display is always performed or the right-handed instruction display is displayed is longer than the predetermined period.

  In the case of No in step 3404, in step 3408, the right-handed display control means SM27 sets a command for deleting the right-handed instruction display, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 2100). In step 3408, when the right-handed instruction display is not displayed, the process is not executed.

  Next, FIG. 77 is an image diagram related to the display mode and display position of decorative symbols in the fourth embodiment. In the figure, the display mode and display position of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are illustrated depending on the combination of the gaming state and the background effect. The four display examples shown in the figure all show the situation where the decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol) related to “7A”, which is the jackpot symbol on the first main game side, are stopped. ing. First, the upper left part of the figure illustrates the case where the gaming state is a non-stochastic variation gaming state and the background effect being executed is the “daytime stage”. In such a case, the display form of the first decorative symbol is “777” and the arithmetic number is displayed, and the display position is arranged in three horizontal lines. Further, the display mode of the second decorative symbol is “777”, and the display position has three numbers arranged in a horizontal line. Next, in the upper right part of the figure, the case where the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state and the background effect being executed is “daytime stage” is illustrated. In such a case, the display mode of the first decorative symbol is “777” and the Chinese numerals, and the display position is arranged in a convex shape with three numbers. Further, the display mode of the second decorative symbol is “777”, and the display position has three numbers arranged in a horizontal line. When the background effect being executed is “daytime stage”, the display color of the first decorative symbol is “black” in both cases of “777” and “777”. The display color of the second decorative symbol is “black” in both “777” and “777”.

  Next, the lower left part of the figure illustrates the case where the gaming state is a non-stochastic variation gaming state and the background effect being executed is “night stage”. In such a case, the display form of the first decorative symbol is “777”, and the display position has three numbers arranged in a diagonal line. Further, the display mode of the second decorative symbol is “777”, and the display position has three numbers arranged in a horizontal line. Next, the lower right part of the figure illustrates the case where the gaming state is a probability variation gaming state and the background effect being executed is the “night stage”. In such a case, the display pattern of the first decorative symbol is “777” and the Chinese numerals, and the display position is arranged in a concave shape with three numbers. Further, the display mode of the second decorative symbol is “777”, and the display position has three numbers arranged in a horizontal line. In addition, when the background effect being executed is “night stage”, the display color of the first decorative symbol is “white” in both cases of “777” and “777”. The display color of the second decorative symbol is “black” in both “777” and “777”.

Thus, in the figure,
(1) The display mode of the first decorative symbol is different when the gaming state is different.
(2) The display mode of the first decorative design is different when the background effect is different.
(3) The display position of the first decorative symbol is different when the gaming state is different.
(4) The display position of the first decorative symbol is different when the background effect is different.
(5) The display mode of the second decorative symbol does not differ even if the gaming state is different.
(6) The display pattern of the second decorative design does not differ even if the background effect is different.
(7) The display position of the second decorative symbol does not differ even if the gaming state is different.
(8) The display position of the second decorative design does not differ even if the background effect is different.
It is configured as follows.

  Further, in the case where the first decoration symbol is displayed in a different manner due to the difference in the background effect and the gaming state, the first decoration symbol is displayed in a pattern such as a number and a character as shown in FIG. When the display mode is configured to be combined, the display mode of the first decorative design may be configured to be different by making the pattern different. They may be different or the same). Further, the display mode may be made different depending on whether or not a picture is attached. In addition, as a configuration that can suggest the gaming state after the jackpot end when the display color of the numbers of decorative symbols is a big hit, the jackpot was started by gathering three numbers whose display color is green In this case, it is not determinable whether or not the game goes into the probability variation gaming state after the big hit, but when the big hit is started by combining three numbers whose display colors are red, For example, “3” is green and “7” is red in the non-probability variation gaming state, while the probability variation gaming state is substantially deterministic. May be configured such that “3” and “7” are red (in the probability variation gaming state, “3” has the same property as “7”). Also, the difference between the properties of green and red is that if a big win is started due to the stoppage of the green decorative design, a big hit with 8 rounds (or more than 8 rounds) is started. In other words, when the big win is started by stopping the red decorative design, it may be configured so that the number of execution rounds is 16 rounds, or the green decorative design is reached In this case, the ratio that the symbol variation is a big hit is 10%. On the other hand, when the red decorative symbol is a reach, the proportion that the symbol variation is a big hit is 50%. Good. Further, in the case of configuring the display style of the first decorative symbol to be different due to the difference in the background effect and the gaming state, the display mode is made different depending on whether or not characters are attached to the numbers of the first decorative symbol. For example, in the non-stochastic variable gaming state, “7” of the first decorative symbol is not accompanied by a character, whereas in the probability variable gaming state, “7” of the first decorative symbol is “ You may comprise so that the character of "SUPER" may be attached.

  Next, FIG. 78 is an image diagram relating to a display area of decorative symbols in the fourth embodiment. In the figure, the region where the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol can be displayed on the effect display device SG is illustrated. In the fourth embodiment, as shown in the upper left part of the figure, the first decorative symbol is variably displayed around the center of the display area SG10, and the second decorative symbol is variably displayed around the upper left of the display area SG10. It is configured to be. As the range of the display area SG10 in which the decorative design in consideration of the execution of the SP reach production or the execution of the big hit is displayed, the second decorative design is in the range as shown in the upper right part of the drawing, and the first decorative design is displayed. Is in the range shown in the lower right part of the drawing. As shown in the drawing, in the fourth embodiment, the area where the first decorative symbol can be displayed is larger than the area where the second decorative symbol can be displayed. In the fourth embodiment, the second decorative symbol is configured not to move during the variable display, while the first decorative symbol moves during the variable display (for example, the upper part of the display area SG10). Therefore, the moving range of the first decorative symbol is larger than the moving range of the second decorative symbol.

  Next, FIG. 79 is an image diagram according to a variation display period of decorative symbols in the fourth embodiment. In the figure, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the display when the SP reach effect is executed are illustrated. First, in the upper left part of the figure, since the main game symbols are changing, the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Next, in the upper right part of the figure, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are reach-displayed. Next, in the lower left part of the figure, a battle effect is executed as an SP reach effect, and during the execution of the battle effect, the player wants to pay attention to the battle effect (whether or not the result of the battle effect is a big hit) The display of the first decorative symbol is erased (hidden). On the other hand, the second decorative symbol is continuously displayed in the reach display, and when the player wants to check the status of the decorative symbol during the battle performance, the reach of the second decorative symbol is visually recognized. You can recognize that you are inside. Thereafter, the battle effect is won, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped and displayed in the jackpot symbol. As described above, during the change of the main game symbol, the display of the first decorative symbol is in a period during which the display of the first decorative symbol is erased (while the battle effect is being executed), while the display of the second decorative symbol is always displayed. The display period of the second decorative symbol is relatively longer than the symbol display period. Note that the second decorative design may be configured not to reach display even when the first decorative design is reached. Also, the second decorative design may be configured not to execute the pseudo continuous variation even when the first decorative design performs the above-described pseudo continuous variation. Further, the second decorative symbol may not always be displayed. For example, during the period in which the first decorative symbol is displayed, the second decorative symbol may be hidden or the display area SG10 may be covered as a specific effect. When such an effect with a large display area is executed, the second decorative design may be hidden (difficult to see).

  Next, FIG. 80 is an image diagram relating to a decorative design to be used in the fourth embodiment. In addition, in the same figure, it has illustrated about the structure which concerns on the display mode of the decoration symbol applicable to 4th Embodiment. First, in the upper part of the figure, the first main game symbol is fluctuating, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are fluctuatingly displayed. After that, the change of the 1st main game symbol is ended, and the first and second decorative symbols are stopped at the big hit symbol because “7A” which is the big hit symbol is stopped as the stop symbol of the first main game symbol. Will be displayed. Note that the first decorative symbol uses an arithmetic number which is a symbol common to the first main game side and the second main game side, and “777” is stopped in this example. The second decorative symbol uses an arithmetic number when the first main game symbol fluctuates, and “777” stops when “7A” stops.

  Next, in the lower part of the figure, the second main game symbol is fluctuating, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are fluctuatingly displayed. After that, the change of the 2nd main game symbol is ended, and “7B” which is a big hit symbol as a stop symbol of the second main game symbol is stopped, so that the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped at the big hit symbol. Will be displayed. Note that “777” is stopped for the first decorative symbol. On the other hand, the second decorative symbol is configured so that the alphabet is used when the second main game symbol is changed, and “AAA” is stopped when “7B” is stopped. As described above, in the first decorative symbol, the symbol used when the first main game symbol is changed is the same as the symbol used when the second main game symbol is changed (design display area and symbol design). And it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the variation of the first main gaming symbol and the variation of the second main gaming symbol only by visually recognizing the first decorative symbol). On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol, the symbol used when the first main game symbol fluctuates is different from the symbol used when the second main game symbol fluctuates. doing). The first decorative design and the second decorative design may be displayed on the same display device or may be displayed on different display devices. Further, a first hold display and a second hold display, which will be described later, may be displayed on the same display device or may be displayed on different display devices. In the case of displaying on a different display device for both the decorative design and the hold display, any display device may be a liquid crystal display device (having a plurality of liquid crystal display devices) or a liquid crystal display. It is good also as an apparatus and an LED lamp.

  Next, FIG. 81 is an image diagram according to the stop display mode of decorative symbols in the fourth embodiment. In addition, in the same figure, the structure which concerns on the display mode of the decoration symbol applicable to 4th Embodiment is illustrated similarly to FIG. First, in the upper part of the figure, the first main game symbol is fluctuating, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are fluctuatingly displayed. After that, the change of the 1st main game symbol is ended, and the first and second decorative symbols are stopped at the big hit symbol because “7A” which is the big hit symbol is stopped as the stop symbol of the first main game symbol. Will be displayed. Note that the first decorative symbol uses an arithmetic number which is a symbol common to the first main game side and the second main game side, and “777” is stopped in this example. In addition, the second decorative symbol uses arithmetic numbers, and “777” is stopped.

  Next, in the lower part of the figure, the first main game symbol is changing at a timing different from the upper part of the figure, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are variably displayed. After that, the variation of the first main game symbol is terminated, and the first decorative symbol “7A” (the same big hit symbol as the upper row in the figure) is stopped as the stop symbol of the first main game symbol. The second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol. In the first decorative symbol, the arithmetic numeral “333” is stopped, and in the second decorative symbol, the arithmetic numeral “777” is stopped. As described above, the first decorative symbol has a plurality of types of stop display modes (“777”, “333”, etc.) even when the stop symbol of the main game symbol is the same, while the second decorative symbol is When the stop symbol of the main game symbol is the same, there is only one type of stop display mode (“777”). In addition, as a specific example of the stop display mode candidate of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, first, in the case of the stop display mode that suggests that the stop display mode of the first decorative symbol is 16R big hit. Are “333” and “777”, and “111” and “555” in the case of a stop display mode that suggests a big hit of 8R (or 8R or more), and 4R (or 4R or more) In the case of the stop display mode that suggests that it is a big hit, “222”, “444”, “666”, and “888”. Further, the stop display mode of the second decorative symbol is only “333” in the case of the stop display mode that suggests that it is a big hit of 16R, and the stop that suggests that it is a big hit of 8R (or more than 8R). In the case of the display mode, only “111” is provided, and in the case of the stop display mode that suggests a big hit of 4R (or 4R or more), only “222” is provided. Further, as another specific example, a candidate for the stop display mode of the first decorative symbol that suggests the transition to the probability variation gaming state after the jackpot ends (the transition to the probability variation gaming state becomes substantially definite) , “111”, “333”, “555”, and “777”, which does not suggest transition to the probability variation gaming state after the end of the jackpot (the transition to the probability variation gaming state is not definitive) Candidates for the stop display mode of the decorative symbols are “222”, “444”, “666”, and “888”. Further, the only candidate for the stop display mode of the second decorative symbol that suggests the transition to the probability variation gaming state after the jackpot ends (the transition to the probability variation gaming state is substantially definitive) is “111”. The only candidate for the stop display mode of the second decorative symbol that does not suggest the transition to the probability variation gaming state after the end of the jackpot (the transition to the probability variation gaming state is not definite) is only “222”.

  Next, FIG. 82 is an example of display priority in the fourth embodiment. In the figure, the display contents that can be displayed on the effect display device SG are listed, and those with a high display priority are shown in the upper row and those with a low display priority are shown in the lower row. In addition, when the display content with a high display priority and the display content with a low display priority are displayed in an overlapping manner, specifically, for example, when the right-handed instruction display and the first decorative symbol are displayed in an overlapping manner. For the display of the overlapping part, the right-handed instruction display with a high display priority is displayed on the front side (front layer) (displayed so as to be visible), and the first decorative design with a low display priority is displayed. Is displayed on the back side (rear layer) (hidden in the right-handed instruction display and becomes invisible). Since the display priority in this example is high, “error display → right-handed instruction display → power-saving display → second decoration symbol → notification effect → first decoration symbol → hold display”. Although the display priority may be changed, the display priority of “error display”, “right-handed instruction display”, and “power-saving display” is greatly affected on the player's profit. That is not desirable. In addition, the order of display priority may be changed for the notice effect, the first decorative symbol, and the hold display, but any of the display priorities of the notice effect, the first decorative symbol, and the hold display is displayed for the second decorative symbol. It is preferable to configure so as to be lower than the priority. The “right-handed instruction display” is preferably displayed at a position that is not hidden by other display objects (including the accessory YK etc.), and the display content having a higher priority than the “right-handed instruction display” is newly added. In the case where it is provided, it is preferable that the area where the newly provided display content is displayed does not overlap with the area where the “right-handed instruction display” is displayed. The “power saving display” is configured not to be displayed while the symbol variation is being executed.

  Next, FIG. 83 is an image diagram relating to priority in the fourth embodiment. In the figure, the configuration relating to the decorative symbol display mode applicable to the fourth embodiment is illustrated, which is different from the configuration shown in FIG. 77 described above. First, in the upper part of the figure, the right-handed instruction display is displayed under the situation that the second main game symbol is fluctuating and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are fluctuatingly displayed (the game state is It is a time-reduced game state, and in the time-reduced game state, it is a game nature in which the game progresses by right-handed). Thereafter, the area in which the first decorative symbol is variably displayed overlaps with the area in which the right-handed instruction display is displayed, and the right-handed instruction display has a higher priority, and is therefore displayed on the front surface. Further, the second decorative symbol and the right-handed instruction display are configured so that the display areas do not overlap.

  Next, in the lower part of the figure, under the situation where the second main game symbol is fluctuating and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are variably displayed, a flock of sheep appears as a notice effect. In the notice effect, the display area overlaps with either the first decorative symbol or the second decorative symbol, and the priority is “second decorative symbol> notice effect> first decorative symbol”. When the first decorative symbol and the first decorative symbol overlap, the sheep display is displayed on the front, and when the sheep display and the second decorative symbol overlap, the second decorative symbol is displayed on the front. Become. In addition, when there are a plurality of hold display areas on the effect display device SG as in Modification 1 from the fourth embodiment described later (hold display on the first main game side and hold on the second main game side) Display area, a first hold display and a second hold display, etc.), a hold display area SG10 is newly provided in the lower left portion of the display area SG10 in FIG. Even if the right-handed instruction display and the display area SG10 are not overlapped, such as the hold display in the upper right part of the display area SG10 is the first hold display and the newly provided hold display is the second hold display). Good.

  By configuring as described above, according to the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment, it is configured such that the two decorative symbols of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are displayed on the effect display device SG, By configuring so that the second decorative symbol is displayed even when the first decorative symbol is erased, a user-friendly gaming machine that can be confirmed even when the player wants to confirm the status of the decorative symbol. In addition, even when it is desired to show an effect to a player such as an SP reach effect, by deleting the display of the first decorative symbol, the effect desired to be shown can be made more conspicuous. In addition, by configuring the display priority of the second decorative symbol to be higher than that of the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol can be used in situations where it is desired to check the status of the decorative symbol when the first decorative symbol is not displayed. Therefore, it is possible to configure so that a situation in which it is impossible to visually recognize is unlikely to occur.

  In the fourth embodiment, the first decorative symbol may be displayed as a combination of three symbols, while the second decorative symbol may be displayed as a single symbol. Also, there are four types of stop display modes for one symbol in the first decorative symbol, two types of stop display modes for one symbol in the second decorative symbol, and so on for one symbol of the first decorative symbol. You may comprise so that the number of types of a display mode may be larger than the number of types of a stop display mode for one symbol of a 2nd decoration symbol. By configuring as such, the second decorative symbol is displayed more than the probability that the stop display mode of the first decorative symbol (the display mode of the combination of the three symbols) is the same continuously over a predetermined number of symbol variations. It can be configured such that the probability that the stop display mode is continuously the same over a predetermined number of symbol variations is higher. In addition, two display areas of “○” and “×” are provided as display areas for the second decorative symbol, and “○” is lit when the symbol variation is stopped and displayed in the big hit (or small hit) symbol. It may be configured such that “x” is lit and displayed when the symbol variation is lost. In the case of such a configuration, the display of the second decorative symbol does not move on the display area SG10, and “○” or “×” blinks to notify that the symbol is changing. You may comprise. In addition, as the display area of the second decorative symbol, two display areas, a “◯” -shaped area and a “☆” -shaped area, are provided. When the first main game symbol changes, the “◯” -shaped area is displayed. The change display and stop display are executed in the area of, and when the second main game symbol changes, the change display and stop display are executed in the area of the shape of “☆”, and “○” or When “☆” blinks, it is informed that the symbol is changing. When the symbol change is stopped with the big hit (or small hit) symbol, “○” or “☆” is lit and displayed. When the fluctuation is stopped and displayed in the lost design, “○” or “☆” may be displayed in the off state. In such a configuration, in the first decorative design, the first main The symbol used when the game symbol fluctuates and the symbol used when the second main game symbol fluctuates (The display area of the symbol and the design of the symbol are the same, and it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the variation of the first main gaming symbol and the variation of the second main gaming symbol only by visually recognizing the first decorative symbol. For example, “777”). In the second decorative symbol, the symbol used when the first main game symbol fluctuates and the symbol used when the second main game symbol fluctuates (the regions for variable display and stop display differ). The design of the symbols for the variable display and the stop display are different). In addition, as described above, in the case where two display areas of the “◯” shape area and the “☆” shape area are provided as the display area of the second decorative symbol, the first main game symbol is When the big win (or small hit) symbol is stopped and displayed, “○” is lit. When the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed in the big hit (or small hit) symbol, “☆” is displayed. When the first main game symbol is stopped and displayed as a losing symbol, “○” is turned off. When the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed as a losing symbol, “☆” is displayed. If the first decoration symbol is configured to be turned off and the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed in the big hit (or small hit) symbol, “333” is displayed. ”,“ 777 ”, etc., and can be stopped and displayed in the first main game. When the handle or the second main game symbols are stopped and displayed in loss pattern, at a plurality of types of stop display mode such as "326" and "761" may be configured to be stopped and displayed. By configuring as such, the number of types of stop display modes of the second decorative symbols is stopped when the main game symbol (the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol) is a big hit (or small hit). While there is only one type of stop display mode to be obtained and there is only one type of stop display mode that can be stopped when the main game symbol (first main game symbol or second main game symbol) is lost, the first decoration There are multiple types of stop display modes that can be stopped when the main game symbol (first main game symbol or second main game symbol) is a big hit (or small hit). There are multiple types of stop display modes that can be stopped when the game symbol (first main game symbol or second main game symbol) is lost.

(Modification 1 from the fourth embodiment)
Here, in the above-described embodiment, the configuration in which the two decorative symbols of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are displayed on the effect display device has been described in detail. It is not limited only to the configuration of the form. Thus, an example of such a configuration is referred to as a first modification from the fourth embodiment, and only differences from the fourth embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 84 is a main flowchart on the sub-control board S side in Modification 1 from the fourth embodiment. The change from the fourth embodiment is step 3500 (fourth modification 1). That is, in step 2200, the sub control board S executes the decorative symbol display content determination process, and then performs step 3500 (fourth modification 1). In 1), the sub-control board S executes a decorative symbol display control process, which will be described later, and proceeds to Step 2400.

  Next, FIG. 85 is a flowchart of the hold information management process according to the subroutine of Step 2100 in FIG. 84 in Modification 1 from the fourth embodiment. Changes from the fourth embodiment are step 21118-1 (fourth modification 1) and step 21118-2 (fourth modification 1), that is, in step 2106, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 is suspended. After temporarily storing the information in the hold information temporary storage area, in step 2116, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 turns on the symbol content determination permission flag, or in step 2111, the drawing hold information display control means SM22. If the symbol variation display start instruction command from the main side has not been received, in step 21118-1 (fourth variation 1), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 displays the drawing hold counter value as the first hold display. And the same number of hold images (lamp-shaped hold display on the effect display device SG) are lit on the effect display device SG. Next, in step 21118-2 (fourth modification 1), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 displays the drawing hold counter value as a numerical value on the effect display device SG as the second hold display. The process proceeds to the process (the process of Step 2200). The display mode of the second hold display is not limited to the mode of this example, and may be displayed by a combination of lighting / flashing in an LED lamp different from the display on the effect display device SG. The hold display and the second hold display need only be different.

  Next, FIG. 86 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display control process according to the subroutine of Step 3500 (fourth modification 1) in FIG. 84 in Modification 1 from the fourth embodiment. First, in step 3502, the decorative design display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the design content determination flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 3502, in step 3504, the decoration symbol display control means SM21 turns off the symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 3506, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns on the symbol changing flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 3508, the decorative design display control means SM21 starts the drawing variation time management timer SM21t, and proceeds to step 3510. In the case of No in step 3502, the process proceeds to step 3510.

  Next, in step 3510, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the symbol changing flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 3510, in step 3512, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 confirms the timer value of the drawing variation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 3514, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines the decorative symbol change start timing based on the drawing change time management timer SM21t and the change mode temporarily stored in the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. It is determined whether it has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 3514, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a decorative symbol variable display command (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999) in step 3516. Then, the process proceeds to step 3526.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3514, in step 3518, the decoration symbol display control means SM21 decorates the decoration based on the drawing variation time management timer SM21t and the variation mode temporarily stored in the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. It is determined whether or not the symbol stop display timing (temporary stop display timing) has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 3518, in step 3520, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a decorative symbol stop display command (temporary stop display command) (the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process in step 2999). The process proceeds to step 3526.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3518, in step 3522, the notice effect display control means SM24 (and reach effect display control means SM25), the drawing change time management timer SM21t and the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b (and reach effect). Based on the fluctuation mode temporarily stored in the related information temporary storage means SM25b), it is determined whether the display timing of the preview image or the reach image has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 3522, in step 3524, the advance notice display control means SM24 (and the reach effect display control means SM25) set an image display command related to the notice image and the reach image (display command transmission control processing in step 2999). And the process proceeds to step 3526. Note that if the result is No in step 3522, the process proceeds to step 3526.

  Next, in step 3526, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the main game symbol is stopped and displayed (for example, referring to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, the main game from the main control board M side). It is determined whether or not information indicating that the symbol is stopped and displayed has been received). In the case of Yes in step 3526, in step 3528, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a decorative symbol stop display command (deterministic display command) (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999). To do). Next, in step 3530, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 stops and resets (zero clears) the drawing variation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 3532, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the symbol changing flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to the next processing (processing of step 2400). To do. In addition, also when it is No in step 3510 or step 3526, it transfers to the following process (process of step 2400).

  Next, FIG. 87 is an image diagram relating to a change in the hold display in the first modification from the fourth embodiment. First, in the upper left part of the figure, a first hold display and a second hold display corresponding to the first main game side and the second main game side are displayed. Note that the number of holdings is two on the first main game side and zero on the second main game side. In addition, the decorative symbols corresponding to the first main game side are stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the hold on the first main game side is digested and the next symbol change starts, so the first hold display on the first main game side and the second hold display on the first main game side change. (The display indicating that the number of reserves on the first main game side is two is changed to a display indicating that it is one). After that, with the same symbol variation, a hold on the first main game side occurs (a game ball enters the first main game start port A10), and the number of hold on the first main game side changes, The first hold display on the first main game side and the second hold display on the first main game side change (change from the display indicating that the number of hold on the first main game side is 1 to the display indicating that it is 2 Will be). As described above, the first hold display and the second hold display are displayed at the hold digest timing when the symbol variation is started and the hold occurrence timing when the game ball enters the main game start opening. Is configured to change.

  Next, in the middle left, a first hold display and a second hold display corresponding to the first main game side and the second main game side are displayed. Note that the number of holdings is two on the first main game side and zero on the second main game side. In addition, the decorative symbols corresponding to the first main game side are variably displayed. Thereafter, during the same change, a hold change effect (an effect in which the display mode of the hold can be changed) is executed as the hold pre-reading effect. In addition, as an effect mode of the hold change effect shown in the figure, it is an effect intended for the hold on the first main game side, and whether the display mode of the first hold display changes due to a flame on the first hold display It is a production that praises no. After that, as the effect of the hold change effect, the first hold display on the first main game side changes, while the second hold display on the first main game side does not change. Thus, when the hold pre-reading effect is executed, the hold display can be changed only in the first hold display, and the second hold display is not changed. Even when the hold change effect is executed for the hold on the second main game side, the first hold display on the second main game side may change, while the second hold display on the second main game side is changed. It is configured not to change. It is assumed that the hold prefetch effect is executed by the process exemplified in the second embodiment described above.

As shown in the figure, the characteristics of the first hold display and the second hold display are as follows.
(1) When the number of holds is the same, the display mode of the first hold display can change, while the display mode of the second hold display does not change.
(2) While the display mode of the first hold display can be changed without an increase or decrease in the number of holds (digestion of hold or occurrence of hold), the display mode of the second hold display does not change unless there is an increase or decrease in the number of holds.
(3) When an action is performed on a display related to hold as a hold change effect and an effect in which the display mode of the hold changes is executed, the hold display that is the target of the effect is the first hold display, The hold change effect is not executed for the second hold display.
The configuration is as described above.

  Next, FIG. 88 is an image diagram related to the hold display for each gaming state in the first modification from the fourth embodiment. In the same figure, the presence or absence and display mode of the first hold display and the second hold display in the non-time-reduced gaming state and the time-reduced gaming state, which can be applied in the first modification from the fourth embodiment. A configuration example is illustrated. First, in «Example 1» in the upper part of the figure, the first hold display and the second hold display are displayed in both the non-time-saving gaming state and the time-saving gaming state. The display mode of the first hold display is different between the non-time-saving game state and the time-saving game state (the first hold display related to the first main game side and the first hold display related to the second main game side) Both are different). In Example 1 in the upper part of the figure, the first hold display corresponding to the hold on the first main game side, the first hold display corresponding to the hold on the second main game side, and the first main game side The second hold display corresponding to the hold of the second and the second hold display corresponding to the hold of the second main game side are respectively displayed, that is, in the first main game side and the second main game side, The first hold display (the area where the first hold display is displayed) and the second hold display (the area where the second hold display is displayed) are not shared.

  Next, in «Example 2» in the upper part of the figure, in the non-time-reduced gaming state, the first hold display on the first main game side, the first hold display on the second main game side, and the first main game The second hold display on the side and the second hold display on the second main game side are displayed. In the time-reduced game state, the first hold display on the second main game side, the second hold display on the first main game side, and the second hold display on the second main game side are displayed. The first hold display on the first main game side is not displayed. In this way, the game is such that a right-handed game is executed in the time-reduced gaming state, the second main game symbol is changed (the game ball is inserted into the second main game start port B10), and the game proceeds. In the case of no pachinko gaming machines (especially in the case of gaming machines in which the hold on the second main game side is consumed in preference to the hold on the first main game side), the hold on the first main game side is the player. Therefore, the first hold display on the first main game side may be hidden. Even in such a configuration, it is not user-friendly if the player cannot recognize the number of holds on the first main game side, so the second hold display on the first main game side is displayed. It is configured as follows.

  Next, in «Example 3» in the upper part of the figure, in the non-time-reduced game state, the first hold display on the first main game side, the second hold display on the first main game side, and the second main game The second hold display on the side is displayed, and the first hold display on the second main game side is not displayed. In the time-reduced game state, the first hold display on the second main game side, the second hold display on the first main game side, and the second hold display on the second main game side are displayed. The first hold display on the first main game side is not displayed. In this way, the game is such that a right-handed game is executed in the time-reduced gaming state, the second main game symbol is changed (the game ball is inserted into the second main game start port B10), and the game proceeds. In the case of no pachinko gaming machines (especially in the case of gaming machines in which the hold on the second main game side is consumed in preference to the hold on the first main game side), the hold on the first main game side is the player. Therefore, the first hold display on the first main game side may be hidden. In addition, the left-handed game is executed in the non-time-reduced game state, and the game is progressed by changing the first main game symbol (by entering a game ball into the first main game start opening A10). In the case of pachinko gaming machines (especially when the second main game starting port B10 does not exist in the flow path of the game ball that has been left-handed), the hold on the second main game side is not so important for the player. The first hold display on the second main game side may be hidden. Even in such a configuration, it is not user-friendly if the player cannot recognize the number of holds on the first main game side or the number of holds on the second main game side, so the first main game The second hold display on the side and the second hold display on the second main game side are always displayed. In addition, in the same figure, although the structure which concerns on the presence or absence of a holding | maintenance display differs by the non-time shortening game state and the time shortening game state was illustrated, it is not limited to this, Non-probability variation game state and probability variation The configuration related to the presence / absence of the hold display may be different depending on the gaming state, or the configuration related to the presence / absence of the hold display may be different due to the difference in the production mode. Note that the display mode of the first hold display is different due to the difference in the gaming state shown in the above << Example 1 >>, but the display mode of the second hold display is not different. 3 >> can also be applied.

  Next, FIG. 89 is an image diagram relating to deletion of the hold display in the first modification from the fourth embodiment. First, a first hold display and a second hold display corresponding to each of the first main game side and the second main game side are displayed. In addition, the number of holdings is 2 on the first main game side and 0 on the second main game side. In addition, the decorative symbols corresponding to the first main game side are variably displayed. After that, the decorative pattern becomes reach display with the same variation, and then the battle effect is executed as the SP reach effect with the same variation. During execution of the battle effect, the first hold display is erased (hidden) from both the first main game side and the second main game side, while the second hold display is the first main game side. Any display with the second main game side is continuously displayed. Thus, in the first modification from the fourth embodiment, during the execution of the SP reach effect in which the player pays attention to whether or not the symbol variation being executed is a big hit, the display area SG10 is changed. The first hold display is erased in order to occupy (using most of the display area SG10) and execute the battle effect. Further, even in such a configuration, it is not user-friendly if the player cannot recognize the number of holds on the first main game side or the number of holds on the second main game side, so the first main game The second hold display on the side and the second hold display on the second main game side are always displayed. In the figure, the first hold display (the first hold display on the first main game side and the second hold display on the second main game side) is hidden when the SP reach is executed. Although the hold display (the second hold display on the first main game side and the second hold display on the second main game side) remains displayed, the present invention is not limited to this. The first hold display (the first hold display on the first main game side and the second hold display on the second main game side) is not displayed in the period of time or always, but the second hold display (second The second hold display on the first main game side and the second hold display on the second main game side) may remain displayed. During the execution of SP reach, the first hold display (the first hold display on the first main game side and the second hold display on the second main game side) is hidden, but the second hold display (first The configuration in which the second hold display on the main game side and the second hold display on the second main game side) remain displayed may be applied all the time during the SP reach execution period, or in the SP reach execution period. It may apply for some periods.

  With the configuration as described above, according to the gaming machine according to the first modification from the fourth embodiment, the two hold displays of the first hold display and the second hold display are displayed on the effect display device SG. With regard to the first hold display, the display mode changes to suggest the jackpot expectation degree related to the hold, or when the player wants to pay attention to the SP reach effect, the display is deleted. It is possible to enhance the interest of the game by using a display mode (display presence / absence) according to the situation and using it as a part of an effect suggesting a big hit or the like. In addition, in the second hold display, it is possible to recognize the hold number without causing any doubt when the player wants to check the current hold number by configuring the display so that it is always displayed and the display mode is not changed. It is configured as follows.

  In the first modification from the fourth embodiment, the pending digestion transmission image as exemplified in the third modification from the second embodiment may be displayed. In such a configuration, the reserved digest transmission image corresponding to the first hold display may be displayed and the reserved digest transmission image corresponding to the second hold display may not be displayed. Note that the hold display corresponding to the first hold display is a display mode in which the first hold display and the hold display mode are the same or similar, for example, the first hold display is a display of a shape of “◯”. When the display color is displayed in any one of “red”, “green”, “blue”, and “white”, the on-hold digest transmission image corresponding to the first on-hold display is also “O”. And a display color of “red”, “green”, “blue”, or “white”. It should be noted that the display mode of the first hold display immediately before the hold on the main game side corresponding to the first hold display is digested, and the display immediately after the hold on the main game side corresponding to the first hold display is digested. You may comprise so that the display aspect of a reservation digest transmission image may become the same display.

In addition, when comprised so that a pending | holding digest transmission image can be displayed, you may comprise as follows. In addition, only one may be employ | adopted for the following structures, and you may combine a some component. In addition, one or a plurality of configurations among the configuration employing only one or a combination of a plurality of constituent elements and the configuration of << Example 1 >>, << Example 2 >>, or << Example 3 >> in FIG. 88 described above And may be combined.
(1) In the non-time-reduced gaming state, the reserved digest transmission image on the first main game side can be displayed, but the reserved digest transmission image on the second main game side is not displayed.
(2) In the non-time-reduced gaming state, it is possible to display both the reserved digest transmission image on the first main game side and the reserved digest transmission image on the second main game side.
(3) In the time-reduced gaming state, the reserved digest transmission image on the second main game side can be displayed, but the reserved digest transmission image on the first main game side is not displayed.
(4) In the time-reduced gaming state, it is possible to display both the reserved digest transmission image on the first main game side and the reserved digest transmission image on the second main game side.
(5) The reserved digest transmission image can be displayed in the non-time-reduced gaming state, but the reserved digest transmission image is not displayed in the time-reduced gaming state.
(6) The ratio of displaying the reserved digest transmission image in the time shortened gaming state is higher than the ratio of displaying the reserved digest transmission image in the non-time shortening gaming state (for example, the first main game in the non-time shortening gaming state) Always display the side digestion transmission image)
(7) The display mode of the reserved digest transmission image on the first main game side in the non-time-reduced gaming state can be changed during symbol variation.
(8) The display mode of the reserved digest transmission image on the second main game side in the non-time-reduced gaming state does not change during symbol variation (when configured to display the reserved digest transmission image on the second main game side).
(9) The display mode of the reserved digest transmission image on the second main game side in the time-reduced gaming state can be changed during symbol variation. However, the retained digestion transmission image on the second main game side in the non-time-reduced gaming state changes during the symbol change than the rate at which the retained digestion transmission image on the first main game side in the non-time-reduced gaming state changes during the symbol variation. The percentage to do is lower.
(10) The display mode of the reserved digest transmission image on the first main game side in the time-reduced gaming state does not change during symbol variation (when configured to display the reserved digest transmission image on the second main game side).
(11) Unlike the above-described hold display having two hold displays such as the first hold display and the second hold display, the hold digest transmission image and the second hold digest transmission image are different from each other. There are no two reserved digest transmission images, such as images, and only one reserved digest transmission image.
(12) During SP reach or the like, the first hold display is hidden as shown in FIG. 89, but the hold digest transmission image remains displayed.
You may comprise as mentioned above. Further, in the above description, the configuration related to the display of the pending digest transmission image in the non-time-reduced gaming state and the time-reduced gaming state is described, but the “non-time-reduced gaming state and time-reduced gaming state” May be applied to “non-stochastic variation gaming state and probability variation gaming state”, or may be applied to “production mode A and production mode B”.

(Fifth embodiment)
Here, in the above-described embodiment, it is configured such that two displays of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol can be displayed on the effect display device SG as the display of the decorative symbol corresponding to one main game symbol. The configuration for simultaneously displaying the two decorative symbols on the effect display device SG is not limited to this. Therefore, an example of a configuration in which two decorative symbols are simultaneously displayed on the effect display device SG different from the configuration described above is referred to as a fifth embodiment, and only differences from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 90 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. As a difference from the second embodiment, a sorting start port unit C50 including a first main game start port A10 and a second main game start port B10 is provided. The details of the distribution start port unit C50 will be described later. As shown in the drawing, the distribution start port unit C50 is provided with a first main game start port A10 and a second main game start port B10. The game ball flowing down the left side of the game area is configured to be easily guided to one of the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10. In addition, the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area is configured to easily flow down to the vicinity of the second main game start opening electric accessory B11hd attached to the distribution start opening unit C50. In the fifth embodiment, when the auxiliary game short time flag is turned on, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11hd is configured to be easily opened. Therefore, the time saving game state (the auxiliary game short time flag is If it is ON, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11hd is released and a game ball enters the second main game start opening B10 (second main game). A game ball that has entered the distribution start port unit C50 from the vicinity of the start port electric accessory B11hd is difficult to enter the first main game start port A10 and is easy to enter the second main game start port B10. ing).

  In the fifth embodiment, as the configuration of the display region SG10 in the effect display device SG, the second decorative symbol display region SG14, which is a region where the second decorative symbol can be variably displayed, and the first decorative symbol are variably displayed. The first decorative symbol display area SG15 which is the area to be obtained, the common hold display part SG16 for displaying both the hold on the first main game side and the hold on the second main game side, and the display relating to the digested hold And a reserved passage route SG17 through which a certain reserved digest display passes. In addition, at the upper part of the effect display device SG, an accessory that is a movable object for the effect that is driven when an effect is given to the player whether or not the SP reach effect is a big hit. YK is provided.

  Next, FIG. 91 is an overall view and an operation diagram of the distribution start port unit C50 according to the fifth embodiment. First, the distribution start unit C50 is provided with a common entrance C51 into which a game ball flowing down the game area D30 can enter, and a game that is provided below the common entrance C51 and flows down from the common entrance C51. A starting port distributing member C50y (in this example, a three-legged member that tilts in the left and right directions around the support shaft) and a starting port distributing member C50y are provided below the ball to distribute the balls regularly in the left and right direction. The first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10 provided below the start port distribution member C50y. The distribution start port unit C50 configured in this way is configured to tilt the game balls that have flowed into the common entrance C51 into the left and right directions of the start port distribution member C50y, as indicated by the dotted line in the figure. Is configured to be guided to one of the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10. For example, the case where the start port distributing member C50y is tilting in the left direction is referred to as “first position”, and the case where the start port distributing member C50y is tilting in the right direction is referred to as “second position”. When “position” is set, the game ball that has flowed into the common entrance C51 is guided to the first main game start opening A10 side in a situation where the start opening distribution member C50y is the “second position”. In the situation where the start opening distribution member C50y is displaced to the “first position” and the start opening distribution member C50y is the “first position”, the game balls flowing into the common entrance C51 are the second main While being guided to the game start port B10 side, the start port distribution member C50y is displaced to the “second position”. In this example, the tilting operation in the left-right direction of the start opening distributing member C50y is performed by the weight of the game ball. As a result, on the mechanism, the game ball flowing into the common entrance C51 is , Game balls are alternately distributed to either one of the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10 (after distributing one game ball to either one, 1 to the other It is designed with the intention of repeating the action of distributing individual game balls. In the fifth embodiment, the parallel lottery can be executed, and the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol can be changed at the same time. The hold on the first main game side and the hold on the second main game side can be generated substantially evenly, and can be frequently changed simultaneously with the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol. Has been.

  Next, FIG. 92 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of Step 1400 (fifth) of FIG. 5 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 1400 (1) (fifth), the game content determination means MN executes a first main game symbol display process, which will be described later. Next, at step 1400 (2) (fifth), the game content determination means MN executes a second main game symbol display process, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1500). With this configuration, the second main game side can start to change even when the first main game side changes, and the first main game side also changes when the second main game side changes. Can start (so-called parallel lottery).

  Next, FIG. 93 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} of FIG. 92 in the fifth embodiment. In addition, since this process is substantially the same process on the first main game symbol side and the second main game symbol side, the first main game symbol side will be mainly described, and the processing on the second main game symbol side will be described. Use parentheses. First, at step 1407-1, the game content determination means MN determines whether or not the first (second) variation start condition is satisfied. The change start condition is not during a special game (or during operation of the condition device), and is not changing the first main game symbol (in the case of processing on the second main game symbol side, the second main game symbol is not changing). ), And there is a reservation for the main game symbol and it is not in the small hit game. That is, since the parallel lottery can be executed, when the process related to the first main game symbol is executed, there is no problem even if the second main game symbol fluctuates, but the first main game symbol is fluctuating. If there is, the variation start condition related to the first main game side is not satisfied.

  Next, at step 1407-2, the game content determination means MN reads the main game side random number. Next, in step 1407-3, the game content determination means MN deletes the read main game side random number from the hold information and shifts (holds up) the remaining hold information. Next, in step 1407-4, the game content determination means MN executes a main game symbol determination lottery based on the main game side random number and the game state. Next, in step 1407-5, the game content determination means MN determines stop symbols related to the main game symbols based on the main game side random numbers and the result of lottery determination, and temporarily stores them in the RAM area. Next, at step 1407-6, the game content determination means MN, based on the main game symbol determination lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the variation mode lottery random number). The variation mode of the main game symbol is determined and temporarily stored in these RAM areas. Next, in step 1407-7, the game content determination means MN determines information related to the determined main game symbol and game state information (a command to the sub-control board S side, such as a symbol variation display start instruction command). Set. Next, in Step 1407-8, the game content determination means MN determines a predetermined time related to the variation time of the main game symbol based on the variation mode as a first main game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C1 (second main game). The symbol variation management timer MP11t-C2) is set and the timer is started. Next, in step 1407-9, the game content determination means MN performs the first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol display) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). Part B21g) starts the variable display of the first main game symbol (second main game symbol). Next, in Step 1407-10, the game content determination means MN turns on the first (second) changing flag, and proceeds to Step 1407-12. On the other hand, if No in Step 1407-1, the game content determination means MN determines in Step 1407-11 whether or not the first (second) changing flag is on. If Yes in step 1407-11, the process proceeds to step 1407-12.

  Next, in step 1407-12, the game content determination means MN determines whether or not a predetermined time related to the variation time of the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1407-12, in step 1407-13, the game content determination means MN determines the first main game symbol display unit A21g of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). The variation display of the main game symbol on the second main game symbol display unit B21g) is stopped, the display control is performed as the fixed stop symbol, and the process proceeds to Step 1407-17. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1407-12, in step 1407-14, the game content determination means MN determines whether or not the special game execution flag is on. In the case of Yes in Step 1407-14, in Step 1407-15, the game content determination means MN is the first (second) forced stop execution command (command to the sub side, and the first main game side has won a big hit In this case, the second main game symbol is sent information that forcibly stops due to a loss, and if the second main game side is a big hit, the first main game symbol is a command that sends information that is forcibly stopped due to a loss. (Sent to the sub-main control unit SM by the control command transmission process in step 1999). Next, at step 1407-16, the game content determination means MN first displays the first main game symbol display part A21g (second main game symbol display) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). The change display of the main game symbol on the part B21g) is stopped with the stop symbol as a lost symbol, the display of the lost symbol is controlled as a fixed stop symbol, and the process proceeds to Step 1407-17. As described above, in the fifth embodiment, when the first main game symbol stops at the big hit symbol, the changing second main game symbol is forcibly stopped by losing, and the second main game symbol hits the big hit symbol. When stopped by a symbol, the changing first main game symbol is configured to forcibly stop due to a loss. In addition, when the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol is forcibly stopped due to a loss, a command to forcibly stop the sub-control board S is set immediately before the forced stop. (The effect when the sub-control board S side receives the command will be described later).

  Next, in step 1407-17, the game content determination means MN stores the information (symbol confirmation display instruction command) to the effect that the symbol variation is finished in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub main control unit SM side. Set (sent to the sub-main control unit SM by the control command transmission process in step 1999). Next, at step 1407-18, the game content determination means MN turns off the first (second) changing flag, and proceeds to step 1407-19. Next, in step 1407-19, the game content determination means MN determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1407-19, in step 1407-20, the game content determination means MN turns on the condition device operation flag, and proceeds to step 1450. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1407-19, the process proceeds to step 1450 without executing the processing in step 1407-20.

  Next, in step 1450, the game content determination means MN executes the above-described specific game end determination process, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1500). In addition, also when it is No in step 1407-11 or step 1407-14, it transfers to the following process (process of step 1500).

  Next, FIGS. 94 and 95 are used when determining the variation mode of the main game table 3 and the second main game symbol used when determining the variation mode of the first main game symbol in the fifth embodiment. The main game table 3 to be played. Since the contents of the table are the same as those in the second embodiment, description thereof is omitted. The contents of the effect corresponding to the determined variation mode of the main game symbol will be described later.

  Next, FIG. 96 is a main flowchart on the sub-control board S side in the fifth embodiment. The difference from the second embodiment is step 2050 (fifth), step 2200 (fifth), step 2350 (fifth), step 2500 (fifth) and step 3300 (fifth), that is, sub When the execution of (b), which is a repetitive processing routine of the main control unit SM, is started, in step 2050 (fifth), the sub control board S executes a symbol standby display control process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2100. Transition. Further, after the sub control board S executes the hold information management process in step 2100, in step 2200 (fifth), the sub control board S executes a decorative symbol display content determination process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2300. To do. Further, after the sub control board S executes the first decorative symbol display control process in step 2300, in step 2350 (fifth), the sub control board S executes a second decorative symbol display control process, which will be described later. Control goes to step 2400. In addition, after the sub control board S executes the special game related display control process in Step 2400, in Step 2500 (fifth), the sub control board S executes a background effect control process described later. Next, in step 3300 (fifth), the sub control board S executes an accessory driving control process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2999.

  Next, FIG. 97 is a flowchart of the symbol standby display control process according to the subroutine of Step 2050 (fifth) in FIG. 96 in the fifth embodiment. First, the decoration symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b and displays a standby preparation flag (both the first decoration symbol and the second decoration symbol are stopped). It is determined whether or not a flag that can be turned on) is off. In the case of Yes in step 2052, in step 2054, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 newly displays both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol (the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed). Whether the second decorative symbol is newly stopped in the situation, or the first decorative symbol is newly stopped in the situation where the second decorative symbol is stopped) judge. In the case of Yes in step 2054, in step 2056, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 displays the standby preparation measurement timer SM28t (increment timer, both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped and displayed. Timer to measure the elapsed time since then). Next, in step 2058, the decorative design display control means SM21 turns on the standby preparation flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to step 2060. Note that the process also proceeds to step 2060 even in the case of No in step 2052.

  Next, in step 2060, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the standby preparation measurement timer SM28t, and the timer value sets the standby execution value (the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the main area is in the standby state). It is a timer value, and in this example, it is determined whether or not 20 seconds) or more. In the case of Yes in step 2060, in step 2062, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 displays the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the main area in a standby state. Note that the standby state is ended when either the first decorative symbol or the second decorative symbol starts the variable display. Here, the right part of the figure is a decorative symbol display area image diagram. In the fifth embodiment, in the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG, the first decorative symbol corresponding to the first main game symbol and the decorative symbol corresponding to the second main game symbol are the second. The decorative design can be displayed in a variable manner at the same time, one of which is displayed in the main area, and the other is displayed in the sub area. The main area is configured so that the area that can be displayed is larger than the sub area. In the fifth embodiment, the decorative design displayed in the main area is displayed with a pattern and a number, and the decorative design displayed in the sub-region is displayed with only a number (numbers). (The first decorative symbol is an arithmetic numeral, and the second decorative symbol is a Chinese numeral). Also, as illustrated in the figure, both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped and displayed in a state where the first decorative symbol is displayed as a pattern and a number in the main area. After 20 seconds have elapsed, the display of the first decorative design in the main area is configured to display only the design. This display of only the pattern is referred to as a standby state. The main area and the sub area may be provided in the same liquid crystal (for example, in the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG) or may be provided in separate devices. In addition, as a specific example provided in a separate device, for example, an effect display device A and an effect display device B are provided as effect display devices, the effect display device A has a main area, and the effect display device B is The display area of the effect display device B may be smaller than the size of the display area of the effect display device A. Good. Further, the number of effect display devices and the number of decorative symbol display areas (main area, sub area, etc.) may be three or more (such as providing a first area, a second area, and a third area).

  Returning to the description of the flowchart, in step 2064, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 resets and stops the standby preparation measurement timer SM28t. Next, in step 2066, the decorative design display control means SM21 turns off the standby preparation flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2100). . In addition, also when it is No in step 2054 or step 2060, it transfers to the next process (process of step 2100).

  Next, FIG. 98 is a decorative symbol display mode image diagram in the fifth embodiment. As shown in the figure, the decoration pattern displayed in the main area is displayed with a pattern and a number, and the decoration pattern displayed in the sub area is displayed only with a number. The number display in the design is an arithmetic number, and the number display in the second decorative design is a Chinese number. The number of types of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol is four each. Although details will be described later, the decoration pattern display mode when there is a trigger hold that is a hold related to whether or not the pre-reading effect is executed is the first sub-region symbol table or the second sub-region symbol table In other words, the display mode of the first decorative symbol and the display mode of the second decorative symbol in the sub-region, and the display mode of the first decorative symbol when there is a trigger hold And the display mode of the second decorative design is the same.

  Next, FIG. 99 shows the hold information management process according to the subroutine of step 2100 of FIG. 96 in the fifth embodiment. The difference from the second embodiment is step 2130 (fifth) to step 2138 (fifth) and step 3050 (fifth), that is, in step 2128 (second), the drawing hold information display control means. After SM22 deletes the hold information and shifts the remaining hold information, in step 2130 (fifth), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 holds the hold that is digested this time on the first main game side. It is determined whether or not there is. In the case of Yes in step 2130 (fifth), in step 2134 (fifth), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 passes the hold display that is variably displayed in the main area in the hold route. This command sets a command for executing a reserved digest display (an effect that allows the player to recognize that the reserve has been digested) that passes through this area, which will be described in detail later), and proceeds to step 2138 (fifth). On the other hand, if No in step 2130 (fifth), in step 2132 (fifth), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 determines whether or not the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are not in a standby state. To do. In the case of Yes in step 2132 (fifth), in step 2136 (fifth), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 is an area through which the hold display that is variably displayed in the sub area in the hold passage route passes. The command for executing the pending digest display that passes through (details will be described later) is set, and the process proceeds to step 2138 (fifth). In addition, when No is determined in step 2132 (fifth), the process proceeds to step 2134 (fifth). As described above, in the fifth embodiment, it is the first main game side hold digest display, or the hold is digested in the standby state. When the hold on the second main game side is digested in a state that is not in a state, the hold digest display is executed in the sub route.

  Next, in step 2138 (fifth), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 determines whether there is a trigger hold in the hold. In the case of Yes in step 2138 (fifth), in step 3050 (fifth), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 executes a hold change display control process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2116. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2138 (fifth), the CPUSC of the sub control board S proceeds to step 2116 without executing the process of step 3050 (fifth).

  Next, FIG. 100 is a flowchart of the hold change display control process according to the subroutine of Step 3050 (fifth) of FIG. 99 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 3052, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 determines whether or not the suspension suspension is suspension suspension that passes through the first main route after the trigger suspension occurs. In the case of Yes in step 3052, in step 3054, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 determines whether or not the trigger hold is a big hit. In the case of Yes in step 3054, in step 3056, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the hold change scenario determination table for the big hit, and based on the number of hold on occurrence of the trigger hold, the hold change scenario (trigger hold) (Scenario for determining how and when the hold display mode related to the trigger hold changes at what timing before the symbol variation is started).

  Here, in the lower part of the figure, a table for big hit and a table for lose are shown as the pending change scenario determination table. As shown in the figure, the hold change scenario is related to the number of holds at the time of trigger hold occurrence (the number of holds that will be digested before the trigger hold at the time when the trigger hold occurs) and the trigger hold. It is determined by the result of the symbol variation. Also, “1 change before” shown in the figure is the hold display mode immediately before the trigger hold is consumed, and the big hit expectation degree of the hold display mode of “1 change before” (when the trigger hold is a big hit) The ratio of the case of jackpot to the total of the case of losing and losing is “rainbow color → red → blue”. In addition, the hold display mode is configured to be changed for each symbol change, but as the hold of the trigger is approaching, the hold display mode does not change or changes to a display mode with high expectation of jackpot. It is configured to go. That is, it is configured not to change to a hold display mode having a low jackpot expectation as the trigger hold is exhausted, and is configured not to impair the player's expectation for the trigger hold.

  Returning to the description of the flowchart, in step 3058, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the reserved passing route display color determination table for the big hit time, determines the display color of the reserved passing route, and performs the following processing ( The process proceeds to step 2116. If NO in step 3054, in step 3060, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the hold change scenario determination table for lost time, and determines the hold change scenario based on the number of hold when trigger hold occurs. To do. Next, in step 3062, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the hold passage route display color determination table for lost time, determines the display color of the hold passage route, and performs the next processing (step 2116 processing). ). In the case of No in step 3052, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2116).

  Here, in the lower part of the figure, a table for big hit and a table for lose are shown as the reserved passage route display color determination table. As shown in the figure, the display color of the reserved passage route is determined based on the result of the symbol variation related to the reserved trigger. Expected big hit expectation of the route display color of the hold pass (the ratio of the big hit when the trigger hold is a big hit and the case of the loss) is “rainbow color → red → blue → no change” It has become. The hold passage route is determined only by the first hold digest timing after the trigger hold occurs, but is not limited to this, and is configured so that it can change every time the trigger hold is digested. May be. In the case of such a configuration, it is preferable that the display is not changed to a display mode with a low jackpot expectation as the trigger hold is approached, similar to the above-described change of the hold display mode (holding change effect). . In addition, regarding the change of the display mode of the hold display mode and the hold passage route display color, it is not specifically shown at which timing of the symbol change, but the notice effect during the symbol change at the start of the symbol change The display mode may be changed at various timings according to the performance to be executed, such as the execution timing, the on-hold occurrence, the on-hold digestion, etc., so that the player can always It can be expected that the hold display mode or the hold passage route display color changes to a display mode with a high jackpot expectation. In the fifth embodiment, the expected hold big hit expectation is suggested by the hold passing route display color which is the display color of the hold passing route SG17 (the trigger hold is lost when the trigger hold becomes a big hit). The reserved passage route display color is more likely to change than the case, or the reserved passage route display color is likely to be a display color with a high expectation level for big hits). If the display has a display mode of the reserved digest transmission image, and the display mode is configured so as to be able to suggest the jackpot expectation degree of the symbol variation related to the reserved digest transmission image, The display mode of the reserved digest transmission image may be different, that is, the expectation of jackpot suggested by the reserved digest transmission image may be different. Change easiness of the display mode of the image may be configured to differ. Further, depending on the display color of the reserved passage route, the contents of the effect of the symbol variation related to the digested reservation that has passed through the reserved passage route SG17 may be different (the ratio at which the effect having a high jackpot expectation is executed may be different). May be.

  Next, FIG. 101 is a hold occurrence display image diagram in the fifth embodiment. In the fifth embodiment, since the parallel lottery can be executed, a situation in which a hold on the first main game side and a hold on the second main game side exist at the same time frequently occurs. However, the hold display is configured to be displayed on the common hold display portion SG16 common to the hold on the first main game side and the hold on the second main game side. In addition, in the order of the numbers “1 → 2 → 3... → 8” shown in the same figure, whether or not the generated hold is a hold on the first main game side or a hold on the second main game side. The common hold display part SG16 is configured to display the hold in the order in which they occurred (the most recently generated hold is displayed in the first area, and the already displayed hold display is “1 → 2”. ”Will be displayed as a shift). In addition, the hold display mode is the same display mode for the hold display on the first main game side and the hold display on the second main game side, and the first main game only by visually recognizing the common hold display part SG16. It is configured so that it cannot be determined whether the display is the hold display on the side or the hold display on the second main game side.

  Next, FIG. 102 is a reserved digest display image diagram in the fifth embodiment. First, in the upper part of the figure, an example of the display in the common hold display part SG16 when the number of holds is 4 is illustrated. As shown in the figure, two holds on the first main game side and two holds on the second main game side are displayed, and “A1”, which is the first main game side hold, “B1”, which is the hold on the second main game side in No. 2, “A2” which is the hold on the first main game side, “B2”, which is the hold on the second main game side in No. 4, is displayed Has been. Under such circumstances, the hold display when the hold has been consumed will be described in detail below.

  The middle part of the figure is an example of the order of symbol variation related to the above-described four suspensions, and the lower part of the figure is an example of the state where the suspension display is erased in the common suspension display part SG16. With reference to these drawings, a detailed description will be given of how the symbol display in the fifth embodiment is executed and the hold display is erased. First, when the symbol variation related to A1 which is the hold on the first main game side starts to be executed, the hold display of the first area which is the hold display related to A1 is erased, and the remaining hold is shifted and displayed. The The display in the common hold display section SG16 is “No. 1: B1, No. 2: A2, No. 3: B2.” Although not shown, it is assumed that the symbol variation on the second main game side is executed at the symbol variation start timing related to A1. After 10 seconds, the symbol variation related to B1, which is the hold on the second main game side, starts to be executed. The display in the common hold display part SG16 is “No. 1: A2, No. 2: B2.” Thereafter, the symbol variation related to B1 ends 20 seconds after the symbol variation start related to A1. In addition, the symbol fluctuation | variation which concerns on A1 is changing. When the symbol fluctuation related to B1 is completed, the hold related to B2 is digested and the symbol fluctuation is started. However, in the display in the common hold display part SG16, the hold display related to “A2” is displayed. The reserved display in the first area is erased. That is, in appearance, the display in the first area is turned off from the state in which the first and second areas in the common reserved display section SG16 are lit, and then the display in the second area is the first area. Will be shifted. On the other hand, since the actually reserved hold is the hold related to “B2”, the display in the first area is the hold display related to “A2”. As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the hold display displayed in the first area is irrespective of whether the hold actually digested is the first main game side or the second main game side. It will be erased (turned off).

  Next, FIG. 103 is a reserved passage route image diagram in the fifth embodiment. First, in the fifth embodiment, the reserved passage route SG17 is displayed on the upper right side of the display area SG10. The hold passage route has a main route that is a region through which a hold display that is variably displayed in the main region passes, and a sub route that is a region through which the hold display that is variably displayed in the sub region passes. First, the left part of the figure is an example of a case in which the reservation digest display when the reservation is digested passes through the main route. In a situation that is not in the standby state, the hold on the first main game side is “A1” (displayed in the first area), and the hold on the second main game side is “B1” (displayed in the second area). The case where “A1”, which is the hold on the first main game side, is digested first will be described. First, when “A1” is digested, the hold display in the first area is erased, and the hold digest display moves toward the hold passing route SG17. After that, since the symbol variation on the first main game side related to the hold of “A1” is executed in the main area, the hold-up display related to “A1” goes to the main area through the main route. Become. Next, the right part of the figure is an example of the case where the hold digest display when the hold is digested passes through the sub route. In a situation that is not in the standby state, the hold on the first main game side is “A1” (displayed in the first area), and the hold on the second main game side is “B1” (displayed in the second area). The case where “B1” which is the hold on the second main game side is digested first will be described. First, when “B1” is digested, the hold display in the first area is erased, and the hold digest display moves toward the hold passing route SG17. Thereafter, since the symbol variation on the second main game side related to the hold of “B1” is executed in the sub-region, the hold-up display related to “B1” goes to the sub-region through the sub-route. . Thus, in the fifth embodiment, the sub route in which the reserved digest display in the reserved passage route SG17 is the main route depends on whether the symbol variation is executed in the main region or the sub region. Is configured to be determined.

  Next, FIG. 104 is a flowchart of a first main game winning prefetch determination process according to the subroutine of step 2550 (second) in FIG. 99 in the fifth embodiment. The difference from the second embodiment is that step 2552 and step 2578 are deleted, that is, in the fifth embodiment, the first main game even when there is a hold on the second main game side. It is comprised so that the prefetch effect which concerns on the side hold | maintain can be performed. In this example, the pre-reading effect on the first main game side is configured to be executed only in the non-time-saving game state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pre-reading effect is executed in the time-saving game state. You may comprise so that it can do. In addition, the pre-drawing lottery on the first main game side can be executed only at the time of winning, that is, at the time of holding occurrence, but is not limited to this, and the start timing of the main game symbol change and the change of the main game symbol You may comprise so that prefetch lottery can be performed also in the middle of a timing.

  Next, FIG. 105 is a flowchart of the second main game winning prefetch determination process according to the subroutine of Step 2600 (second) in FIG. 99 in the fifth embodiment. Differences from the second embodiment are step 2602 (fifth), step 2610 (fifth), and step 2616 (fifth). That is, in step 2602 (fifth), a hold-prefetch effect execution possibility determination unit. The SM 26k refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the current time-reduced gaming state. If Yes in step 2602 (fifth), the process proceeds to step 2604. If No in step 2602 (fifth), the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2118).

  If the hold pre-reading effect execution availability determination means SM26 determines in step 2608 that the new hold is a big hit hold, in step 2610 (fifth), the hold pre-reading effect execution availability determination means SM26k has a predetermined probability. The winning-ahead look-ahead lottery for winning in (in this example, 1/3) is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2620. In addition, when the hold prefetch effect execution possibility determination means SM26 determines in step 2612 that the new hold is the hold of the group C, in step 2616 (fifth), the hold prefetch effect execution possibility determination means SM26k has a predetermined probability. The winning-ahead look-ahead lottery for winning at 1/10 in this example is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2620. As described above, the fifth embodiment is configured such that the pre-reading effect relating to the hold on the second main game side can be executed even when the hold on the first main game side exists. In this example, the pre-reading effect on the second main game side is configured to be executed only in the non-time-saving game state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pre-reading effect is executed in the time-saving game state. You may comprise so that it can do. In addition, the pre-drawing lottery on the second main game side can be executed only at the time of winning a prize, that is, at the time of holding occurrence. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the start timing of the main game symbol change or the main game symbol change You may comprise so that prefetch lottery can be performed also in the middle of a timing. In step 2610 (fifth) and step 2616 (fifth), the winning rate is the same as the pre-read lottery winning rate on the first main game side.

  Next, FIG. 106 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display content determination processing according to the subroutine of Step 2200 (fifth) in FIG. 96 in the fifth embodiment. First, at step 2249-1, the drawing display content determination means SM21n refers to the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the symbol content determination permission flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2249-1, in step 2249-2, the drawing display content determination means SM21n turns off the symbol content determination permission flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2249-3, the drawing display content determination means SM21n determines whether or not there is a trigger hold in the hold. In the case of Yes in step 2249-3, in step 2249-5, the drawing display content determination means SM21n determines whether or not the newly digested hold is a hold related to the first main game side. In the case of Yes in step 2249-5, in step 2249-6, the drawing display content determination means SM21n determines the display area of the decorative symbols as the main area. Next, in step 2249-7, the figure display content determination means SM21n refers to the first main area symbol table (see FIG. 98) based on the information about the stop symbol and the variation mode of the first main game symbol, 1. Decide the stop pattern and variation mode of a decorative pattern. Next, in step 2249-8, the drawing display content determination means SM21n determines whether the first symbol content determination flag (the first main game side changes in symbols) in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. The flag that is turned on when such a content is determined is turned on, and the process proceeds to step 3350 (fifth).

  Also, in the case of No in step 2249-5, in step 2249-10, the figure display content determination means SM21n determines whether or not the symbol variation related to the newly digested hold is a symbol variation from the standby state. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2249-10, in step 2249-11, the drawing display content determination means SM21n determines the display area of the decorative symbols as the main area. Next, in step 2249-12, the figure display content determination means SM21n refers to the second main area symbol table (see FIG. 98) based on the information regarding the stop symbol and the variation mode of the second main game symbol, 2. Decide the stop symbol and variation mode of the decorative symbol, and go to Step 2249-15. As described above, when the decorative symbol newly starts to change from the standby state, the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the main area regardless of whether the decorative symbol is the first decorative symbol or the second decorative symbol. It is configured as follows. In addition, when the decorative design newly started to change from the standby state is the second decorative design, and the first decorative design starts to change during the change of the second decorative design, the first decorative design changes. Until now, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the main area, but when the first decorative symbol starts to change, the first decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the main region and the second decorative symbol is displayed in the sub-region. The first decorative symbol may be displayed in a variable manner, or even if the first decorative symbol starts to change, the second decorative symbol is continuously displayed in the main region, and the first decorative symbol is displayed in the sub region. You may comprise so that a fluctuation display may be carried out. Note that, as described above, since the decorative symbol newly started to change from the standby state is the second decorative symbol, when the second decorative symbol is variably displayed in the main area, the display of the second decorative symbol is The display of the first decorative design and the design in the main area is the same, and the display of numbers is different (the first decorative design is an arithmetic number, and the second decorative design is a Chinese numeral).

  If NO in step 2249-10, in step 2249-13, the drawing display content determination means SM21n determines the display area of the decorative symbols as a sub area. Next, in step 2249-14, the drawing display content determination means SM21n refers to the second sub-region symbol table (see FIG. 98) based on the information about the stop symbol and the variation aspect of the second main game symbol, (2) Determine the stop pattern and variation mode of the decorative pattern. Next, in step 3100 (fifth), the drawing display content determination means SM21n executes a main area interruption process A, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2249-15. Next, in step 2249-15, the drawing display content determination means SM21n determines whether or not the second symbol content determination flag (design change on the second main game side) is in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. The flag that is turned on when such a content is determined is turned on, and the process proceeds to step 3350 (fifth).

  Next, in step 3350 (fifth), the drawing display content determination means SM21n executes an effect content determination process, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2300). If No in step 2249-3, in step 3150 (fifth), a pre-read display control process described later is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2300). Even in the case of No in step 2249-1, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in step 2300). In the fifth embodiment, when the second main game symbol starts to fluctuate in the standby state, the second decorative symbol corresponding to the second main game symbol is variably displayed in the main area. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in situations other than when the interrupting effect is executed, the first decorative symbol corresponding to the first main game symbol is always displayed in a variable manner in the main area (even in the standby state). The second decoration symbol corresponding to the second main game symbol may be variably displayed in the sub-region.

  Next, FIG. 107 is a flowchart of effect display content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 3350 (fifth) in FIG. 106 in the fifth embodiment. First, at step 3352, the notice effect display content determination means SM24n executes reading of the result of lottery determination relating to the symbol variation based on the command received from the main control board M side. Next, in step 3354, the notice effect display content determination means SM24n determines whether or not the symbol variation is a symbol variation on the first main game side. In the case of Yes in step 3354, in step 3356, the notice effect display content determination means SM24n refers to the first decorative symbol effect content determination table based on the result of the lottery result and the variation pattern of the first decorative symbol, and changes the symbol variation. The content of the production is determined. Next, in step 3358, the notice effect display content determination means SM24n determines and temporarily stores the first half priority and the second half priority of the symbol change based on the determined effect content related to the symbol change. The process proceeds to (Step 2300). The first half priority and the second half priority will be described later. In the case of No in step 3354, in other words, when the symbol variation is the symbol variation on the second main game side, in step 3360, the notice effect display content determination means SM24n determines whether the lottery result and the second decorative symbol are the same. Based on the variation mode, the second decorative symbol effect content determination table is referred to determine the effect content related to the symbol variation. Next, in step 3362, the notice effect display content determining means SM24n determines and temporarily stores the priority of the symbol variation based on the determined effect content related to the symbol variation, and performs the next process (the process of step 2300). ). The priority will be described later.

  Next, FIG. 108 is an example of a first decorative design effect content determination table in the fifth embodiment. As shown in the figure, the content of the effect related to the first decorative symbol is determined to be determined by the result of the first main game symbol and the variation time (variation mode). The first half priority and the second half priority, which are elements that determine whether or not the performance is executed, are determined. It should be noted that the priority is greater in the case where the result is a big hit than in the case of loss. Further, the priority is relatively higher when the variation time is longer than when the variation time is shorter. The first half priority is a priority related to the period before the start of execution of the SP reach production (super reach production) in the design variation, and the second half priority is a priority related to the period after the start of execution of the SP reach production. Thus, the symbol variation (effect contents) in which the SP reach effect is not executed is configured to have the first half priority but not the second half priority. The priority is any number from “0” to “3”.

  Next, FIG. 109 is an example of a second decorative symbol effect content determination table in the fifth embodiment. As shown in the figure, the effect content related to the second decorative symbol is determined based on the result of the second main game symbol and the variation time (variation mode). The priority which is an element which determines the execution presence or absence of production is determined. Note that, unlike the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol does not have two priorities of the first half priority and the second half priority, and has only one priority. It should be noted that the priority is greater in the case where the result is a big hit than in the case of loss. Further, the priority is relatively higher when the variation time is longer than when the variation time is shorter. The priority is any number from “0” to “3”.

  Next, FIG. 110 is a flowchart of main area interrupt processing A according to the subroutine of step 3100 (fifth) in FIG. 106 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 3102, the notice effect display content determination means SM24n confirms the priority of the second decorative symbol related to the symbol variation. Next, in step 3104, the notice effect display content determination means SM24n determines whether the priority of the second decorative symbol is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (2 in this example). In the case of Yes in step 3104, in step 3106, the notice effect display content determining means SM24n determines that the interruptable flag (designed variation of the determined second decorative design is in the flag area of the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b). The flag (which is turned on when the change is such that the interruption effect can be executed) is turned on. Next, in step 3108, the notice effect display content determination means SM24n determines whether or not the accessory YK is stopped at the initial position. In the case of Yes in step 3108, in step 3110, the notice effect display content determination means SM24n directs the accessory initialization flag (the accessory YK to the initial position) in the flag area of the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. The operation flag is turned on, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2249-15). In addition, also when it is No in step 3104 or step 3108, it transfers to the following process (process of step 2249-15). As described above, in the fifth embodiment, after it is determined that the second decorative symbol is variably displayed in the sub region, the symbol variation of the second decorative symbol is interrupted (variably displayed in the sub region). It is configured to determine whether or not it is a change that can execute the effect of switching the display area of the decorative symbol and the decorative symbol variably displayed in the main area. If it is determined that the second decorative symbol can be interrupted, the position of the accessory YK is checked. If the accessory YK is active, the accessory YK is driven to the initial position. It is comprised so that it may control. By configuring in this way, the details will be described later, but at the timing of executing the interrupting effect (the first timing among the plurality), the proportion of the accessory YK stopped at the initial position is increased. be able to.

  Next, FIG. 111 is a flowchart of prefetch display control processing according to the subroutine of step 3150 (fifth) in FIG. 106 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 3152, the drawing display content determination means SM21n determines whether or not the newly digested hold is a hold related to the first main game side. In the case of Yes in step 3152, in step 3154, the drawing display content determination means SM21n determines whether or not the newly digested hold is a trigger hold. In the case of Yes in step 3154, in step 3156, the drawing display content determination means SM21n determines the display area of the decorative symbols as the pre-read first area, and proceeds to step 3158. Here, in the fifth embodiment, during the pre-reading effect execution (from the start of the first symbol variation after the trigger suspension exists until the symbol variation related to the trigger suspension ends), the first decoration The display area of the symbol and the second decorative symbol is configured to change, and the first decorative symbol is variably displayed in the lower left portion of the display region SG10 as in the pre-reading effect display device image in the lower part of the same figure. 1 area is provided, and a pre-read second area in which the second decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner is provided in the lower right part of the display area SG10. Has been. Moreover, the display mode of a 1st decoration symbol and a 2nd decoration symbol is comprised so that it may display only with a number similarly to the case where it displays in a sub area | region. As described above, in the case where two effect display devices are provided, two decorative designs (first display) are provided on any one of the effect display devices (for example, the effect display device having a larger display area). You may comprise so that a decoration display and a 2nd decoration design) may be variably displayed (or stopped display).

  Returning to the description of the flowchart, in the case of No in step 3154, in step 3158, the drawing display content determination means SM21n determines the display area of the decorative design as “pre-read first area → SP reach expansion”, step 3158. Migrate to Thus, in the fifth embodiment, at the time of symbol variation execution related to trigger hold during execution of prefetching effects, the variation of the decorative symbol related to trigger hold is enlarged and displayed at the center of the display area SG10. The production is configured to be performed. Note that the decorative pattern that is not displayed in an enlarged manner (for example, the second decorative design when the first decorative design is displayed in an enlarged manner) is variably displayed at a position that does not overlap the display area of the enlarged decorative design. Just do it. Next, in step 3158, the figure display content determination means SM21n refers to the first sub-region symbol table based on the information on the stop symbol and the variation mode of the first main game symbol, and stops the first decorative symbol and The variation mode is determined. As described above, since the variation pattern of the decorative symbol during execution of the pre-reading effect is determined with reference to the first sub-region symbol table or the second sub-region symbol table, the decorative symbol display mode is displayed in the sub-region. Only the numbers are displayed. Next, in step 3160, the drawing display content determination means SM21n turns on the first symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and performs the next processing (processing in step 2300). ).

  Further, in the case of No in step 3152, in step 3162, the drawing display content determination means SM21n determines whether or not the newly digested hold is a trigger hold. In the case of Yes in step 3162, the drawing display content determination means SM21n determines the display area of the decorative symbols as the pre-read second area, and proceeds to step 3168. In the case of No in step 3162, in step 3166, the drawing display content determination means SM21n determines the display area of the decoration symbol as “pre-read second area → SP reach expansion”, and proceeds to step 3168. In the fifth embodiment, regardless of whether the trigger hold is a hold related to the first decorative symbol or a hold related to the second decorative symbol, the display is enlarged when the symbol change related to the trigger hold is executed. It is configured as follows. Next, in step 3168, the drawing display content determination means SM21n refers to the second sub-region symbol table based on the information regarding the stop symbol and variation mode of the second main game symbol, and stops the second decorative symbol and The variation mode is determined. Next, in step 3170, the drawing display content determination means SM21n turns on the second symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and performs the next processing (step 2300 processing). ).

  Next, FIG. 112 is a flowchart of the first decorative symbol display control process according to the subroutine of Step 2300 in FIG. 96 in the fifth embodiment. The difference from the second embodiment is step 2344 (fifth) and step 2346 (fifth), that is, after the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the variable display command of the first decorative symbol in step 2316. After the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the first decorative symbol stop display command (temporary stop) in step 2324, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the image display command related to the timing in step 2328. Alternatively, if it is determined in step 2326 that the decorative symbol display control means SM21 has not reached the display timing of the notice image or the reach image, in step 2344 (fifth), the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines that the main control board M It is determined whether or not the first forced stop execution command is received from the side. In the case of Yes in step 2344 (fifth), the process proceeds to step 2336. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2344 (fifth), in step 2346 (fifth), the decorative symbol display control means SM21 displays the variable display area (the main area or the sub area when the pre-reading effect is not being executed). ), A stop display command (determined display) for stopping the first decorative symbol at the forced loss symbol is set, and the process proceeds to step 2340. Note that the display mode of the forced losing symbol of the first decorative symbol or the second decorative symbol will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  Next, FIG. 113 is a flowchart of the second decorative symbol display control process according to the subroutine of Step 2350 (fifth) of FIG. 96 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 2366, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the second symbol content determination flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2366, in step 2368, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the second symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2370, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns on the second symbol changing flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2372, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 starts the second figure variation time management timer SM21t-2, and proceeds to step 2374. In the case of No in step 2366, the process proceeds to step 2374.

  Next, in step 2374, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the second symbol changing flag is ON. In the case of Yes in step 2374, in step 2376, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 confirms the timer value of the second figure variation time management timer SM21t-2. Next, in step 2378, the decorative design display control means SM21 determines the second decoration based on the second design change time management timer SM21t-2 and the change mode temporarily stored in the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. It is determined whether or not the symbol variation start timing has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2378, in step 2379, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the second decorative symbol variable display command (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999). And the process proceeds to step 3200 (fifth).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2378, in step 2380, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 displays the variation mode temporarily stored in the second figure variation time management timer SM21t-2 and the figure display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Based on the above, it is determined whether or not the stop display timing (temporary stop display timing) of the second decorative symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2380, in step 2381, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the stop display command (temporary stop display command) of the second decorative symbol (in the display command transmission control process of step 2999, the sub-sub control unit). The process proceeds to step 3200 (fifth). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2380, in step 2382, the notice effect display control means SM24 (and reach effect display control means SM25), the first equipment variation time management timer SM21t-1 and the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. Based on the variation mode temporarily stored in (and reach effect related information temporary storage means SM25b), it is determined whether or not the display timing of the preview image and the reach image has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2382, in step 2383, the notice effect display control means SM24 (and the reach effect display control means SM25) set the image display command related to the notice image and the reach image (display command transmission control processing in step 2999). At step S3200 (fifth). In the case of No in step 2382, the process proceeds to step 3200 (fifth).

  Next, in step 3200 (fifth), the decorative symbol display control means SM21 executes main area interruption processing B, which will be described later. Next, in step 2384, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the second forced stop execution command from the main control board M side has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2384, in step 2385, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed (for example, Referring to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b, it is determined whether or not information indicating that the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed is received from the main control board M side). In the case of Yes in step 2385, in step 2386, the decorative design display control means SM21 sets a stop display command (definite display command) of the second decorative design (sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999). To be sent). Next, in step 3250 (fifth), the decorative symbol display control means SM21 executes a main area interruption process C, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2390.

  If NO in step 2384, in step 2388, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 displays the second decorative symbol in the region that is variably displayed (the main region or the sub region if no pre-reading effect is being executed). A stop display command (definite display) to stop at the forced loss symbol is set, and the process proceeds to step 2390. Note that the display mode of the forced losing symbol of the first decorative symbol or the second decorative symbol will be described in detail with reference to FIG. Next, in step 2390, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 stops and resets (zero clears) the second figure variation time management timer SM21t-2. Next, in step 2392, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the second symbol changing flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and performs the next processing (processing in step 2400). Migrate to It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 2374 or step 2385, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2400).

  Next, FIG. 114 is a big hit stop symbol display image diagram in the fifth embodiment. First, a case will be described in which the first decorative symbol displayed in the main area shown in the upper part of the figure is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol. First, a decorative symbol corresponding to the first main game symbol is variably displayed in the main area, and a decorative symbol corresponding to the second main game symbol is variably displayed in the sub-region. Thereafter, since the first main game symbol is stopped at the big hit symbol, the first decorative symbol corresponding to the big hit is stopped and displayed in the main area (“777” in the same figure). Further, when the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a forced loss symbol. Note that the forced loss symbol of the second decorative symbol is “Kirin”, and is a symbol that is stopped and displayed only when the second main game symbol is forcibly stopped. Further, when the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with the forced loss symbol, the background effect in the sub-region is a special background effect (a background effect that is executed only when the forced loss symbol is stopped and displayed).

  Next, the case where the second decorative symbol displayed in the sub area shown in the lower part of the figure is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol will be described. First, a decorative symbol corresponding to the second main game symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the sub-region, and a decorative symbol corresponding to the first main game symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the main region. After that, since the second main game symbol is stopped at the big hit symbol, the second decorative symbol corresponding to the big hit is stopped and displayed in the sub-region (“777” in the same figure). Further, when the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a forced loss symbol. Note that the forced lose symbol of the first decorative symbol is “zoo”, and is a symbol that is stopped and displayed only when the first main game symbol is forcibly stopped. In addition, when the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with the forced loss symbol, the background effect in the main area becomes a special background effect (a background effect that is executed only when the forced loss symbol is stopped and displayed). Thus, in the fifth embodiment, when the first main game symbol stops at the big hit symbol, the second decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed when the second main game symbol is forcibly stopped due to losing. And the forced decorative symbol of the first decorative symbol that is displayed when the first main gaming symbol is forcibly stopped due to a loss due to the second main gaming symbol being stopped by the big hit symbol. Are configured to have different display modes. As shown in the figure, the display mode of the special background effect in the main area is different from the display mode of the special background effect in the sub area. As a specific example of the display mode of the special background effect, the display mode of the special background effect in the main area may be “blue”, and the display mode of the special background effect in the sub area may be “red”. The display mode of the special background effect in the main area and the display mode of the special background effect in the sub area may all be the same display mode, or the display mode of the special background effect in the main area and the special background effect in the sub area Only a part of the display mode may be the same (only the color is the same and the pattern is different).

  Next, FIG. 115 is a flowchart of main area interrupt processing B according to the subroutine of step 3200 (fifth) in FIG. 113 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 3202, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the first interrupt timing of the second decorative symbol has been reached. In this example, the first interrupt timing is the timing 5 seconds after the start of the variation of the second decorative symbol, and is configured to determine whether the interrupt effect can be executed at the first interrupt timing. Yes. In the case of Yes in step 3202, in step 3204, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 is turned on when the interruptable flag (in the above-described main area interrupt processing A, the variation of the second decorative symbol itself can be interrupted). It is determined whether the flag is ON. In the case of Yes in step 3204, in step 3206, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the changing state of the changing first decorative symbol is the first half. In this example, in the variation of the first decorative symbol, the portion before the start of SP reach is the first half, and the portion after the start of SP reach is the second half, and the variation in which SP reach is not executed has only the first half. Not going to be.

  In the case of Yes in step 3206, in step 3208, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines the first half priority of the first decorative symbol changing in the main region and the priority of the second decorative symbol changing in the sub region. Are shifted to step 3212. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3206, in step 3210, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 gives priority to the latter half of the first decorative symbol changing in the main area and the priority of the second decorative symbol changing in the sub-region. The degree is compared, and the process proceeds to step 3212. Next, in step 3212, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether the priority of the second decorative symbol is higher than the priority of the first decorative symbol. Note that the priority of the first decorative symbol is the priority compared in step 3208 or step 3210. In the case of Yes in step 3212, in step 3214, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the accessory YK is stopped at the initial position. In the case of Yes in step 3214, in step 3216, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 changes the effect mode of the interrupt effect to the effect mode when the accessory is not activated (the accessory YK is stopped at the initial position, When the execution is started, an interrupt production effect mode is set, a command for executing the determined interrupt production is set, and the process proceeds to step 3220. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3214, in step 3218, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the effect mode of the interrupt effect as the effect mode at the time of actuating the action (the state in which the accessory YK is activated with a trigger other than the interrupt effect) And the command for executing the determined interrupt effect is set, and the process proceeds to step 3220. As described above, when the priority of the second decorative symbol is higher than the first half priority or the second half priority of the first decorative symbol, the interruption effect can be executed, but the accessory YK is at the initial position. Depending on whether or not it is stopped, the effect mode of the interrupting effect is different. In the fifth embodiment, the interrupting effect is an effect that is executed when the expectation level of jackpot for the symbol variation is high (the second decorative symbol has a high priority), so that the player is conspicuous (see FIG. It is preferable to execute in a flashy production mode. Therefore, it is more preferable to perform both the effect display on the liquid crystal (on the display area SG10) and the operation of the accessory than the effect display on the liquid crystal (on the display area SG10). In other words, it is preferable to execute the interruption effect while the accessory YK is stopped at the initial position. Therefore, as described above, when the accessory YK is activated when the main area interruption process A is executed, the effect YK is activated to the initial position, thereby producing an effect when the interruption effect is executed. As an aspect, it can comprise so that the ratio by which the production | presentation aspect at the time of an accessory non-operation may be selected increases. Note that the interrupt effects in step 3216 and step 3218 (interrupt effects executed at the first interrupt timing) may be referred to as first interrupt effects.

  Next, in step 3220, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a command for executing the switching of the decorative symbol display between the main area and the sub area, and the process proceeds to step 3222. Note that if the result is No in step 3202, step 3204, or step 3212, the process proceeds to step 3222. Here, the first decorative symbol is variably displayed in the main region, the second decorative symbol is variably displayed in the sub region, and the second decorative symbol (second main game symbol) is displayed. In the case of a big hit, if the display area of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol is not changed, the second decorative symbol variably displayed in the sub area which is an area smaller than the main area is the big hit symbol. The joy that became a big hit of the player will be reduced. Therefore, by executing an interrupting effect and using the variation display of the second decorative symbol that is a big hit as the main area, the big hit symbol can be stopped and displayed in the main area, and the fun of the game can be enhanced. .

Next, in step 3222, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the second decorative symbol is being displayed in the sub-region. In the case of Yes in step 3222, in step 3224, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the second interrupt timing of the second decorative symbol has been reached. Here, in the fifth embodiment, the second interrupt timing of the second decorative symbol is the timing 5 seconds before the end of the variation of the second decorative symbol. In the case of Yes in step 3224, in step 3226, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the changing second decorative symbol is a symbol variation that is a big hit. In the case of Yes in step 3226, in step 3228, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether the priority of the second decorative symbol is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (2 in this example). In the case of Yes in step 3228, in step 3230, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the accessory YK is in operation as the changing effect of the first decorative symbol. In the case of Yes in step 3230, in step 3232, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a command for executing the second interrupt effect. Next, in step 3234, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a command for switching the display of decorative symbols in the main area and the sub area, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2384). In addition, also when it is No in step 3222, step 3224, step 3226, step 3228, or step 3230, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2384). Thus, in the fifth embodiment, even when it is not determined at the first interrupt timing that the priority of the second decorative symbol is higher than the priority of the first decorative symbol, at the second interrupt timing. When the following conditions are satisfied, an interrupt effect is executed as the second interrupt effect.
(1) The second decorative design is changing in the sub-region,
(2) The variation of the second decorative design is a big hit,
(3) The priority of the second decorative symbol being changed is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (2 in this example),
(4) The accessory YK is not operating as an effect during the fluctuation of the first decorative symbol.
When the above conditions are satisfied, an interruption effect is executed.

  Although not shown, since the second interruption effect is configured to be executed when the accessory YK is not in operation, it is preferable that the effect mode in which the accessory YK operates as the effect mode. It is. In addition, the effect form of the second interruption effect may be an effect aspect in which the player can determine that the variation of the second decorative symbol is a symbol variation when the accessory YK is activated. In the fifth embodiment, when the first decorative symbol is variably displayed in the main area and the second decorative symbol is variably displayed in the sub area, the interrupt effect is executed, and the first The decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the sub-region, and the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the main region. However, when the interruption effect ends, that is, the symbol on the second main game side related to the interrupt effect. If the change is lost, the timing of the end of the change of the second decorative symbol related to the interrupting effect, and the timing of the end of the jackpot if the change of the second main game side related to the interrupting effect is a big hit. The first decorative design is variably displayed in the main area, and the second decorative design is variably displayed in the sub area. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 117, but the third interrupt timing shown in FIG. 115 (FIG. 115) may be symbol variation end timing = symbol variation stop timing or temporary variation of symbols. The timing immediately before the stop or the timing immediately before the stop of the fixed symbol variation may be used. Furthermore, the symbol may be changing as long as it is the last timing of the interrupt timings that exist in one symbol changing period. In addition, when an interrupting effect is executed, or when the display areas of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are switched, for example, when the first decorative symbol is variably displayed in the main area, the interrupting effect is generated. When the first decorative symbol being displayed is displayed in the sub-region and the second decorative symbol is displayed in the main region, the variable display of the second decorative symbol displayed in the main region is displayed. Until it is finished, the display area of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are not switched. (The variation of the first decorative symbol is started during the variation of the second decorative symbol in which the interruption effect is executed.) It is also preferable that the second decorative design is variably displayed in the main area).

  Next, FIG. 116 is an interrupt rendering execution image diagram in the fifth embodiment. First, in the upper part of the figure, an effect mode at the time of performing an accessory is illustrated. First, a decorative symbol corresponding to the first main game symbol is variably displayed in the main area, and a decorative symbol corresponding to the second main game symbol is variably displayed in the sub-region. After that, when 5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the change of the second decorative symbol and the first interrupt timing is reached, the accessory YK is activated as an effect corresponding to the change of the first decorative symbol. In this case, an interrupting effect is executed. However, since the accessory YK cannot be operated as the interrupting effect, the “liquid crystal display only” effect mode (the effect mode in which the accessory YK does not operate) is used. The interruption effect is executed. In the figure, a state in which the accessory YK that has been operating as an effect relating to the first decorative symbol returns to the initial position is illustrated.

  Next, in the lower part of the figure, an effect mode when the accessory is not in operation is illustrated. First, in a situation where the decorative symbol corresponding to the first main game symbol is variably displayed in the main area, and the decorative symbol corresponding to the second main game symbol is variably displayed in the sub-region, the second decorative symbol is displayed. At the time when 5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation and the first interrupt timing is reached, the accessory YK is stopped at the initial position. In this case, since the accessory YK can be actuated as an interrupting effect, the interrupting effect is executed in the “liquid crystal display + actual character activation” effect mode (the effect mode in which the accessory YK operates). It will be. In the figure, a state in which the accessory YK is operating at the central portion of the effect display device SG as an interrupt effect related to the second decorative symbol is illustrated.

  Next, FIG. 117 is a flowchart of main area interrupt processing C according to the subroutine of step 3250 (fifth) in FIG. 113 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 3252, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the changing second decorative symbol is a symbol variation that is a big hit. In the case of Yes in step 3252, in step 3254, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether the priority of the second decorative symbol is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (3 in this example). In the case of Yes in step 3254, in step 3256, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a command for executing the third interrupt effect as the interrupt effect. Next, in step 3258, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a command for executing the replacement of the decorative symbol display between the main area and the sub area, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2390). In addition, also when it is No in step 3252 or step 3254, it transfers to the next process (process of step 2390). As described above, even when the interrupt effect (second interrupt effect) cannot be executed at the second interrupt timing, (1) the change of the executed second decorative symbol is a big hit, (2) execution If the priority of the second decorative symbol that has been set satisfies the two conditions of 3 or more in the present example (3 in this example), the third interrupting effect is provided as an interrupting effect at the stop timing of the second decorative symbol. Is configured to run. Note that the stop timing of the second decorative symbol is referred to as a third interrupt timing. In addition, as the third interrupting effect mode, since the execution of the third interrupting effect = start of the big hit, an effect mode that congratulates the player who has confirmed the big hit or the same type of effect as the start of the big hit It may be configured to execute. Moreover, it is good also as an effect aspect which the accessory YK act | operates. Moreover, you may comprise so that the production | presentation aspect of a 3rd interruption effect may differ between the case where the accessory YK is act | operating as the content of production | presentation which concerns on the fluctuation | variation of a 1st decoration symbol, and the case where it is not act | operating.

  Next, FIG. 118 is a flowchart of the background effect control process according to the subroutine of Step 2500 (fifth) in FIG. 96 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 2522, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and the pre-reading flag (the flag that is turned on when the pre-reading effect is being executed) is off. It is determined whether or not there is. In the case of Yes in step 2522, in step 2524, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether there is a trigger hold within the hold. In the case of Yes in step 2524, in step 2526, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not the decorative symbol variation start timing in the first main area after the trigger suspension occurs has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2626, in step 2528, the background effect display control means SM23 calculates the time until the end of symbol change related to the trigger hold, and until the calculated time elapses based on the result of the trigger hold success / failure result. The pre-reading notice scenario is determined. Here, the lower part of the figure is an image of execution of a pre-reading notice effect. In the same figure, a state in which a pre-reading notice effect scenario is determined and the prefetch effect is executed is illustrated. First, at the timing of starting the change of the first decorative symbol after the trigger suspension occurs (the variation start timing of the decorative symbol with the earlier variation start timing between the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol), the symbol variation end related to the trigger suspension is completed. The pre-notification effect scenario during pre-reading in that period is determined. After that, when 20 seconds have elapsed from the first symbol variation start timing, “Atsui” is displayed as a speech advance notice. Thereafter, the cut-in effect is executed when 40 seconds have elapsed from the first symbol variation start timing. Thereafter, when 60 seconds have elapsed from the first symbol variation start timing, the effect that the accessory YK operates is executed. Thereafter, when 70 seconds have elapsed from the first symbol variation start timing, the symbol variation related to the trigger suspension ends. In the fifth embodiment, since the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are displayed in a variable manner at the same time, if the notice effect is executed based on the fluctuation time of one symbol change, the notice effect related to any of the symbol changes It is possible to recognize whether the symbol variation related to the trigger hold is the symbol variation, and the interest of the symbol variation related to the hold other than the trigger hold is reduced. End up. Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, by managing the execution timing of the notice effect based on the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the first decorative symbol after the trigger suspension occurs, the interest of the entire prefetch effect is enhanced.

  Returning to the description of the flowchart, in step 2530, the background effect display control means SM23 turns on the pre-reading flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b. Next, in step 2532, the background effect display control means SM23 sets “pre-reading background” as the background effect, and proceeds to the next process {step 3300 (fifth process)}. As described above, the “pre-reading background” is configured to be set first in the case of Yes in step 2526, that is, at the start timing of the decorative symbol variation in the first main area after the trigger suspension occurs. In other words, the timing of switching from “normal background” to “pre-reading background” is the start timing of symbol variation. When the background effect is “pre-reading background”, as described above with reference to FIG. 111, the first pre-reading area in which the first decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner is provided in the lower left portion of the display area SG10. The pre-read second area in which the second decorative symbols are variably displayed is provided in the lower right part of the display area SG10, and the pre-read first area and the pre-read second area are variably displayed side by side in the same display area. It will be. In the case of No in step 2522, in step 2534, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not the symbol variation related to the trigger suspension has ended. In the case of Yes in step 2534, in step 2536, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the prefetch flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and proceeds to step 2538. Note that if the answer is No in Step 2524 or Step 2526, the process proceeds to Step 2538. Next, in step 2538, the background effect display control means SM23 sets “normal background” as the background effect, and proceeds to the next process {step 3300 (fifth process)}. In the case of No in step 2534, in step 2540, the background effect display control means SM23 sets “pre-reading background” as the background effect, and proceeds to the next process {process of step 3300 (fifth)}. The “pre-reading background” and the “normal background” can be displayed in any manner as long as the player can visually recognize them.

  Next, FIG. 119 is a flowchart of the accessory drive control process according to the subroutine of Step 3300 (fifth) of FIG. 96 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 3302, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not the effect content related to the symbol variation has been newly determined. In step 3302, it is determined whether or not the content of the effect other than during the pre-reading effect is determined. In the case of Yes in step 3302, in step 3304, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not the accessory YK is scheduled to be activated in the newly determined effect content. In the case of Yes in step 3304, in step 3306, the background effect display control means SM23 operates the accessory YK on the basis of the variation pattern and effect contents of the decorative symbol related to the symbol variation, and the process proceeds to step 3314. If NO in step 3302, the background effect display control means SM23 determines in step 3308 whether or not a pre-reading notice effect scenario has been newly determined. In step 3308, it is determined whether or not the content of the effect when the pre-reading effect is being executed has been determined. In the case of Yes in step 3308, in step 3310, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not there is an action schedule for the accessory YK in the newly determined effect content. In the case of Yes in step 3310, in step 3312, the background effect display control means SM23 operates the accessory YK based on the pre-reading notice effect scenario, and proceeds to step 3314. Note that if the answer is No in Step 3304, Step 3308, or Step 3310, the process proceeds to Step 3314.

  Next, in step 3314, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and the accessory initialization flag (the change of the second decorative symbol is a change that can be interrupted). It is determined whether or not a flag for operating the accessory YK to the initial position, which is turned on when the accessory YK is not stopped at the initial position at the time of determination, is ON. In the case of Yes in step 3314, in step 3316, the background effect display control means SM23 operates the accessory TK toward the initial position. Next, in step 3318, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the accessory initialization flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and proceeds to step 3320. Note that if the answer is No in Step 3314, the process proceeds to Step 3320. As described above, in the fifth embodiment, when the accessory YK is operating from the initial position when it is determined that the symbol variation of the second decorative symbol is a variation that can be interrupted, the operation is performed. It is configured to execute control to return the active accessory YK to the initial position. Next, in step 3320, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether it is the current interrupt effect execution timing. In the case of Yes in step 3320, in step 3322, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not the interrupt effect to be executed is an interrupt effect of the effect mode in which the accessory YK operates. In addition, as the interrupt effect in which the accessory YK is activated, for example, the second interrupt effect is executed in which the interrupt effect (first interrupt effect) that is the effect mode when the accessory is not activated is executed at the first interrupt timing. The third interruption effect is executed, and so on. In the case of Yes in step 3322, in step 3324, the background effect display control means SM23 operates the accessory YK based on the effect mode of the interrupt effect, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2999). Note that if the answer is No in step 3320 or step 3322, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in step 2999).

  With the configuration as described above, according to the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment, the two decorative symbols of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are displayed in parallel on the effect display device. The first main game side is configured so that the lottery can be executed, the decorative symbol corresponding to the first main game side is the first decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol corresponding to the second main game side is the second decorative symbol. The symbol variation and the symbol variation on the second main game side can be displayed simultaneously. In addition, the first decorative design is mainly displayed in the main area, the second decorative design is mainly displayed in the sub-area having a display area smaller than the main area, and the second decorative design is displayed in the sub-area. When the expectation degree of jackpot for the symbol variation is high, the interrupting effect is executed and the display of the second decorative symbol is displayed in the main area, thereby displaying the variation symbol of the decorative symbol desired to be shown to the player. It can be shown greatly in the main area, and the fun of the game will be enhanced.

(Modification 1 from the fifth embodiment)
Here, in the fifth embodiment, the first decorative symbol corresponding to the first main game symbol is displayed in the main area, the second decorative symbol corresponding to the second main game symbol is displayed in the sub area, and the second In the case where the priority of the decorative symbol is high (for example, when the big hit expectation is high), the interruption effect is executed and the second decorative symbol is displayed in the main area. The first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are displayed. The display mode is not limited to this. Therefore, such a configuration is referred to as a first modification from the fifth embodiment, and only the changes from the fifth embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 120 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display content determination process according to the subroutine of Step 2200 (fifth) in FIG. 96 in Modification 1 from the fifth embodiment. Changes from the fifth embodiment are steps 2249-16 (fifth modification 1) to steps 2249-26 (fifth modification 1). That is, in step 2249-3, the drawing display content determination means SM21n is suspended. If it is determined that there is no trigger hold in step 2249-16 (fifth variation 1), the figure display content determination means SM21n determines whether the symbol variation is a symbol variation from the standby state. . In the case of Yes in step 2249-16 (fifth modification 1), in step 2249-17 (fifth modification 1), the figure display content determination means SM21n determines the display area of the decorative symbols as the main area. Next, in step 2249-18 (fifth variation 1), the drawing display content determination means SM21n determines whether or not the newly digested hold is a hold related to the first main game side. In the case of Yes in step 2249-18 (fifth variation 1), in step 2249-19 (fifth variation 1), the drawing display content determination means SM21n provides information on the stop symbol and variation mode of the first main game symbol. Based on the first main area symbol table, the stop symbol and variation mode of the first decorative symbol are determined, and the process proceeds to Step 2249-8. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2249-18 (fifth variation 1), in step 2249-20 (fifth variation 1), the drawing display content determination means SM21n relates to the stop symbol and the variation mode of the second main game symbol. Based on the information, the second main area symbol table is referred to determine the stop symbol and variation mode of the second decorative symbol, and the process proceeds to Step 2249-8.

  In addition, in the case of No in step 2249-16 (fifth modification 1), in step 2249-21 (fifth modification 1), the drawing display content determination means SM21n determines that the newly digested hold is the first main game side. It is determined whether or not the suspension is related to. In the case of Yes in step 2249-21 (fifth variation 1), in step 2249-22 (fifth variation 1), the drawing display content determination means SM21n sets the display area of the decoration symbol as the symbol of the previous first decoration symbol. Determine the same display area as the fluctuation. Next, in step 2249-23 (fifth variation 1), the figure display content determination means SM21n determines whether the first main area symbol table or the first sub is based on the information about the stop symbol and the variation mode of the first main game symbol. With reference to the area symbol table, the stop symbol and variation mode of the first decorative symbol are determined, and the process proceeds to Step 2249-26 (fifth variation 1). Also, in the case of No in step 2249-21 (fifth variation 1), in step 2249-24 (fifth variation 1), the drawing display content determination means SM21n sets the display area of the decoration symbol as the previous second decoration symbol. The display area is determined to be the same as that of the symbol variation. Next, in step 2249-25 (fifth variation 1), the figure display content determination means SM21n determines whether the second main area symbol table or the second sub is based on the information regarding the stop symbol and variation mode of the second main game symbol. Referring to the area symbol table, the stop symbol and the variation mode of the second decorative symbol are determined, and the process proceeds to Step 2249-26 (Fifth Variation 1). Next, in step 2249-26 (fifth variation 1), the figure display content determination means SM21n determines whether or not the display area of the decorative symbol related to the symbol variation is a sub-region. In the case of Yes in step 2249-26 (5th modification 1), the process proceeds to step 3100 (fifth), and in the case of No, the process proceeds to step 2249-15. Thus, in the first modification from the fifth embodiment, when the decorative design starts to change when it is not in the standby state, both the first decorative design and the second decorative design are the previous design. It is configured to be changed in an area (either a main area or a sub area) that has been variably displayed due to fluctuation. In addition, when the decorative symbol starts to change in the standby state, the decorative symbol is newly changed from the standby state regardless of whether the decorative symbol to be newly started is the first decorative symbol or the second decorative symbol. The decorative symbols that have started to change are displayed in a variable manner in the main area, and the decorative symbols that have started to change later are displayed in a variable manner in the sub-region.

  Next, FIG. 121 is an example of a second decorative design effect content determination table in the first modification from the fifth embodiment. In the first modification from the fifth embodiment, it is not fixed which one of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol is mainly displayed in the main area. Therefore, the first decorative symbol is also the first decorative symbol. Similar to the decorative design, the first-half priority and the second-half priority, which are elements for determining whether or not to execute the interruption effect, are determined according to the determined effect content. It should be noted that the priority is greater in the case where the result is a big hit than in the case of loss. Further, the priority is relatively higher when the variation time is longer than when the variation time is shorter. The first half priority is a priority related to the period before the start of execution of the SP reach production (super reach production) in the design variation, and the second half priority is a priority related to the period after the start of execution of the SP reach production. Thus, the symbol variation (effect contents) in which the SP reach effect is not executed is configured to have the first half priority but not the second half priority. The priority is any number from “0” to “3”.

  Next, FIG. 122 is a flowchart of main area interrupt processing A according to the subroutine of Step 3100 (fifth) in FIG. 120 in Modification 1 from the fifth embodiment. Changes from the fifth embodiment are step 3112 (fifth modification 1), step 3102 (fifth modification 1), step 3104 (fifth modification 1), step 3114 (fifth modification 1) and step 3116 (first modification). In other words, in step 3112 (fifth variation 1), the notice effect display content determining means SM24n determines whether or not the decorative symbol variably displayed in the sub-region is the second decorative symbol. judge. In the case of Yes in step 3112 (fifth variation 1), in step 3102 (fifth variation 1), the notice effect display content determination means SM24n confirms the first half priority of the second decorative symbol related to the symbol variation. Next, in step 3104 (fifth variation 1), the notice effect display content determination means SM24n determines whether or not the first half priority of the confirmed second decorative symbol is a predetermined value (2 in this example) or more. judge. If Yes in Step 3104 (Fifth Modification 1), the process proceeds to Step 3106. If No, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in Step 2249-15). Also, in the case of No in step 3112 (fifth variation 1), in step 3114 (fifth variation 1), the notice effect display content determination means SM24n confirms the first half priority of the first decorative symbol related to the symbol variation. . In the case of Yes in step 3114 (fifth modification 1), in step 3116 (fifth modification 1), the notice effect display content determination means SM24n determines that the first half priority of the confirmed first decorative symbol is a predetermined value (in this example, 2) It is determined whether or not the above is satisfied. In the case of Yes in Step 3116 (5th modification 1), the process proceeds to Step 3106, and in the case of No, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of Step 2249-15). As described above, in the first modification from the fifth embodiment, both the case where the first decorative symbol is variably displayed in the sub area and the case where the second decorative symbol is variably displayed in the sub area are both displayed. In such a case, since the interruption effect can be executed, it is determined whether or not the change in the decorative symbol currently displayed in the sub-region is a change that can execute the interruption effect. Moreover, since the timing for executing the processing is the timing before the start of SP reach (the timing before the start of symbol variation), the first half priority is confirmed as the priority.

  Next, FIG. 123 is a flowchart of the first decorative symbol display control process according to the subroutine of Step 2300 in FIG. 96 in Modification 1 from the fifth embodiment. The change from the fifth embodiment is Step 3200 (Fifth Modification 1). That is, after the decorative design display control means SM21 sets the first decorative design variable display command in Step 2316, the decoration is displayed in Step 2324. After the symbol display control means SM21 sets the first decorative symbol stop display command (temporary stop), in step 2328, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the image display command related to the timing, or in step 2326. When it is determined that the decorative symbol display control means SM21 has not reached the display timing of the preview image or the reach image, in step 3200 (fifth variation 1), the decorative symbol display control means SM21 performs main area interruption processing, which will be described later. B is executed, and the process shifts to Step 2344 (fifth).

  Next, FIG. 124 is a flowchart of main area interrupt processing B according to the subroutine of step 3200 (fifth modification 1) in FIG. 123 in Modification 1 from the fifth embodiment. First, in step 3236, the decorative design display control means SM21 determines whether or not the changing decorative design is changing in the sub-region. In the first modification from the fifth embodiment, when the main area interrupt process B in the figure is executed in the first decorative symbol display control process, the determination is made on the first decorative symbol, and the second When it is executed in the decorative symbol display control process, it is determined for the second decorative symbol. In the case of Yes in step 3236, in step 3237, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the first interrupt timing of the decorative symbol displayed in the sub area has been reached. In this example, the first interrupt timing is 5 seconds after the start of the decorative symbol variation, and the decorative symbol that is variably displayed in the sub-region at the first interrupt timing can execute the interrupt effect. It is comprised so that it may determine whether it is. In the case of Yes in step 3237, in step 3238, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the interrupt enable flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 3238, in step 3239, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the changing state of the decorative symbol changing in the main area is the first half. In this example, the part before the start of the SP reach in the change of the decorative design is the first half, and the part after the start of the SP reach is the second half, and the change in which the SP reach is not executed has only the first half. It is said.

  In the case of Yes in step 3239, in step 3240, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 compares the first half priority of the decorative symbol changing in the main area with the first half priority of the decorative symbol changing in the sub area. , The process proceeds to step 3242-1. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3239, in step 3241, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines the second half priority of the decorative symbol changing in the main area and the first half priority of the decorative symbol changing in the sub area. Then, the process proceeds to step 3242-1. Next, in step 3242-1, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether the priority of the decorative symbol that is variably displayed in the sub-region is higher than the priority of the decorative symbol that is varied in the main region. Determine whether. It should be noted that the priority of the decorative symbols variably displayed in the main area is the priority compared in step 3240 or step 3241. In the case of Yes in step 3242-1, in step 3242-2, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the accessory YK is stopped at the initial position. In the case of Yes in step 3242-2, in step 3242-3, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 changes the effect mode of the interrupt effect to the effect mode when the accessory is not activated (the accessory YK is stopped at the initial position). In the state, the execution mode of the interrupt effect when the execution is started is set, a command for executing the determined interrupt effect is set, and the flow proceeds to Step 3242-5. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3242-2, in step 3242-4, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 uses the effect mode of the interrupt effect as the effect mode at the time of actuating the accessory (the actor YK is activated when other than the interrupt effect) In this state, the execution mode of the interrupt effect when the execution is started is determined, a command for executing the determined interrupt effect is set, and the flow proceeds to Step 3242-5. As described above, when the first half priority of the decorative symbol displayed in the sub-area is variably displayed is higher than the first half priority or second half priority of the decorative symbol displayed in the main area, the interruption effect is executed. Although it is comprised so that it may be obtained, it is comprised so that the production | presentation aspect of an interruption effect may differ with whether the accessory YK has stopped in the initial position.

  Next, in step 3242-5, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a command for executing display symbol switching between the main area and the sub-region, and proceeds to step 3242-6. It should be noted that if the result is No in step 3237, step 3238, or step 3242-1, the process proceeds to step 3242-6.

  Next, in step 3242-6, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the variation of the decorative symbol is being displayed in the sub-region. In the case of Yes in step 3242-6, in step 3242-7, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the second interrupt timing of the decorative symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 3242-7, in step 3242-8, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the decorative symbol that is changing in the sub-region is a symbol change that is a big hit. If Yes in step 3242-8, then in step 3242-9, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines that the second half priority of the decorative symbol changing in the sub-region is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (2 in this example). (The second interrupt timing is later than the SP reach start timing, so the second half priority is determined). In the case of Yes in step 3242-9, in step 3243-1, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the accessory YK is in operation as a changing effect of the decorative symbol changing in the main area. To do. In the case of Yes in step 3243-1, in step 3243-2, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a command for executing the second interruption effect. Next, in step 3243-3, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a command for executing the replacement of the decorative symbol display between the main region and the sub region, and the next processing {step 2344 (fifth) processing }. In addition, also in the case of No in step 3242-6, step 3242-7, step 3242-8, step 3242-9 or step 3243-1, the process proceeds to the next process {step 2344 (fifth process)}. Note that in the first modification from the fifth embodiment, when an interrupting effect is executed and the display of the decorative pattern is switched between the main area and the sub area, the decorative pattern newly displayed in the main area is displayed. Even if the symbol variation related to the above does not become a big hit, the subsequent display region of the decorative symbol is configured to be a display region after execution of the interrupt effect. Specifically, when the first decorative symbol is displayed in the main area and the second decorative symbol is displayed in the sub area, the interruption effect is executed, and the second decorative symbol is displayed in the main area. Even if the first decorative symbol is displayed in the sub-region and the result of the symbol variation of the second decorative symbol is lost as the execution result of the interrupting effect, the second ornament is displayed in the main region in the next symbol variation. The symbol is displayed, and the first decorative symbol is displayed in the sub area. The third interrupt timing shown in FIG. 124 (FIG. 124) may be symbol variation end timing = symbol variation stop timing, timing immediately before symbol variation temporary stop or timing just before symbol variation final stop. It is good. Furthermore, the symbol may be changing as long as it is the last timing of the interrupt timings that exist in one symbol changing period.

  Next, FIG. 125 is a flowchart of main area interrupt processing C relating to the subroutine of step 3250 (fifth) in FIG. 123 in Modification 1 from the fifth embodiment. The changes from the fifth embodiment are step 3260 (fifth modification 1) and step 3262 (fifth modification 1), that is, in step 3260 (fifth modification 1), the notice effect display control means SM24 is: It is determined whether or not the symbol variation of the decorative symbol that is varying in the sub-region is a symbol variation that is a big hit. In the case of Yes in step 3260 (fifth variation 1), in step 3262 (fifth variation 1), the notice effect display control means SM24 determines that the second half priority of the symbol variation of the decorative symbol that is varying in the sub-region is a predetermined value. (In this example, it is determined whether it is 3) (since the third interrupt timing is later than the SP reach start timing, the second half priority is determined). If Yes in Step 3262 (Fifth Modification 1), the process proceeds to Step 3256, and if No, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in Step 2340).

  With the configuration as described above, according to the gaming machine according to the first modification from the fifth embodiment, the two decorative symbols of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are displayed on the effect display device. As a configuration, it is possible to execute a parallel lottery, the decorative symbol corresponding to the first main game side is the first decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol corresponding to the second main game side is the second decorative symbol, The symbol variation on the first main game side and the symbol variation on the second main game side can be displayed simultaneously. In addition, among the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols, the decorative symbols that first started the variable display in the standby state are displayed in the main area, and then the decorative symbols that started the variable display are displayed in the sub-area. By configuring so that the value of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol can be made equal, the case where the first decorative symbol is displayed in the main region and the second decorative symbol in the main region By frequently switching the display case, it is possible to make the player pay attention to any of the symbol variations on the first main game side and the symbol variations on the second main game side.

(Summary)
The following concepts can be extracted (listed) based on the configuration shown in the above embodiments. However, the concepts listed below are merely examples, and the concepts based on the further configurations shown in the above embodiments are added to these concepts as well as the combination and separation (higher level conceptualization) of these listed concepts. May be.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (1)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
Variable prize opening (for example, first big prize opening C10, second big prize opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g);
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying the effect;
A sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a random number based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10, second main game start opening B10) , Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
A game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that executes a determination of success / failure based on the random number, and determines a stop display mode of the identification information and a change display mode of the identification information based on the result of the determination.
According to the determination by the game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the identification information after
A special prize that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) advantageous to the player after the result of the determination of winning or failing is winning and the identification information is stopped and displayed. Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a game;
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) to the side of the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) MT),
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S)
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game part (for example, main control board M) side;
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)) is controlled. Production display control means SM20),
After the first effect design is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the first effect design is controlled to be stopped and displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). First effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21);
After the second effect design is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the second effect design is controlled to be stopped and displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). Second presentation symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
The period from the start of variable display of the identification information to the stop display is defined as one stage, and both the first stage design and the second stage design are variably displayed within a stage.
The first effect design that is variably displayed within a certain performance period can be temporarily stopped and displayed before it is definitively stopped within the certain performance period. When displayed, it is possible to execute a pseudo-variation that is displayed again and again within the certain production period, and when the first production design is temporarily stopped, the first production design is confirmed. The special stop display mode that is not displayed when it is stopped and displayed is configured to be temporarily stopped.
In the pachinko gaming machine, the second effect design that is variably displayed within a certain production period is configured such that the special stop display mode is not temporarily stopped and displayed within the certain production period. is there.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (1-2)
A first start opening where game balls can enter,
A second starting port where a game ball can enter,
A variable winning opening that can be open and closed;
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information;
A second identification information display unit capable of displaying the second identification information;
A main game section that controls the progress of the game;
An effect display section capable of displaying the effect;
A sub game section that controls the display of effects on the effect display section,
The main game department
A first random number obtaining means for obtaining a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting port;
First game content determination means for determining whether or not the game is successful based on the first random number, and determining a stop display mode of the first identification information and a variable display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the determination.
First identification information display control means for controlling to stop and display the first identification information after variably displaying the first identification information in the first identification information display section according to the determination by the first game content determination means;
A second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting port;
Second game content determination means for determining whether or not to perform the determination based on the second random number, and determining a stop display mode of the second identification information and a variation display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the determination.
Second identification information display control means for controlling the second identification information to be stopped and displayed after the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display unit in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means;
After the result of the success / failure determination based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination and determination based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , A special game control means capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening advantageous to the player;
Game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the sub-game unit side to the sub-game unit side. The first identification information is not variably displayed while the second identification information is variably displayed.
The subsidiary game department
Game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game department side;
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means, effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit,
A first effect symbol display control means for controlling the first effect symbol to be stopped and displayed on the effect display unit after the first effect symbol is variably displayed on the effect display unit;
A second effect symbol display control means for controlling the second effect symbol to be stopped and displayed on the effect display unit after the second effect symbol is variably displayed on the effect display unit;
Both the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol can be variably displayed within the period from the start of variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of variable display of the second identification information to the stop display. Is configured to
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variation display mode, the variation display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variation display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variation display mode It is configured to be able to execute both of the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variation display mode, the variation display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variation display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variation display mode It is configured to be able to execute both of the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the stop display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to perform both stop display of
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the stop display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to perform both stop display of
The period from the start of variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is within one effect period,
The first effect design that is variably displayed within a certain effect period can be temporarily stopped before the definite stop display within the certain effect period. When the first effect is temporarily displayed, the pseudo-variation that is variably displayed again during the certain effect period can be executed. The special stop display mode that is not displayed when the symbol is displayed in a definitive stop display can be temporarily stopped and displayed.
The pachinko game characterized in that the second effect design that is variably displayed within a certain performance period is configured so that the special stop display mode is not temporarily stopped during the certain performance period. Machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (2)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
Variable prize opening (for example, first big prize opening C10, second big prize opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g);
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying the effect;
A sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a random number based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10, second main game start opening B10) , Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
A game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that executes a determination of success / failure based on the random number, and determines a stop display mode of the identification information and a change display mode of the identification information based on the result of the determination.
According to the determination by the game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the identification information after
A special prize that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) advantageous to the player after the result of the determination of winning or failing is winning and the identification information is stopped and displayed. Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a game;
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) to the side of the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) MT),
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S)
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game part (for example, main control board M) side;
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)) is controlled. Production display control means SM20),
After variably displaying a plurality of types of first effect symbols on an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG), the effect display unit (for example, an effect display unit (for example, a combination of one or more types) is displayed. A first effect symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling to stop display in the effect display device SG);
After a plurality of types of second effect symbols are variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), a second effect symbol that is a combination of one type or a plurality of types is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, A second effect symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling to stop and display in the effect display device SG),
The period from the start of variable display of the identification information to the stop display is defined as one effect period, and after the first effect symbol is variably displayed within a certain effect period, it is stopped and displayed deterministically. The second effect design is variably displayed and then stopped and displayed deterministically.
The first effect design that is variably displayed within a certain performance period can be temporarily stopped and displayed before it is definitively stopped within the certain performance period. When it is displayed, it is configured to be variably displayed again within the certain production period, and when the first production symbol is displayed deterministically or temporarily, at the time of the stop display A special stop display mode indicating that the special game is not executed while the special game is likely to be executed thereafter can be stopped and displayed as the first effect symbol that is a combination of the one type or the plurality of types. Configured,
The symbol for the second effect that is variably displayed within a certain effect period cannot be temporarily stopped before the definite stop display within the certain effect period, or the certain effect Even if it is a case where the stop display is tentatively performed before the stop display is definitely performed within the period, the special stop display mode is used as the second effect design that is a combination of the one type or a plurality of types. A configuration in which the special stop display mode is not stopped and displayed as a second effect symbol that is a combination of one type or a plurality of types even when the second effect symbol is definitely stopped and displayed without being stopped. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by being.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (3)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
Variable prize opening (for example, first big prize opening C10, second big prize opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g);
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying the effect;
A sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a random number based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10, second main game start opening B10) , Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
A game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that executes a determination of success / failure based on the random number, and determines a stop display mode of the identification information and a change display mode of the identification information based on the result of the determination.
According to the determination by the game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the identification information after
A special prize that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) advantageous to the player after the result of the determination of winning or failing is winning and the identification information is stopped and displayed. Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a game;
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) to the side of the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) MT),
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S)
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game part (for example, main control board M) side;
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)) is controlled. Production display control means SM20),
After the first effect design is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the first effect design is controlled to be stopped and displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). First effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21);
After the second effect design is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the second effect design is controlled to be stopped and displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). Second presentation symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
The period from the start of variable display of the identification information to the stop display is defined as one stage, and both the first stage design and the second stage design are variably displayed within a stage.
The first effect design that is variably displayed within a certain performance period can be temporarily stopped and displayed before it is definitively stopped within the certain performance period. When displayed, it is possible to execute a pseudo-variation that is displayed again and again within the certain production period, and when the first production design is temporarily stopped, the first production design is confirmed. The special stop display mode that is not displayed when it is stopped and displayed is configured to be temporarily stopped.
The second effect design that is variably displayed within a certain production period is configured such that the special stop display mode is not temporarily stopped and displayed within the certain production period.
As the display state of the first effect symbol within a certain effect period, the first display state in which the player can visually recognize the first effect symbol that is variably displayed, and the first effect symbol that is variably displayed. Is configured to take one of the second display state in which the first display state is hidden or the first display state is more difficult for the player to view than the first display state. The design is configured to be displayed at least in the second display state,
In the case where the special stop display mode is temporarily stopped and displayed as the first effect symbol within a certain effect period, the specification that cannot be included when the first effect symbol is definitely stopped and displayed. It is configured to be a first special stop display mode that includes a type of first effect design, or a second special stop display mode that does not include the specific type of first effect design,
When the first effect design is tentatively stopped and displayed within a certain effect period, the second special stop display mode is tentatively set rather than when the first special stop display mode is tentatively stopped and displayed. The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the special game execution expectation is higher when the one stop period is displayed in a stationary manner.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (4)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
Variable prize opening (for example, first big prize opening C10, second big prize opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g);
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying the effect;
A sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a random number based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10, second main game start opening B10) , Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
When random numbers are acquired by random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the variation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. A random number temporary storage means (for example, symbol holding means MJ32) for temporarily storing the acquired random number and controlling the holding to occur,
When the variation display start condition of the identification information related to a certain hold is satisfied, the determination of validity is performed based on the random number related to the certain retention, and the stop display mode of the identification information and the variation display of the identification information are performed based on the result of the determination Game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the mode;
According to the determination by the game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the identification information after
A special prize that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) advantageous to the player after the result of the determination of winning or failing is winning and the identification information is stopped and displayed. Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a game;
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) to the side of the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) MT),
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S)
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game part (for example, main control board M) side;
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)) is controlled. Production display control means SM20),
The effect design is controlled such that after the effect design is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the effect design is stopped and displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). Display control means (for example, effect display control means SM20),
The period from the start of variable display of the identification information to the stop display is one production period, and the design for production can be variably displayed within one production period.
An effect design that is variably displayed within a certain performance period can be tentatively stopped before the definitive stop display within the certain performance period, and is tentatively stopped and displayed. In such a case, it is possible to execute pseudo-variation that is variably displayed again within the certain production period, and when the production symbol is deterministically or tentatively stopped, the deterministic or tentative stop A special stop display mode indicating that there is a possibility of execution of a special game after the definite or tentative stop display is shown while indicating that the special game is not executed at the time of display. Is configured to be able to display a stop
When a certain condition is met before a change display start condition of identification information related to the certain hold is satisfied after a certain hold occurs, the certain hold is designated as a specified hold. If there is one or more pre-pending suspensions that will satisfy the variable information display start condition of the identification information prior to the specific hold, the variable information start condition of the identification information related to the pre-pending hold is set. In the production period corresponding to the case where it is satisfied, the special stop display mode is definitely stopped and displayed as the production symbol only when the production symbol is definitely stopped and displayed. Within one production period corresponding to when the variable display start condition of information is satisfied, the special symbol is used as the production design only when the production design is tentatively stopped and displayed. It is pachinko machines, characterized in that stop display mode is configured to be displayed temporarily stopped.

A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
Variable prize opening (for example, first big prize opening C10, second big prize opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g);
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying the effect;
A sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a random number based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10, second main game start opening B10) , Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
When random numbers are acquired by random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the variation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. Random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) for temporarily storing the acquired random number and controlling the hold to occur,
When the variation display start condition of the identification information related to a certain hold is satisfied, the determination of validity is performed based on the random number related to the certain retention, and the stop display mode of the identification information and the variation display of the identification information are performed based on the result of the determination Game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the mode;
According to the determination by the game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the identification information after
A special prize that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) advantageous to the player after the result of the determination of winning or failing is winning and the identification information is stopped and displayed. Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a game;
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) to the side of the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) MT),
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S)
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game part (for example, main control board M) side;
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)) is controlled. Production display control means SM20),
The effect design is controlled such that after the effect design is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the effect design is stopped and displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). Display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
The period from the start of variable display of the identification information to the stop display is one production period, and the design for production can be variably displayed within one production period.
An effect design that is variably displayed within a certain performance period can be tentatively stopped before the definitive stop display within the certain performance period, and is tentatively stopped and displayed. In such a case, it is possible to execute pseudo-variation that is variably displayed again within the certain production period, and when the production symbol is deterministically or tentatively stopped, the deterministic or tentative stop A special stop display mode indicating that there is a possibility of execution of a special game after the definite or tentative stop display is shown while indicating that the special game is not executed at the time of display. Is configured to be able to display a stop
When the special stop display mode is stopped and displayed as the effect design when the effect design is displayed deterministically or tentatively within a certain effect period, at least one special effect design and special It is configured to be a combination with a plurality of normal directing designs that are different from the directing design,
When a certain condition is met before a change display start condition of identification information related to the certain hold is satisfied after a certain hold occurs, the certain hold is designated as a specified hold. If there is one or more pre-pending suspensions that will satisfy the variable information display start condition of the identification information prior to the specific hold, the variable information start condition of the identification information related to the pre-pending hold is set. When the special stop display mode is stopped or displayed in a definitive or tentative manner within one presentation period corresponding to the satisfaction, the plurality of normal presentation symbols cannot be of the same type, while identifying the specific suspension When the special stop display mode is deterministically or tentatively stopped and displayed within one effect period corresponding to when the information variable display start condition is satisfied, the plurality of normal effects Symbol is pachinko machine, characterized by being configured so that can be the same type.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (6)
A first start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10) into which a game ball can enter;
A second start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A variable member attached to the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) and capable of being displaced in an open state and a closed state, and when displaced into the open state, the second starting port (for example, the second main port) A game ball can enter the main game start port B10) or can be easily entered as compared to the closed state. When the game ball is displaced to the closed state, the game ball enters the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). Is a variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) configured to be difficult to enter in comparison with the inaccessible or open state,
Variable prize opening (for example, first big prize opening C10, second big prize opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
A second identification information display part (for example, a second main game symbol display part B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying the effect;
A sub game part (for example, sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display part,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
First game content determination means (e.g., game content) for determining whether or not to perform the determination based on the first random number and determining a stop display mode of the first identification information and a variable display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the determination. Determining means MN),
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display one identification information;
A second random number acquisition means (for example, a second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10); ,
Second game content determination means (for example, game content) that executes a determination of whether or not based on the second random number and determines a stop display mode of the second identification information and a variable display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the determination Determining means MN),
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display section (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g), and then the second Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the second identification information;
After the determination result based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped or displayed, or the determination result based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. A special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable prize opening (for example, the first big prize opening C10, the second big prize opening C20) advantageous to the player; ,
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) to the side of the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) MT),
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S)
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game part (for example, main control board M) side;
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)) is controlled. Production display control means SM20),
The effect design is controlled such that after the effect design is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the effect design is stopped and displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). Display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
The period from the start of variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is defined as one effect period, and the effect design can be variablely displayed within a certain effect period. Has been
An effect design that is variably displayed within a certain performance period can be tentatively stopped before the definitive stop display within the certain performance period, and is tentatively stopped and displayed. In such a case, it is possible to execute pseudo-variation that is variably displayed again within the certain production period, and when the production symbol is deterministically or tentatively stopped, the deterministic or tentative stop A special stop display mode indicating that there is a possibility of execution of a special game after the definite or tentative stop display is shown while indicating that the special game is not executed at the time of display. Is configured to be able to display a stop
The special stop in one stage corresponding to the period from the start of variable display of the first identification information to the stop display and in one stage corresponding to the period from the start of change display of the second identification information to the stop display The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the display mode is configured so that the ratio of the stop display is deterministically or tentatively different.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (7)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
Variable prize opening (for example, first big prize opening C10, second big prize opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g);
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying the effect;
A sub game part (for example, sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display part,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a random number based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10, second main game start opening B10) , Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
When random numbers are acquired by random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the variation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. Random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) for temporarily storing the acquired random number and controlling the hold to occur,
When the variation display start condition of the identification information related to a certain hold is satisfied, the determination of validity is performed based on the random number related to the certain retention, and the stop display mode of the identification information and the variation display of the identification information are performed based on the result of the determination Game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the mode;
According to the determination by the game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the identification information after
A special prize that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) advantageous to the player after the result of the determination of winning or failing is winning and the identification information is stopped and displayed. Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a game;
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) to the side of the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) MT),
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S)
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game part (for example, main control board M) side;
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)) is controlled. Production display control means SM20),
After the first effect design is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the first effect design is controlled to be stopped and displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). First effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21);
After the second effect design is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the second effect design is controlled to be stopped and displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). Second presentation symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
The period from the start of variable display of the identification information to the stop display is defined as one stage, and both the first stage design and the second stage design are variably displayed within a stage.
If there is a predetermined number of holds at any timing within a certain production period, the first production symbol that is variably displayed within the certain production period is displayed within the certain production period. This is performed when the variable display start condition of the identification information relating to any one of the predetermined number of holds is satisfied after the variable display is continued after the end of the certain production period without being stopped in a definite manner. While the first effect design that has been continuously displayed in a variable manner within one production period,
Even if there is a predetermined number of holds at any timing within a certain production period, the second production symbol that is variably displayed within the certain production period is within the certain production period. The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured to be stopped and displayed in a definite manner.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (8)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
Variable prize opening (for example, first big prize opening C10, second big prize opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g);
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying the effect;
A sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a random number based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10, second main game start opening B10) , Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
A game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that executes a determination of success / failure based on the random number, and determines a stop display mode of the identification information and a change display mode of the identification information based on the result of the determination.
According to the determination by the game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the identification information after
A special prize that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) advantageous to the player after the result of the determination of winning or failing is winning and the identification information is stopped and displayed. Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a game;
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) to the side of the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) MT),
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S)
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game part (for example, main control board M) side;
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)) is controlled. Production display control means SM20),
After the first effect design is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the first effect design is controlled to be stopped and displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). First effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21);
After the second effect design is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the second effect design is controlled to be stopped and displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). Second presentation symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
The period from the start of variable display of the identification information to the stop display is defined as one stage, and both the first stage design and the second stage design are variably displayed within a stage.
When there are multiple types of symbols for the first effect and the result of the determination is winning, when the symbols for the first effect are stopped and displayed, the combination of the symbols for the first effect that are the same type is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when the result of the success / failure determination is non-winning, when the first effect design is stopped and displayed, a combination of the first effect design that does not become the same type is stopped and displayed.
When there are multiple types of second effect symbols and the result of the determination of success / failure is winning, when the second effect symbols are stopped and displayed, the combination of the second effect symbols of the same type is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, in the case where the result of the success / failure determination is non-winning, when the second effect design is stopped and displayed, a combination of second effect designs that are not of the same type is stopped and displayed.
The combination of the second effect symbols that can be stopped and displayed when the result of the success / failure determination is non-winning, rather than the total number of combinations of the first effect symbols that can be stopped and displayed when the result of the success / failure determination is non-winning. The total number is configured to be smaller,
As an effect display mode that depends on controlling the effect display content displayed in the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the display has a plurality of types of effect display modes.
When displaying a certain first effect symbol among the plurality of types of first effect symbols, the display attribute relating to the certain first effect symbol in the certain effect display mode and the certain type The display attribute related to the certain design for the first effect in the effect display mode of a different type from the effect display mode of
When displaying a certain second effect symbol of the plurality of types of second effect symbols, the display attribute relating to the certain second effect symbol in the certain effect display mode and the certain type The display attributes related to the certain second effect design in the effect display mode different from the effect display mode are configured to be different from each other.
The result of the success / failure determination is non-winning than the probability that the first effect design is included in the combination of the first effect symbols that can be stopped and displayed when the determination result is non-winning. In this case, the pachinko gaming machine is configured such that the probability that the certain second effect symbol is included in the combination of the second effect symbols that can be stopped and displayed is higher.

M main control board, MJ game information control means MJ10 entry determination means,
MJ11-A 1st main game start entrance entrance judging means MJ11-B 2nd main game start entrance entrance judging means, MJ11-H Auxiliary game entrance entrance entrance judging means MJ11-C10 1st grand prize entrance entrance judgment Means, MJ11-C20 second prize winning entrance determination means MJ20 random number acquisition determination execution means, MJ21-A first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B second main game random number acquisition determination execution means, MJ21-H Game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ30 Hold control means, MJ31 Hold digest control means MJ31j Fluctuation start condition satisfaction determination means, MJ32 Symbol hold means MJ32-A First main game symbol hold means, MJ32b-A First main game symbol hold information temporarily Storage means MJ32-B second main game symbol hold means, MJ32b-B second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32-H Auxiliary game symbol hold Means, MJ32b-H auxiliary game symbol hold information temporary storage means MN game content determination means, MN10 win / fail lottery means MN11-A first main game pass / fail lottery means, MN11ta-A first main game pass / fail lottery table MN11-B second Main game success / failure lottery means, MN11ta-B Second main game success / failure lottery table MN11-H Auxiliary game success / failure lottery means, MN11ta-H Auxiliary game success / failure lottery table MN20 Special game transition determination means, MN40 Symbol content determination means MN41-A First main game symbol determination means, MN41ta-A First main game symbol determination lottery table MN41-B Second main game symbol determination means, MN41ta-B Second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41-H Auxiliary game symbol determination Means, MN41ta-H Auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN50 Fluctuation mode determination MN51-A first main game variation mode determination means MN51ta-A first main game variation mode determination lottery table, MN51-B second main game variation mode determination means MN51ta-B second main game variation mode determination lottery Table, MN51-H auxiliary game variation mode determination means MN51ta-H auxiliary game variation mode determination lottery table, MP game progress means MP10 display control means, MP11-C first and second main game symbol control means MP11t-C first -Second main game symbol variation management timer, MP11-H Auxiliary game symbol control means MP11t-H Auxiliary game symbol variation management timer, MP20-B Second main game start opening electric accessory opening / closing control means MP21-B second Main game start port electric player opening / closing condition determining means, MP22t-B Second main game start port electric player opening timer MP30 Special game controller , MP31 Condition determining means MP32 Special game content determining means, MP32ta Special game content reference table MP33 Special game execution means, MP33-C First and second big prize opening electric player opening / closing control means MP33c Winning ball counter, MP34 special game time Management means MP34t Special game timer, MP50 Specific game control means MP51 Probability change end condition determination means, MP52 Time / short end condition determination means MP52c Time / count counter, MB Game state temporary storage means MB10-C First and second main game state temporary storage Means, MB11b-C first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB10-H auxiliary game state temporary storage means, MB11b-H auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB20b special game related information temporary storage means, MB30b specific game related Information temporary storage means MT Information transmission controller MT10 command transmission buffer, MH prize ball payout determining means A first main game peripheral device, A10 first main game start port A11s first main game start port entrance detecting device, A20 first main game symbol display device A21g first Main game symbol display unit, A21h First main game symbol hold display unit B Second main game peripheral device, B10 Second main game start port B11s Second main game start port entrance detection device, B11d Second main game start port electric Item B20 second main game symbol display device, B21g second main game symbol display unit B21h second main game symbol holding display unit, C first and second main game shared peripheral device C10 first big prize opening, C11s first prize Grand Prize Opening Detection Device C11d First Grand Prize Opening Electric Appliance, C20 Second Grand Prize Opening C21s Second Grand Prize Opening Winning Detection Device, C21d Second Grand Prize Opening Electric Holder H Auxiliary Game Peripherals, H10 Auxiliary game starting opening H11s auxiliary game starting opening ball entrance detection device, H20 auxiliary game pattern display device H21g auxiliary game symbol display unit, H21h auxiliary game symbol reservation display unit S sub-control board, SM effect display control unit (sub-main control board)
SM10 display information receiving means, SM11b main side information temporary storage means SM20 effect display control means, SM21 decoration symbol display control means SM21n drawing display content determination means, SM21ta drawing variation content determination lottery table SM21ta-2 decoration symbol effect table, SM21b equipment related information temporary storage means SM21t-1 first equipment variation time management timer, SM22 equipment hold information display control means,
SM22b, drawing hold information temporary storage means, SM23 background effect display control means SM23n, background effect display content determination means, SM23b background effect related information temporary storage means SM24, notice effect display control means, SM24n, notice effect display content determination means SM24b, notice effect related information Temporary storage means, SM25 reach effect display control means SM25n reach effect display content determination means, SM25b reach effect related information temporary storage means SM27 right-handed display control means SM40 information transmission / reception control means SS effect display means (sub-sub control section), SS10 sub information Transmission / reception control means SS20 Image display control means, SS21b Image display related information temporary storage means SG Production display device, SG10 display area SG11 decoration symbol display area, SG12 first hold display section SG13 second hold display section KH Prize ball payout control group Board KE prize ball dispensing device

Claims (1)

The first start port arranged at a position where the game ball flowing down the first region side is easier to enter than the game ball flowing down the second region side;
A second starting port arranged at a position where a game ball flowing down the second region side can enter,
A variable winning opening that can be open and closed;
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information;
A second identification information display unit capable of displaying the second identification information;
A main game section that controls the progress of the game;
An effect display section capable of displaying the effect;
A sub game section that controls the display of effects on the effect display section,
The main game department
A first random number obtaining means for obtaining a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting port;
First game content determination means for determining whether or not the game is successful based on the first random number, and determining a stop display mode of the first identification information and a variable display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the determination.
First identification information display control means for controlling to stop and display the first identification information after variably displaying the first identification information in the first identification information display section according to the determination by the first game content determination means;
A second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting port;
Second game content determination means for determining whether or not to perform the determination based on the second random number, and determining a stop display mode of the second identification information and a variation display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the determination.
Second identification information display control means for controlling the second identification information to be stopped and displayed after the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display unit in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means;
After the result of the success / failure determination based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination and determination based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , A special game control means capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening advantageous to the player;
As a gaming state during the non-execution of the special game, there are a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state that makes it easier to enter the second starting port than the normal gaming state, and the special gaming state is set after the execution of the special game is completed. A game state transition control means capable of controlling
Game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the sub-game unit side to the sub-game unit side. The first identification information is not variably displayed while the second identification information is variably displayed.
The subsidiary game department
Game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game department side;
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means, effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit,
A first effect symbol display control means for controlling to display the final display mode of the first effect symbol on the effect display unit after the first effect symbol is variably displayed on the effect display unit;
A second effect symbol display control means for controlling to display the final display mode of the second effect symbol on the effect display unit after the second effect symbol is variably displayed on the effect display unit;
In the period from the start of variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or in the period from the start of variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first effect design and the second effect design can be displayed in a variable manner. It is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variation display mode, the variation display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variation display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variation display mode It is configured to be able to display the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variation display mode, the variation display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variation display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variation display mode It is configured to be able to display the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect design corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second display corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second display corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
The period from the start of variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is within one effect period,
For the first effect design that is variably displayed within a certain effect period, the provisional display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain effect period, and the provisional display When the mode is displayed, the pseudo-variation that is variably displayed again within the certain performance period can be executed. When the temporary display mode of the first effect design is displayed, the first effect is displayed. It is configured to display a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol.
About the second effect design that is variably displayed within a certain effect period, the special display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain effect period,
A launch notification effect can be displayed on the effect display unit to inform the second area to urge the launch of a game ball, and the launch notification effect is not displayed under the normal gaming state, while the launch notification effect is displayed. Is configured to be displayed under certain gaming conditions,
It is possible to display all of the first effect design, the second effect design and the launch notification effect at the same time,
A specific notice effect can be displayed on the effect display section within a certain effect period,
In the effect display unit, the launch notification effect is displayed at a position overlapping with the first effect symbol, and the specific notice effect is displayed at a position overlapping with the first effect symbol. ,
In the effect display unit, the launch notification effect is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the second effect symbol, while the specific notice effect is configured to be displayed at a position that overlaps with the second effect symbol. Pachinko machines that are characterized by being.

Images